1279 Commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
cvs2hg
42e84d8dd2 fixup commit for tag 'distr3' 1989-10-04 10:56:17 +00:00
ceriel
81b1d21c35 Initial revision 1987-04-13 10:32:47 +00:00
ceriel
5fde79eab8 3rd distribution 1987-04-13 10:31:48 +00:00
ceriel
d94970b0ed bug fix 1987-04-13 08:22:22 +00:00
ceriel
ecf8a9b28f Allow for cumulative -V flags. 1987-04-10 18:03:12 +00:00
ceriel
5fbe427853 variable length names 1987-04-09 14:15:25 +00:00
ceriel
9ff877dce5 final update before distribution 3! 1987-04-09 10:08:52 +00:00
ceriel
0177bf59ff Bug fixes and made faster on PDP-11 1987-04-08 17:15:30 +00:00
ceriel
53a6ded473 fix; %ld is not proper for an int 1987-04-08 15:10:26 +00:00
ceriel
651e3d05e4 don't use $?, it does not work properly (?) 1987-04-08 08:56:34 +00:00
ceriel
bfa97d2311 *** empty log message *** 1987-04-07 11:00:10 +00:00
ceriel
7a8485f425 correction for access systemcall 1987-04-07 10:01:57 +00:00
ceriel
924d580670 yet another bug fix 1987-04-07 09:57:50 +00:00
ceriel
e98dffbb1d undid a fix. Actually, the fix was wrong 1987-04-07 09:08:28 +00:00
ceriel
8ebc170ec0 st_blksize does only exist on 4.2 systems 1987-04-07 08:46:15 +00:00
ceriel
a71813b911 Some more bug fixes 1987-04-06 17:59:57 +00:00
ceriel
a30cbae14d Ported to sun 1987-04-06 13:03:05 +00:00
ceriel
6f1166bcce bug fix 1987-04-06 12:33:28 +00:00
ceriel
e04b39f7a2 Added Pascal library 1987-04-06 07:56:49 +00:00
ceriel
7af2ecb17f minor bug fix 1987-04-03 20:13:08 +00:00
ceriel
a85ecb6719 use LDFLAGS, not LFLAGS 1987-04-03 19:58:39 +00:00
ceriel
aad62add90 Bug fix: a character was compared to op_lab, which is >= 128. 1987-04-03 16:48:53 +00:00
ceriel
80ff3e60c4 2 last minute-additions (oh dear ...) 1987-04-03 16:21:24 +00:00
ceriel
4fd846804a Seemed to prefer reg_any registers, which caused addresses of procedures
to end up in data registers on the m68020. This is temporarily fixed,
but actually, the descriptor files could be somewhat more general.
1987-04-03 15:38:52 +00:00
ceriel
e8bc890c10 improved somewhat 1987-04-03 15:06:25 +00:00
ceriel
f31c9f2a67 target optimizer must be installed before trying to install libraries! 1987-04-03 13:24:20 +00:00
ceriel
e4758a2c48 -K becomes -KR 1987-04-03 13:18:38 +00:00
ceriel
86b0bd5df3 Added some more documentation on the global optimizer 1987-04-03 13:14:37 +00:00
ceriel
96d15a6c05 minor mod 1987-04-03 11:18:49 +00:00
ceriel
4b30a95d7a minor mods 1987-04-03 11:16:46 +00:00
ceriel
e0c5bb9ffe some more fixes 1987-04-03 10:51:37 +00:00
ceriel
924f463126 some more corrections 1987-04-02 16:59:27 +00:00
ceriel
5f0802bd2c correct interpreter description files on SYStem V or Sun machines 1987-04-02 14:26:58 +00:00
ceriel
c42541c99b Added declaration for malloc 1987-04-02 14:12:21 +00:00
ceriel
8675bc2b01 bug fixes 1987-04-02 14:09:21 +00:00
ceriel
75a8a6cc64 some bug fixes 1987-04-02 14:04:17 +00:00
ceriel
1fdfb2b738 improved call to C_lin 1987-04-02 13:02:16 +00:00
ceriel
c73f576314 "word" is always a long 1987-04-02 10:26:42 +00:00
ceriel
d2734bbdd9 "word" is always a long 1987-04-02 10:17:06 +00:00
ceriel
5889533297 "word" now is always a long 1987-04-02 10:07:10 +00:00
ceriel
410bfa3cb2 "word" is always a "long" 1987-04-02 10:04:25 +00:00
ceriel
af7b083fd8 "word" is now always a "long" 1987-04-02 09:54:41 +00:00
ceriel
ab6816c074 Allow "|" in "system" lines, must be in quotes 1987-04-02 09:07:05 +00:00
ceriel
22c23521a3 corrected for 4.2 bsd 1987-04-01 15:37:14 +00:00
ceriel
f76127e364 updated for 3rd distribution 1987-04-01 13:50:18 +00:00
ceriel
75cd05c50e Adapted for distribution 3 1987-04-01 13:47:09 +00:00
ceriel
11db9b8fdc Added EMHOME 1987-04-01 08:54:00 +00:00
ceriel
d9f3663dcc Initial revision 1987-04-01 08:28:20 +00:00
ceriel
395b1bc424 Changed strategy somewhat 1987-04-01 08:20:39 +00:00
ceriel
6eee593f31 Initial revision 1987-03-31 22:17:51 +00:00
ceriel
dec576c89d improved "clean" entry 1987-03-31 13:11:31 +00:00
ceriel
1da25fb7a5 minor change to manual page 1987-03-31 12:44:15 +00:00
ceriel
82f042ba98 Also install manual page 1987-03-31 12:33:23 +00:00
ceriel
e97f144bf4 Initial revision 1987-03-31 12:14:08 +00:00
ceriel
8b90e3480a Added Rcs Id 1987-03-31 11:09:18 +00:00
ceriel
e80b36ded2 Added copyright notice 1987-03-31 11:06:20 +00:00
ceriel
b46981f4ce converted to 4-4 1987-03-31 10:58:30 +00:00
ceriel
5d32d4987e Added copyright notice 1987-03-31 10:50:20 +00:00
ceriel
94f87e3557 replaced copyright notice 1987-03-31 10:45:54 +00:00
ceriel
400c036c67 Added Rcs Id 1987-03-31 10:45:53 +00:00
ceriel
9dbda2e573 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-31 10:34:14 +00:00
ceriel
2fba4e5e99 made more portable 1987-03-31 10:05:26 +00:00
ceriel
bc6486d7b0 Ported to other m68000 systems 1987-03-31 09:23:20 +00:00
ceriel
526d769271 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-31 08:42:07 +00:00
ceriel
f67bfc485c moer robust version 1987-03-31 08:16:41 +00:00
ceriel
b53a5e2540 more robust version 1987-03-31 08:15:22 +00:00
ceriel
23aff10b83 Made to work on system V and SUN 1987-03-31 08:05:50 +00:00
ceriel
f18ec81394 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-31 08:02:40 +00:00
ceriel
0bf8f8ce34 layout improvements 1987-03-31 07:56:14 +00:00
ceriel
ceb3fb4ed3 dispatch tables generated now, layout improvements 1987-03-31 07:54:43 +00:00
ceriel
8e4718c760 modified to generate dispatch tables automatically 1987-03-31 07:51:34 +00:00
ceriel
b578202876 minor layout improvements 1987-03-31 07:45:17 +00:00
ceriel
7a583a86ef don't use /usr/lib/ditroff 1987-03-31 07:43:56 +00:00
ceriel
838e83c1f3 minor improvement in layout 1987-03-31 07:42:10 +00:00
ceriel
49e292676e Some improvements 1987-03-31 07:40:45 +00:00
ceriel
2e3f2a4a62 tail_em must be scanned twice, because tail_mon contains C-routines 1987-03-31 07:30:44 +00:00
ceriel
2e948de48c *** empty log message *** 1987-03-31 07:28:06 +00:00
ceriel
8d209d8e01 umount, NOT unmount! 1987-03-31 07:28:05 +00:00
ceriel
2cc1d41f57 Pass preprocessor flags 1987-03-30 13:20:05 +00:00
ceriel
8d5be706a8 No line directives 1987-03-30 13:18:10 +00:00
ceriel
18e5f78f21 Don't use reghp 1987-03-30 12:40:09 +00:00
ceriel
e07da4cad3 don't use reghp 1987-03-30 12:35:46 +00:00
ceriel
3233aaf5a5 renamed systemcalls 1987-03-30 09:39:38 +00:00
ceriel
3f4f469489 moved the mantra part to another place, because it now
also contains the interpreter part.
1987-03-30 09:19:00 +00:00
ceriel
0036c7bd8a Added interpreter 1987-03-30 09:18:03 +00:00
ceriel
db437cbda8 moved interpreter to another place 1987-03-30 09:05:14 +00:00
ceriel
6c84dcbf80 Initial revision 1987-03-30 08:02:43 +00:00
ceriel
44089a20ab Added occam 1987-03-30 08:00:59 +00:00
ceriel
8e8b8c27d7 use own occam library 1987-03-30 07:59:57 +00:00
ceriel
70c76be920 Use own occam library 1987-03-30 07:55:12 +00:00
ceriel
0170bb504b Added Occam 1987-03-30 07:51:20 +00:00
ceriel
0adc61842f Added ICRNL 1987-03-30 07:48:19 +00:00
ceriel
a0542acab4 removed ".byte" 1987-03-29 13:39:14 +00:00
ceriel
9c0aa5e7a3 updated 1987-03-29 13:33:37 +00:00
ceriel
4f41981cd8 modified to do more in the presence of errors 1987-03-29 13:07:44 +00:00
ceriel
a7c65b091b use print library 1987-03-29 13:00:40 +00:00
ceriel
c6cf0725d0 bug fixes 1987-03-29 12:55:25 +00:00
ceriel
de8fb5d489 Minor fixes 1987-03-27 16:39:57 +00:00
ceriel
5458134efb *** empty log message *** 1987-03-27 15:13:05 +00:00
ceriel
e3043b7dcb minor adaption, to close filedescriptor immediatelym if possible 1987-03-27 15:11:06 +00:00
ceriel
19d29e4018 changd values somewhat, added values for small machines 1987-03-27 13:56:50 +00:00
ceriel
1d443b6b4b bug fix 1987-03-27 13:34:46 +00:00
ceriel
ecc1b3b971 .fat --> .fatal 1987-03-27 12:43:17 +00:00
ceriel
dc44540ee8 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-27 12:27:17 +00:00
ceriel
fa4dfdf813 minor fix to LLlex.h 1987-03-27 10:37:58 +00:00
ceriel
46a405c131 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-27 10:06:59 +00:00
ceriel
129343dc94 Franks version 1987-03-27 10:05:53 +00:00
ceriel
0cc30a7e49 franks version 1987-03-27 09:58:03 +00:00
ceriel
2aa64be3a6 Franks version 1987-03-27 09:55:28 +00:00
ceriel
13c208de3b Fraks version 1987-03-27 09:50:57 +00:00
ceriel
ac395ba4a6 Initial revision 1987-03-27 09:47:16 +00:00
ceriel
3177072e2f Frans doodemans version 1987-03-27 09:33:02 +00:00
ceriel
2febff1a79 Frans Doodemans version 1987-03-27 09:28:16 +00:00
ceriel
f4fb73386e fixed 1987-03-27 09:21:14 +00:00
ceriel
cf8d769c73 fixed 1987-03-27 09:06:28 +00:00
ceriel
9c8b34c47d remainder now returned in d0 1987-03-27 08:57:38 +00:00
ceriel
ea63596eb3 remainder now is returned in d0. 1987-03-27 08:49:14 +00:00
ceriel
db5b8614f3 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-26 17:54:45 +00:00
ceriel
e190db8128 Initial revision 1987-03-26 17:36:49 +00:00
ceriel
da28bdd2f0 Adapted for system V 1987-03-26 17:33:23 +00:00
ceriel
21e0bd5996 Initial revision 1987-03-26 17:30:29 +00:00
ceriel
4e19ece566 another fix for an illegal initialisation struct 1987-03-26 16:16:21 +00:00
ceriel
bac2a42c82 added estack.str, minor fix 1987-03-26 15:32:26 +00:00
ceriel
044587ec57 added index 1987-03-26 15:28:08 +00:00
ceriel
32d12a9c7a Another adaption for small machines 1987-03-26 12:45:16 +00:00
ceriel
f37189ba9b modification to make it easier to edit 1987-03-26 12:44:04 +00:00
ceriel
1cfa4a7bec Don't use ranges in the "tr" command. They work differently on
System V
1987-03-26 11:16:28 +00:00
ceriel
4eb84b928b align parameters on word_size, not word_align 1987-03-26 11:05:28 +00:00
ceriel
2f74f819d4 Use "myecho" when using -n option 1987-03-26 10:33:30 +00:00
ceriel
09125cce6b redesign of ival, other minor changes 1987-03-25 23:14:43 +00:00
ceriel
db666da35a improved the "clean" entry 1987-03-25 22:48:25 +00:00
ceriel
8c20d513fd updated 1987-03-25 22:43:09 +00:00
ceriel
c65803b306 made a bit more verbose 1987-03-25 22:26:46 +00:00
ceriel
0cd2bbdc09 updated 1987-03-25 18:52:04 +00:00
ceriel
8a5f7d09c9 minor mods 1987-03-25 17:54:24 +00:00
ceriel
528ec8869b install a smaller malloc 1987-03-25 17:39:18 +00:00
ceriel
e5116f86dc Fixed a problem with SRU: no regs available 1987-03-25 16:26:58 +00:00
ceriel
3e694c1b9d made names of dynamically varying length 1987-03-25 16:24:41 +00:00
ceriel
eeb5148f29 BMASK was unsigned, which caused problems with some C compilers (ours) 1987-03-25 15:57:22 +00:00
ceriel
7f60f6f8c1 Added possibility to pass -V option to compilers 1987-03-25 12:42:12 +00:00
ceriel
032929c22c changed IDL 1987-03-25 10:53:47 +00:00
ceriel
9748f946ce Allow ANY to be used in a constraint 1987-03-25 08:35:01 +00:00
ceriel
a0897e2ed3 Generated illegal initialization constants. 1987-03-25 07:53:57 +00:00
ceriel
f408948925 description of asopt apparently has to be in front of the one for as. 1987-03-25 07:49:59 +00:00
ceriel
1dd241938c replaced cc by $(CC) 1987-03-24 11:10:23 +00:00
ceriel
34f41d7bf1 bug fix 1987-03-24 08:41:44 +00:00
ceriel
43c55159d6 more porting to pdp 11 1987-03-23 23:27:03 +00:00
ceriel
e67b672727 more porting to vu45 1987-03-23 23:22:54 +00:00
ceriel
91b39c7df7 Replaced comment char '#' with '!'.
Some shells use # as a comment char.
1987-03-23 21:01:36 +00:00
ceriel
1694c10f39 Adapted for new distribution 1987-03-23 21:00:02 +00:00
ceriel
391f6cc9ea could not be handled by MINIX pre-processor 1987-03-23 14:48:56 +00:00
ceriel
375b5e9182 Bug fix in BLM 1987-03-20 19:21:23 +00:00
ceriel
4e03fc78dd many minor fixes and modifications 1987-03-20 08:30:31 +00:00
ceriel
73818f1a53 bug fix 1987-03-19 11:21:54 +00:00
ceriel
bcd037018f still does not fit. Delete bitfields 1987-03-19 10:51:40 +00:00
ceriel
878cbab737 deleted "unsigned chars" 1987-03-19 10:20:40 +00:00
ceriel
b86dc9f84d adapted for 7 character significance 1987-03-19 10:16:56 +00:00
ceriel
8829d77144 made name shorter 1987-03-19 10:15:58 +00:00
ceriel
88db8b43da Added distr entry 1987-03-19 10:12:51 +00:00
ceriel
fd1682052d contained a switch on a long 1987-03-19 10:08:31 +00:00
ceriel
74a1a176c5 em?.o and C_failed.o must be at the end of the archive 1987-03-18 19:20:38 +00:00
ceriel
dcf7aa2723 Also install manual page 1987-03-18 19:15:56 +00:00
ceriel
80fd06aa6a Added LDFLAGS 1987-03-18 09:50:46 +00:00
ceriel
bede819e42 Made the dummy ranlib more verbose 1987-03-18 09:44:56 +00:00
ceriel
5fe6bf0fcd made to work on pdp-11 1987-03-18 09:35:31 +00:00
ceriel
8e9f1f781c changed some names of field selectors 1987-03-18 09:29:56 +00:00
ceriel
50a71251a1 contained calls of non-functions 1987-03-17 22:54:16 +00:00
ceriel
717af548d5 improved userhook handling, requiring a change in LLnext and LLskip 1987-03-17 22:50:40 +00:00
ceriel
451c0d6679 improved userhook handling, This required some changes in the semantics
of LLnext and LLskip.
1987-03-17 22:41:18 +00:00
ceriel
78303cdc07 improved storage allocation 1987-03-17 22:31:43 +00:00
ceriel
10080ca0f2 deleted exit.c 1987-03-17 22:28:15 +00:00
ceriel
f95c97b38c Use LDFLAGS 1987-03-17 16:37:04 +00:00
ceriel
bbce3bd894 use LDFLAGS 1987-03-17 16:33:55 +00:00
ceriel
15382edbd6 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-17 16:24:42 +00:00
ceriel
b7cd38ab12 Use LDFLAGS 1987-03-17 16:18:08 +00:00
ceriel
2d9f4d8c03 LDFLAGS: -i 1987-03-17 16:15:32 +00:00
ceriel
ee4d170525 Made constants dependant on size of machine 1987-03-17 14:42:12 +00:00
ceriel
a6b6375985 Don't switch on longs! 1987-03-17 11:12:09 +00:00
ceriel
e203ddb7b6 Don't use the -n option! 1987-03-17 11:02:37 +00:00
ceriel
321fa30a5f bug fix 1987-03-17 10:44:16 +00:00
ceriel
d676a5df2a Bug fix 1987-03-17 10:39:18 +00:00
ceriel
58923cbcc0 prevent use of ranlib on pdp-11's 1987-03-17 00:33:41 +00:00
ceriel
2e7ca940c2 many changes for installing 3rd distribution 1987-03-17 00:14:10 +00:00
ceriel
49714af3e6 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-17 00:13:03 +00:00
ceriel
c5b11f6ad3 Initial revision 1987-03-16 23:53:04 +00:00
ceriel
89c7440c0d Initial revision 1987-03-16 23:32:34 +00:00
ceriel
c41f370421 Added LEXLIB 1987-03-16 22:35:21 +00:00
ceriel
52cc95b957 Added a %p (number of positions). The BSD 2.9 lex has a too small default. 1987-03-16 22:28:27 +00:00
ceriel
9a07fc841f Default paths were computed wrong. This is corrected. 1987-03-16 22:26:03 +00:00
ceriel
d52e25949a Indirect function calls should be just that! 1987-03-16 15:14:52 +00:00
ceriel
e140a87a6b bug fix 1987-03-16 15:11:51 +00:00
ceriel
617303659c Deleted reference to unused varaibles 1987-03-16 15:09:36 +00:00
ceriel
2135ccd420 %c does not work with null-bytes on some systems (BSD 2.9) 1987-03-16 08:56:31 +00:00
ceriel
909a82d2d7 updated 1987-03-12 23:46:19 +00:00
ceriel
dbfe40a080 The updated installation guide for distribution 3 1987-03-12 23:44:29 +00:00
ceriel
3f75d2b08f Added -Dvoid=int to CFLAGS 1987-03-12 22:50:03 +00:00
ceriel
21b427d4df made just a little bit more robust 1987-03-12 22:29:25 +00:00
ceriel
4549b5129d don't use "void"! 1987-03-12 22:24:19 +00:00
ceriel
60f9d1b6c6 don't use void! 1987-03-12 22:23:17 +00:00
ceriel
9ab7bf2408 Bug fixes 1987-03-12 19:18:59 +00:00
ceriel
755ea27d46 Added room for data, made room for rom smaller 1987-03-12 17:53:32 +00:00
ceriel
3f566164c2 Bug fixed that prevented "aal x" from working properly 1987-03-12 17:16:04 +00:00
ceriel
dbac04eb47 removed the "void" stuff. Some compilers just don't digest it. 1987-03-12 11:33:24 +00:00
ceriel
991c568ee4 moved the definition of sys_filesize. It had a funny place. 1987-03-12 09:30:03 +00:00
ceriel
9d744c31c3 Replaced the comment character by a !.
The #-character caused problems.
1987-03-12 08:46:58 +00:00
ceriel
7ae0622730 replaced copyright notice 1987-03-12 08:25:15 +00:00
ceriel
e0aa93de4c replaced copyright 1987-03-12 08:23:08 +00:00
ceriel
d8463c9bc4 it's --> its 1987-03-11 21:47:25 +00:00
ceriel
4bbe1cfa65 Added ashow 1987-03-11 17:12:38 +00:00
ceriel
9a3d983659 Initial revision 1987-03-11 17:12:23 +00:00
ceriel
1452a26361 minor mod 1987-03-11 16:15:16 +00:00
ceriel
bdebe50836 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-11 15:55:51 +00:00
ceriel
edcea8f6db Updated for 3rd distribution 1987-03-11 15:51:35 +00:00
ceriel
50b2140d46 Adapted to current situation 1987-03-11 15:41:52 +00:00
ceriel
e2eeea5162 remove regnoglob.c and regglob.c before copying to them 1987-03-11 15:39:01 +00:00
ceriel
35f5f8e187 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-11 15:16:01 +00:00
ceriel
f8e02e5d4c Added arch.5 1987-03-11 15:09:25 +00:00
ceriel
32fa870855 Initial revision 1987-03-11 15:07:29 +00:00
ceriel
b99a714497 minor changes 1987-03-11 14:54:29 +00:00
ceriel
778948b661 Working version 1987-03-11 14:30:13 +00:00
ceriel
f6083608f9 minor change 1987-03-11 14:19:02 +00:00
ceriel
f694435063 minor change 1987-03-11 13:56:17 +00:00
ceriel
e86b8463ea minor change 1987-03-11 13:34:07 +00:00
ceriel
9d24b2a46b *** empty log message *** 1987-03-11 13:13:49 +00:00
ceriel
9e0913d6e4 Initial revision 1987-03-11 13:13:36 +00:00
ceriel
e03d11afa2 Bug fix. 1987-03-11 11:13:55 +00:00
ceriel
7aa7619c4e *** empty log message *** 1987-03-11 11:05:32 +00:00
ceriel
9db939f74e Added sun2 1987-03-11 09:50:23 +00:00
ceriel
96fd613e89 Added a "distr" entry 1987-03-11 09:49:33 +00:00
ceriel
8a9b2379dc Bug fixed that was introduced by Kees Visser's modifications 1987-03-11 09:23:23 +00:00
ceriel
07f5d3cce4 Fixed a bug with line-directives, added copyright notice 1987-03-10 17:51:10 +00:00
ceriel
94ff96cf1f bug fix 1987-03-10 17:41:37 +00:00
ceriel
fb775d4ead Bug fix 1987-03-10 17:38:55 +00:00
ceriel
12f56d6501 Initial revision 1987-03-10 16:49:13 +00:00
ceriel
b234851f00 Deleted -DUSG 1987-03-10 15:55:39 +00:00
ceriel
6338348877 Added __USG 1987-03-10 15:54:32 +00:00
ceriel
c6dee66c71 Deleted -DBSD4_2 1987-03-10 15:45:38 +00:00
ceriel
4cf6acb1e2 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-10 15:44:25 +00:00
ceriel
8fb04a83bc Removed -DBSD4_2 1987-03-10 15:41:20 +00:00
ceriel
587c766673 Added CC_ALIGN 1987-03-10 15:40:20 +00:00
ceriel
76fea1fbca __USG and __BSD4_2 introduced, dysize added 1987-03-10 15:07:26 +00:00
ceriel
6852a8ef39 use __BSD4_2 1987-03-10 14:50:48 +00:00
ceriel
517baed1b1 use __BSD4_2 and __USG 1987-03-10 14:49:29 +00:00
ceriel
2e4cf6fe8c Added a define for __BSD4_2 1987-03-10 14:14:38 +00:00
ceriel
85d5cf1407 ino_t is a long on 4.2 systems 1987-03-10 14:10:34 +00:00
ceriel
053564d9e9 Added Rcs Id 1987-03-10 11:58:22 +00:00
ceriel
6eaf182cee Added Rcs Id 1987-03-10 11:49:39 +00:00
ceriel
16687889e3 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-10 10:27:24 +00:00
ceriel
32ca133da5 Initial revision 1987-03-10 10:23:19 +00:00
ceriel
a18b0fbcff Initial revision 1987-03-10 10:09:07 +00:00
ceriel
4f0cb4abe1 Added Rcs Id 1987-03-10 09:24:02 +00:00
ceriel
6c812387fd Added copyright notice 1987-03-10 01:42:07 +00:00
ceriel
5537abbdfb Added copyright notice 1987-03-10 01:26:51 +00:00
ceriel
7649bba8f5 Added copyright notice 1987-03-10 00:12:40 +00:00
ceriel
0772a09303 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-09 23:50:41 +00:00
ceriel
b43fed4fbc Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 23:47:46 +00:00
ceriel
7270bbb7f0 Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 22:11:47 +00:00
ceriel
a0eea34497 Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 22:06:21 +00:00
ceriel
49ac6c4e07 Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 21:59:22 +00:00
ceriel
462cb0421f Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 21:33:18 +00:00
ceriel
d6e4d5a18c Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 21:20:21 +00:00
ceriel
815166e421 Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 19:15:41 +00:00
ceriel
7880748ecd Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 16:02:32 +00:00
ceriel
aae2cebccd Initial revision 1987-03-09 15:53:04 +00:00
ceriel
f43b2cb2bd Adapted for new version 1987-03-09 15:48:43 +00:00
ceriel
4e5611ac7b Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 15:22:58 +00:00
ceriel
b8835cee3f Added copyright notice 1987-03-09 15:15:03 +00:00
ceriel
c428b33acc replaced return by exit 1987-03-09 14:22:45 +00:00
ceriel
262490efaa Replaced return from main by exit 1987-03-09 13:29:04 +00:00
ceriel
11af9f9716 replaced returns from main by exits (bloody SUN) 1987-03-09 13:25:44 +00:00
ceriel
bb787ae7cb Added exit from main 1987-03-09 13:22:45 +00:00
ceriel
2fba9c579e Added exit to main program of tab.c 1987-03-09 13:19:38 +00:00
ceriel
1583b4191a Added an exit from main 1987-03-09 13:14:32 +00:00
ceriel
1fdc5a5fe6 replaced returns from main by exits (bloody SUN) 1987-03-09 13:07:42 +00:00
ceriel
717baa8bd8 Added exit to main 1987-03-09 13:04:58 +00:00
ceriel
0bec865e32 Added an exit from main 1987-03-09 13:01:51 +00:00
ceriel
29a4a0266b exit from main, instead of return (bloody SUN) 1987-03-09 12:59:18 +00:00
ceriel
40424d5864 exit from main instead of return (bloody SUN) 1987-03-09 12:55:24 +00:00
ceriel
ead0c95f43 Added an exit form main 1987-03-09 12:54:03 +00:00
ceriel
839be66f85 exit from main instead of return 1987-03-09 12:52:10 +00:00
ceriel
8fc79aa735 to3dig did not give a return value 1987-03-09 12:47:23 +00:00
ceriel
c094aebd80 Select did not handle these HOL's 1987-03-09 12:42:42 +00:00
ceriel
dea6cc76e3 exits instead of returns from main (bloody SUN) 1987-03-09 11:45:49 +00:00
ceriel
236c6c40f0 Added a warning for floating point constants 1987-03-09 11:25:28 +00:00
ceriel
49fc462ee5 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-09 10:43:44 +00:00
ceriel
fa0f6cd0c6 Lindseys fix to a bug with nested procedures 1987-03-09 10:15:51 +00:00
ceriel
539c95237e remove dummy when cleaning 1987-03-06 16:40:56 +00:00
ceriel
eef81c09bb Initial revision 1987-03-06 16:36:16 +00:00
ceriel
742a4d91d4 Initial revision 1987-03-06 14:41:52 +00:00
ceriel
1be18e9a48 Initial revision 1987-03-06 09:02:15 +00:00
ceriel
3c9b5ad0bd deleted idepth 1987-03-06 08:38:29 +00:00
ceriel
5f15b0bce0 Now really NOFLOAT 1987-03-06 00:00:34 +00:00
ceriel
f1f98288e0 Handle NOFLOAT 1987-03-05 19:55:40 +00:00
ceriel
4539fd3e09 bug fix 1987-03-05 19:27:53 +00:00
ceriel
a39c668bab *** empty log message *** 1987-03-05 19:24:35 +00:00
ceriel
1a5d5ddec2 procentry/procexit were not called properly 1987-03-05 19:22:33 +00:00
ceriel
f36ee6de55 could loop again 1987-03-05 17:40:48 +00:00
ceriel
7559525e48 ADB dumped core on the SUN, because of 0-indexes in the symbol table.
They are replaced by pointers to null-strings
1987-03-05 15:44:17 +00:00
ceriel
a1c73c0335 main exits instead of returns. Bloody SUNs 1987-03-05 15:22:05 +00:00
ceriel
1ac5d646cf *** empty log message *** 1987-03-05 15:04:44 +00:00
ceriel
6ac8c31b76 Improved installation procedure 1987-03-05 15:00:13 +00:00
ceriel
8fbd81a884 A wrong flag is no longer fatal 1987-03-05 14:57:15 +00:00
ceriel
11ef9eed01 divu.l, etc where encoded wrong. 1987-03-05 11:21:34 +00:00
ceriel
66c5ebf42f Only echo the newlines in comments, no formfeeds, etc, because
you don't know what you are preprocessing.
1987-03-05 11:07:16 +00:00
ceriel
3e68ea031b Bug fix in LIM instruction 1987-03-05 11:02:05 +00:00
ceriel
bb51b8f4c0 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-05 10:59:57 +00:00
ceriel
f87e83c697 ??? 1987-03-05 10:57:33 +00:00
ceriel
a3426ca0e2 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-04 16:43:03 +00:00
ceriel
8c3fc983bc Also remove "main" when making clean 1987-03-04 15:46:02 +00:00
ceriel
5380ae4768 Set "saveemp" before calling compute. compute might need it. 1987-03-04 10:34:57 +00:00
ceriel
0b92bc0cd7 Set saveemp before calling "compute". "compute" might need it! 1987-03-04 10:32:22 +00:00
ceriel
48296556f5 fixed typo 1987-03-04 10:14:13 +00:00
ceriel
55b3557f22 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-04 10:01:01 +00:00
ceriel
25dfa91caa *** empty log message *** 1987-03-04 09:54:23 +00:00
ceriel
bb6058feaa Remove .c files after making "all" 1987-03-03 15:52:36 +00:00
ceriel
a2da7ad5f8 Don't remove .c files 1987-03-03 15:52:09 +00:00
ceriel
b7ee0bf85e *** empty log message *** 1987-03-03 11:22:29 +00:00
ceriel
652354e59d Replaced returns from main by exits (bloody suns!) 1987-03-03 11:13:52 +00:00
ceriel
48cc05ccf2 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-03 11:11:39 +00:00
ceriel
004f017550 Initial revision 1987-03-03 10:59:52 +00:00
ceriel
4d4c8b45fb *** empty log message *** 1987-03-03 10:49:10 +00:00
ceriel
295380491f Initial revision 1987-03-03 10:44:56 +00:00
ceriel
2d362c2274 Added Henri's article 1987-03-03 10:43:03 +00:00
ceriel
fcaf807aed Initial revision 1987-03-03 10:25:25 +00:00
ceriel
2f9ab80205 Initial revision 1987-03-03 09:46:29 +00:00
ceriel
c32da75ccd Initial revision 1987-03-03 09:37:26 +00:00
ceriel
1194f5f28c Initial revision 1987-03-03 08:48:53 +00:00
ceriel
c4a8f2371d *** empty log message *** 1987-03-03 08:43:46 +00:00
ceriel
c5f0e41be9 clean up the mess after compiling 1987-03-02 19:30:24 +00:00
ceriel
154bb5df06 Now uses BIGMACHINE from local.h 1987-03-02 17:30:37 +00:00
ceriel
30d1a948c8 Added "BIGMACHINE" 1987-03-02 17:28:50 +00:00
ceriel
5097663cb8 Bug foix 1987-03-02 17:18:11 +00:00
ceriel
04618dbe64 Don't pass -O to lint. 1987-03-02 16:48:46 +00:00
ceriel
721de974ee Bug fix 1987-03-02 16:43:19 +00:00
ceriel
70a459a112 Be a bit more tolerant about line directives. 1987-03-02 16:40:14 +00:00
ceriel
cc70e683c7 Adapted for new framework. 1987-03-02 16:22:15 +00:00
ceriel
eb5d7ef3fe Improved userhooks 1987-03-02 16:15:07 +00:00
ceriel
b457c3dc09 Adapted to current situation 1987-03-02 13:30:52 +00:00
ceriel
27a779e535 Adapted to current situation and format 1987-03-02 13:13:24 +00:00
ceriel
e41a9f5b9c Added manual pages 1987-03-02 13:08:51 +00:00
ceriel
f9b1523794 Initial revision 1987-03-02 13:06:23 +00:00
ceriel
033000c4e1 Added manaul page 1987-03-02 13:03:17 +00:00
ceriel
a08ef0e369 *** empty log message *** 1987-03-02 12:54:52 +00:00
ceriel
bc1fb58cd6 SHARE --> SHR 1987-03-02 12:42:38 +00:00
ceriel
a584a04f03 fixed typo 1987-03-02 12:31:44 +00:00
ceriel
b0d2a7c913 Initial revision 1987-03-02 11:28:52 +00:00
ceriel
e4af749931 Adapted to current situation 1987-03-02 10:35:44 +00:00
ceriel
611c948140 reordering, becaiuseuse "cmisc" utilities were needed before "modules" 1987-03-02 09:09:16 +00:00
ceriel
f1fc51c85c Sun defines tmpfile in stdio.h. Renamed Tmpfile 1987-03-02 09:06:26 +00:00
ceriel
1e10c0cf98 maxchunk definition made static 1987-03-02 08:55:23 +00:00
ceriel
b10452c2dc Forced first linedirective with source filename 1987-03-02 08:50:08 +00:00
ceriel
8ed274e96e *** empty log message *** 1987-03-02 08:48:36 +00:00
ceriel
3115fb5402 Initial revision 1987-02-27 17:11:54 +00:00
ceriel
a40c4a87ba Patched to work also on machines on which the shell "remembers"
where a command is. (Bloody Sun).
1987-02-27 17:10:36 +00:00
bruce
2f204ff2ca Initial revision 1987-02-27 16:04:07 +00:00
ceriel
d0103bd7d9 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-27 13:07:49 +00:00
ceriel
a3d34a0e63 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-27 12:54:03 +00:00
ceriel
13a3574979 used to dump core on empty files 1987-02-27 09:54:23 +00:00
ceriel
f5099e7d9a *** empty log message *** 1987-02-26 19:54:57 +00:00
ceriel
f8204dc8a9 newer version 1987-02-26 19:49:42 +00:00
ceriel
7932234ed8 Added Occam 1987-02-26 19:47:01 +00:00
ceriel
59de9303c5 Initial revision 1987-02-26 19:46:35 +00:00
ceriel
e10e56542d *** empty log message *** 1987-02-26 19:41:49 +00:00
ceriel
474d2fb2c6 Ported to System V 1987-02-26 17:58:55 +00:00
ceriel
45bae5569b Deleed mantra4 1987-02-26 16:31:26 +00:00
ceriel
eee1d86fc3 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-26 16:22:08 +00:00
ceriel
d35866d832 Added cv 1987-02-26 16:18:39 +00:00
ceriel
5939ce9331 Added the cv program 1987-02-26 16:05:00 +00:00
ceriel
a7329c38e3 Updated 1987-02-26 15:44:00 +00:00
ceriel
0e0071d790 Added another pattern 1987-02-26 15:40:44 +00:00
ceriel
8c0d727dc1 Bug fix in strswap 1987-02-26 14:08:16 +00:00
ceriel
509439d906 Added ocm, m2, ego, opt2, . 1987-02-26 12:45:37 +00:00
ceriel
63f1aea871 Added the SUFFIX variable 1987-02-26 12:44:11 +00:00
ceriel
c4e1e516ee Adapted to current situation 1987-02-26 10:29:12 +00:00
ceriel
690cd32023 Initial revision 1987-02-26 10:26:19 +00:00
ceriel
00b8ca7b58 Added Occam 1987-02-26 10:24:07 +00:00
ceriel
f06b2707b9 Added Occam 1987-02-26 10:06:50 +00:00
ceriel
51eff14456 Initial revision 1987-02-26 09:55:46 +00:00
ceriel
84e04a4859 Added Occam 1987-02-25 19:45:49 +00:00
ceriel
cfd7ba8bbb *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 19:45:18 +00:00
ceriel
4922093f24 Initial revision 1987-02-25 19:45:17 +00:00
ceriel
897d312a1d Adeded Occam 1987-02-25 19:44:22 +00:00
ceriel
457e3f6033 Added OPccam 1987-02-25 19:40:22 +00:00
ceriel
59e9948aac Initial revision 1987-02-25 19:16:28 +00:00
ceriel
3ab2228a8b *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 19:10:01 +00:00
ceriel
992a6a39c5 Added occam 1987-02-25 19:05:21 +00:00
ceriel
b66b1b1965 adapted for new C-compiler 1987-02-25 19:00:04 +00:00
ceriel
3b2e80225a *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 18:54:14 +00:00
ceriel
1fddbd0ee3 Initial revision 1987-02-25 18:30:22 +00:00
ceriel
32be4760cd Initial revision 1987-02-25 17:14:10 +00:00
ceriel
cc60420184 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 16:58:32 +00:00
ceriel
a5d96ae90f my version (CJ) 1987-02-25 16:56:31 +00:00
ceriel
cf04776017 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 16:42:41 +00:00
ceriel
0d6d5ff541 Initial revision 1987-02-25 16:41:54 +00:00
ceriel
362378a94a my version (CJ) 1987-02-25 16:41:09 +00:00
ceriel
59fd6b0334 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 13:47:15 +00:00
ceriel
a2c18875f6 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-25 11:04:30 +00:00
ceriel
c57a723546 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 18:41:53 +00:00
ceriel
2eeacf071a Initial revision 1987-02-24 18:36:02 +00:00
ceriel
bc94559e4d Initial revision 1987-02-24 17:05:53 +00:00
ceriel
a731f979b0 many new things 1987-02-24 16:41:01 +00:00
ceriel
7dc1c84031 Adapted to new distr3 1987-02-24 16:36:22 +00:00
ceriel
c05eb0a5c7 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 16:07:04 +00:00
ceriel
3edd0994c6 Added ncgg.6 1987-02-24 15:47:05 +00:00
ceriel
e51bf3a056 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 15:44:46 +00:00
ceriel
3a91ff6da5 renamed a parameters because a local had the same name 1987-02-24 15:41:16 +00:00
ceriel
ac7976eea9 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 15:36:34 +00:00
ceriel
40a36c570e vi Ma 1987-02-24 15:32:48 +00:00
ceriel
0d6f436e2f *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 13:47:23 +00:00
ceriel
9cab0b0105 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-24 13:10:59 +00:00
ceriel
5817719a7c An #endif was missing 1987-02-24 12:38:21 +00:00
ceriel
c24b0dad86 Initial revision 1987-02-24 11:17:50 +00:00
ceriel
fef3cce6e0 solved some problems with include files 1987-02-24 10:54:20 +00:00
ceriel
45bffe9e26 solved a problem with include files 1987-02-24 10:49:54 +00:00
ceriel
141753d598 still referred to BadAssertion.c instead of BadAssert.c 1987-02-24 10:45:54 +00:00
ceriel
4c11fded37 4/4, new C compiler 1987-02-24 10:15:46 +00:00
ceriel
bbcf72b0e4 4/4, new C cmpiler 1987-02-24 10:00:37 +00:00
ceriel
ea8fd6991c *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 23:35:42 +00:00
ceriel
aa2add89cd *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 23:28:06 +00:00
ceriel
780c7ba10d *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 22:49:20 +00:00
em
eb02375ee5 do not generate .c files when cleaninmg up 1987-02-23 22:38:45 +00:00
em
7a946c5bf4 cleanup --> clean 1987-02-23 22:35:21 +00:00
ceriel
98654d6c0f *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 19:48:17 +00:00
ceriel
47d61c3ae9 Initial revision 1987-02-23 19:47:00 +00:00
ceriel
4fe6ea9c8a *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 19:39:57 +00:00
ceriel
f8b59e9308 Initial revision 1987-02-23 19:38:14 +00:00
ceriel
3baea33f46 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 19:18:57 +00:00
ceriel
d640f098b9 updated to current situation 1987-02-23 19:15:33 +00:00
ceriel
75cfdc06c6 Initial revision 1987-02-23 19:14:34 +00:00
ceriel
a8ef006163 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 19:08:18 +00:00
ceriel
5bb235c02a Initial revision 1987-02-23 19:04:27 +00:00
ceriel
4ffb6fe8bd Initial revision 1987-02-23 18:58:58 +00:00
ceriel
318e1bfec8 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 18:28:42 +00:00
ceriel
925ec7555f bug fix 1987-02-23 15:48:27 +00:00
ceriel
e2ab98dea0 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 14:22:16 +00:00
ceriel
3ce0d62f83 Initial revision 1987-02-23 14:14:35 +00:00
ceriel
96f6adb74b *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 14:06:17 +00:00
ceriel
ca1655c25e bug fixes:
- assignment operators for bit fields were wrong
- some conversions for characters were wrong
- result of assignment operator sometimes had wrong size
- character constant \377 was 255, not -1
- string constant generation was clumsy
1987-02-23 13:08:54 +00:00
ceriel
af2b497fdf Initial revision 1987-02-23 11:38:21 +00:00
ceriel
398021e77a Added No_Mem 1987-02-23 11:38:15 +00:00
ceriel
f98832f587 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 11:23:46 +00:00
ceriel
35e75e3d55 Added a dependency 1987-02-23 11:02:31 +00:00
ceriel
6f9a14000c Some minor improvements 1987-02-23 11:01:13 +00:00
ceriel
74be3a448f *** empty log message *** 1987-02-23 10:50:15 +00:00
ceriel
c6b3fb3aef Initial revision 1987-02-23 09:22:33 +00:00
ceriel
a7c40760cd Current results 1987-02-23 09:21:29 +00:00
ceriel
2d34e6f839 Delete temporary 1987-02-23 09:18:41 +00:00
ceriel
8a407d5ee9 remove temporary 1987-02-22 15:56:31 +00:00
ceriel
0c7c379d46 better versions, bug fixes in compiler 1987-02-22 15:28:26 +00:00
ceriel
0a70c8f525 Initial revision 1987-02-21 22:26:39 +00:00
ceriel
f2a77335b0 An attempt to make "erasereg" a little more efficient, as it seems
often to be called to erase the condition codes.
1987-02-21 22:20:10 +00:00
ceriel
d493ffcfde bug fix 1987-02-20 17:35:08 +00:00
ceriel
a3c78bffe6 Bug fix 1987-02-20 17:33:06 +00:00
ceriel
8612a70ea3 Initial revision 1987-02-20 14:36:01 +00:00
ceriel
429502815f Added description of strzero 1987-02-19 11:28:14 +00:00
ceriel
80fe557cf3 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-18 16:41:57 +00:00
ceriel
3e3ebc6b8b cardinality of sets was wrong! 1987-02-18 10:47:55 +00:00
ceriel
c3ae096e67 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-17 15:07:15 +00:00
ceriel
a08f3c3e9c Added doc on %onerror, and some other minor mods 1987-02-16 21:42:18 +00:00
ceriel
3f6a8abe1b adapted to allow for user intervention before error recovery 1987-02-16 21:38:52 +00:00
ceriel
255884b3fb Another adaption to allow for user intervention BEFORE error recovery 1987-02-16 21:36:05 +00:00
ceriel
e796cb0f27 Prevented looping of the code generator on illegal zer instructions 1987-02-16 09:49:32 +00:00
ceriel
428b24d51b minor update 1987-02-13 15:30:27 +00:00
ceriel
2238500f22 Added "standard" entries, rerun mkdep 1987-02-13 15:27:35 +00:00
ceriel
b9be625e9b Added a "-f" flag to the "rm" 1987-02-13 14:20:10 +00:00
ceriel
90cae7c6a5 Adapted to search for description files in either
~em/lib/descr/<file> or ~em/lib/<file>/descr
1987-02-13 13:39:30 +00:00
ceriel
04d031d33d Added some buffering for writes 1987-02-13 12:44:33 +00:00
ceriel
629c0a315c Some extra patterns added. 1987-02-13 12:41:31 +00:00
ceriel
3378831ba5 Made to work with some other compilers 1987-02-13 09:40:08 +00:00
ceriel
0905b2ba25 forgot a continue. 1987-02-12 13:54:37 +00:00
ceriel
a2f665de76 exporting EODDZ, etc 1987-02-12 13:36:55 +00:00
ceriel
71e01b58c0 Initial revision 1987-02-12 10:56:16 +00:00
ceriel
1706552f25 bug fix: csa descriptors contained upb instead of upb - lwb. 1987-02-11 16:05:25 +00:00
ceriel
55abae9d4f *** empty log message *** 1987-02-11 15:41:09 +00:00
ceriel
063bfe6cb7 other place for include files 1987-02-11 14:49:14 +00:00
ceriel
a6d90aaeec many bug fixes 1987-02-11 14:29:27 +00:00
ceriel
f18da9078c when printing floats in "e"-format, trailing zeros are significant! 1987-02-11 12:47:45 +00:00
ceriel
0f49b18986 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-10 17:18:16 +00:00
ceriel
9a64c052cc Added some code to handle -Oego,opt,asopt etc 1987-02-10 16:51:57 +00:00
ceriel
2295cd130a Added some code to handle -Oego,opt,asopt and the like.
By default, optimizers can be excluded by giving them a negative
priority in the description files. This is currently done for
the global optimizer
1987-02-10 16:50:32 +00:00
ceriel
5ab4d1d2f8 removed some %0's 1987-02-10 12:49:08 +00:00
ceriel
cd1007a972 removed some %0 stuff 1987-02-10 09:49:50 +00:00
ceriel
9a7949c79d Removed some more "%...D"s 1987-02-10 09:39:40 +00:00
ceriel
7cf87cb2a3 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-10 09:34:45 +00:00
ceriel
e04aa9639e Initial revision 1987-02-10 09:27:44 +00:00
ceriel
ad72edfa49 many changes: fixes and efficiency-oriented 1987-02-09 23:19:42 +00:00
ceriel
2f8580c380 replaced some more %D's 1987-02-09 22:48:14 +00:00
bruce
25a7b2ae22 Added local optimization of lin to lni. 1987-02-09 17:55:46 +00:00
ceriel
ced0ffabbd removed some %0 stuff 1987-02-09 17:41:25 +00:00
ceriel
522039cb60 replaced a %D 1987-02-09 17:31:25 +00:00
ceriel
17ddf81681 replaced some %D's 1987-02-09 17:28:22 +00:00
ceriel
8b15b193a2 replaced a %04x 1987-02-09 17:10:29 +00:00
ceriel
4793d80775 replaced some %D's by %ld 1987-02-09 17:06:20 +00:00
ceriel
1e0aef10d8 made to work on system V 1987-02-09 17:00:23 +00:00
ceriel
2556a95c48 make to work on System V 1987-02-09 16:57:40 +00:00
ceriel
0d1c90a23e Adapted to new assembler 1987-02-09 16:49:13 +00:00
ceriel
4d10540d8d removed %0 stuff 1987-02-09 16:47:04 +00:00
ceriel
e83991f533 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-09 16:39:05 +00:00
ceriel
78a60d9959 %03x --> %x_, because the former does not work on System V 1987-02-09 16:35:24 +00:00
ceriel
cea6f4751e removed something that would not work on System V 1987-02-09 16:33:49 +00:00
ceriel
6d0a4a9ce0 changed directory: nas --> as 1987-02-09 16:29:15 +00:00
ceriel
4be7b3dfa5 Removed a %03x, which does not work on USG systems 1987-02-09 16:26:56 +00:00
ceriel
3588a1599f Initial revision 1987-02-09 15:26:16 +00:00
ceriel
fa59fc325e changed so that it prints a separate line for each dependancy 1987-02-09 15:06:09 +00:00
ceriel
375e023d8b Initial revision 1987-02-09 14:55:59 +00:00
ceriel
97e0fbea33 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-09 14:54:29 +00:00
ceriel
21fbc5d6a6 belonging to new version of pascal compiler 1987-02-09 10:46:18 +00:00
ceriel
8f4a99cc24 The added ',' separator in token declarations did not work
(reported by Kees Bot, Edwin Scheffer). This is corrected (I hope).
1987-02-07 03:56:34 +00:00
ceriel
13d59d1427 Added cpp to the "clean" entry 1987-02-07 02:58:47 +00:00
ceriel
8360226526 Added "opt2" to the clean entry 1987-02-07 02:57:09 +00:00
ceriel
2c29e9f07c Changed an assertion that was no longer valid 1987-02-07 01:50:48 +00:00
ceriel
7dfb3c92ba target optimizer directory name is "top", not "opt" 1987-02-07 00:56:42 +00:00
ceriel
6d1f518209 Remove .m files before recreating them. The existing ones might
have another owner, so that you cannot write them
1987-02-07 00:52:30 +00:00
ceriel
3fc90a8000 Added some patterns, and avoided a bug in the VAX assembler 1987-02-07 00:45:06 +00:00
ceriel
729490c212 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-07 00:35:16 +00:00
ceriel
a1c7298f9d changed hash function 1987-02-07 00:14:51 +00:00
ceriel
622530ae68 Changed hash function, added "registers" 1987-02-07 00:13:56 +00:00
ceriel
4d92d60469 Added some "registers" 1987-02-07 00:04:05 +00:00
ceriel
ce47e41665 Another one. 1987-02-06 23:40:25 +00:00
ceriel
bdef113184 Bug fix (INPUT, not STDIN !!!) 1987-02-06 23:38:35 +00:00
ceriel
254364ca11 bug fix 1987-02-06 14:50:57 +00:00
ceriel
77f33b6762 did not work with bloody vax assemblerr 1987-02-06 14:44:56 +00:00
bruce
dd673a426f Changed name from .c to .r and now in format required by awk. 1987-02-06 14:21:04 +00:00
bruce
8248a41994 Initial revision 1987-02-06 14:15:49 +00:00
bruce
d5e9250405 Use awk program to generate distinct C_xxx routines in separate files. 1987-02-06 14:13:22 +00:00
ceriel
102790400d bug fix 1987-02-06 13:28:01 +00:00
ceriel
63af2a556b bug fix 1987-02-06 11:09:26 +00:00
ceriel
17a2c4977e bug fix 1987-02-06 10:37:09 +00:00
ceriel
e60f0f3981 bug fix 1987-02-06 10:27:57 +00:00
ceriel
d3f3afa6e7 bug fix 1987-02-06 10:03:18 +00:00
ceriel
010a311ab7 bug fixes 1987-02-05 21:36:42 +00:00
ceriel
3cddcb4482 typo 1987-02-05 21:07:09 +00:00
ceriel
775e473fb0 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-05 21:04:40 +00:00
ceriel
c6a224a6d1 output buffer is now called _sobuf 1987-02-05 20:56:06 +00:00
ceriel
c4b53d0710 buffer names: _sibuf and _sobuf 1987-02-05 20:54:27 +00:00
ceriel
060a309f82 array bound check added 1987-02-05 20:47:30 +00:00
ceriel
ac77d6c7fe Bug fix 1987-02-05 20:39:11 +00:00
ceriel
e0b23bbaea Added code to kill regvar(...) 1987-02-05 19:20:54 +00:00
ceriel
b11e35b7d4 Adapted some constants 1987-02-05 19:19:01 +00:00
ceriel
74b078c3f1 just for fun: do not call empty rules. 1987-02-05 19:14:55 +00:00
ceriel
4860deacf8 another bug fix 1987-02-05 18:37:12 +00:00
ceriel
d5d4c551c5 bug fix 1987-02-05 18:33:44 +00:00
ceriel
f5f7a6cb2a *** empty log message *** 1987-02-05 17:02:16 +00:00
ceriel
70fb5304d0 new dependencies 1987-02-05 17:01:12 +00:00
ceriel
a40ec68883 Added another structure for improved recursion detection 1987-02-05 17:00:14 +00:00
ceriel
d0d5c84689 bug fix 1987-02-05 16:39:39 +00:00
ceriel
46cfcbdf43 bug fix 1987-02-05 16:22:42 +00:00
ceriel
75e9a65bcd Added line_prefix.h 1987-02-05 14:58:24 +00:00
ceriel
78aae09a09 Initial revision 1987-02-05 14:47:47 +00:00
ceriel
467f680968 Adapted to the use of "convert.c" 1987-02-05 14:47:22 +00:00
ceriel
862e62b9e4 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-05 14:47:04 +00:00
ceriel
10f6d88ba1 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-05 14:11:46 +00:00
ceriel
49b619cec2 Added manual page 1987-02-05 13:20:03 +00:00
ceriel
439bf558cc *** empty log message *** 1987-02-05 13:17:00 +00:00
ceriel
5afc7363f0 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-04 17:43:20 +00:00
ceriel
45105f16c6 Added a few "nocoercions :" 1987-02-04 17:22:08 +00:00
ceriel
5627bb850e Initial revision 1987-02-04 16:44:15 +00:00
ceriel
b6a56fb7e8 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-04 16:21:03 +00:00
ceriel
6ce38d28ae fixed error in call of C_con_scon 1987-02-04 16:03:54 +00:00
ceriel
694f7dfee4 Added asopt 1987-02-04 15:55:32 +00:00
ceriel
59a5eb4591 Added libsys, top 1987-02-04 15:51:35 +00:00
ceriel
199f9d38ea archive name change 1987-02-04 15:47:57 +00:00
ceriel
2ca7e7e2b3 Added definition for ASAR 1987-02-04 15:41:00 +00:00
ceriel
827f3da238 Name change of archive 1987-02-04 15:39:00 +00:00
ceriel
41cdf11b46 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-04 15:31:50 +00:00
ceriel
fe3fe78538 Added some neccessary NC's 1987-02-04 15:11:51 +00:00
ceriel
a0dad9f908 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-02-04 15:09:31 +00:00
ceriel
6dcf1995c1 Initial revision 1987-02-04 13:10:17 +00:00
ceriel
b5d0c2797b *** empty log message *** 1987-02-04 13:09:02 +00:00
ceriel
a3aa9aac88 removed the lflag, added check for '/' in filenames 1987-02-04 13:04:51 +00:00
ceriel
60cf3639ce Added "pr" and "opr" entries 1987-02-04 12:54:03 +00:00
ceriel
3c387987ed Added "cmp" entry 1987-02-04 12:51:31 +00:00
ceriel
b536e4101d Initial revision 1987-02-04 12:45:43 +00:00
ceriel
1b071fe5a2 Initial revision 1987-02-04 10:40:32 +00:00
ceriel
0cf7165841 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-04 10:39:27 +00:00
ceriel
23bbc93a92 Initial revision 1987-02-04 10:35:30 +00:00
ceriel
85830c5f63 Strings and character constants now stop at end-of-line, unless escaped
by a backslash
1987-02-03 23:28:09 +00:00
ceriel
f3b298586f Initial revision 1987-02-03 14:59:54 +00:00
ceriel
9b2329a49b *** empty log message *** 1987-02-03 14:57:24 +00:00
ceriel
eab8db26fe new include directories 1987-02-03 14:55:15 +00:00
ceriel
73e1381194 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-03 14:50:30 +00:00
ceriel
755170f752 Added pascal lib 1987-02-03 14:47:45 +00:00
ceriel
3a75a34c31 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-03 14:36:29 +00:00
ceriel
b69fd5feb8 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-02-03 13:32:24 +00:00
ceriel
fe53d6ed3f adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-02-03 13:23:38 +00:00
ceriel
2ed0d80be5 lock ??? 1987-02-03 13:09:27 +00:00
ceriel
ea78c81da9 int --> int22 1987-02-03 09:57:57 +00:00
ceriel
6f1f0ef1bf int --> int44 1987-02-03 09:55:47 +00:00
ceriel
4ed7c62cca int22 --> int44 1987-02-03 09:55:06 +00:00
ceriel
5ac74e31e0 int22 --> int24 1987-02-03 09:53:20 +00:00
ceriel
6b753378bc int --> int24 1987-02-03 09:52:40 +00:00
ceriel
40dd8e2702 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-03 09:50:31 +00:00
ceriel
74114081ef ??? 1987-02-02 21:49:57 +00:00
ceriel
d76349f200 pdp instead of pdp11 1987-02-02 21:01:10 +00:00
ceriel
a8820459d5 obeyed a warning 1987-02-02 20:54:56 +00:00
ceriel
d70c1e2149 ASP with negative argument wasn't accepted 1987-02-02 20:48:02 +00:00
ceriel
1672c06a36 backend must accept .g files 1987-02-02 20:40:59 +00:00
ceriel
9abc993f08 back-end must accept .g files 1987-02-02 20:40:04 +00:00
ceriel
f5c1d53512 added asopt 1987-02-02 20:36:15 +00:00
ceriel
04a416828b *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 20:31:55 +00:00
ceriel
836fc810b3 Added target optimizer 1987-02-02 20:23:42 +00:00
ceriel
3515a1818a Initial revision 1987-02-02 20:14:16 +00:00
ceriel
f67cdb8e44 Initial revision 1987-02-02 19:18:49 +00:00
ceriel
22a6938332 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 17:40:30 +00:00
ceriel
e471d036d1 Added pc 1987-02-02 17:37:18 +00:00
ceriel
319d1508c2 Initial revision 1987-02-02 16:57:13 +00:00
ceriel
0a4b847f50 new definition of ISALNUM 1987-02-02 16:37:59 +00:00
ceriel
78a61585ce *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 16:27:36 +00:00
ceriel
19a0a9b769 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 16:21:59 +00:00
ceriel
3c210cae1e Name change in library 1987-02-02 16:19:04 +00:00
ceriel
d80d2a4c35 Initial revision 1987-02-02 16:12:55 +00:00
ceriel
563a799de2 Initial revision 1987-02-02 16:06:51 +00:00
ceriel
93ac463920 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 16:04:52 +00:00
ceriel
9ce25b36c4 library name change 1987-02-02 16:04:16 +00:00
ceriel
14138da395 bug fix 1987-02-02 15:28:31 +00:00
ceriel
ca1654eae2 Initial revision 1987-02-02 13:36:33 +00:00
ceriel
1ac26f9b67 new version for .o 1987-02-02 13:30:20 +00:00
ceriel
9cd6325ee1 Initial revision 1987-02-02 13:11:35 +00:00
ceriel
3feb7454c5 Added clean-entry, tail_mon --> tail_sys 1987-02-02 13:09:17 +00:00
ceriel
b96babed0a generating .o files 1987-02-02 13:07:28 +00:00
ceriel
345609b5ac version for new assembler 1987-02-02 12:44:39 +00:00
ceriel
d8e018a044 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 11:22:47 +00:00
ceriel
c51a2b3a6c *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 11:15:48 +00:00
ceriel
60c746ed21 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 11:07:21 +00:00
ceriel
8ac474583b New version with new assembler, link editor 1987-02-02 10:55:41 +00:00
em
dc6b14760d *** empty log message *** 1987-02-02 10:52:23 +00:00
ceriel
8340d30d77 new version for new assembler and new c library 1987-02-02 10:50:09 +00:00
ceriel
b7477f4654 Initial revision 1987-02-02 10:45:26 +00:00
ceriel
e024792e68 Initial revision 1987-02-02 10:25:38 +00:00
ceriel
e41a2618f8 Made floating point stuff depend on a #define: FPPSIM 1987-02-02 10:16:40 +00:00
ceriel
ae3c81e0a6 Made floating point stuff depend on a #define: FPPSIM 1987-02-02 09:59:02 +00:00
ceriel
237d56ac16 *** empty log message *** 1987-02-01 22:32:23 +00:00
ceriel
60f9744253 Adapted to current situation 1987-02-01 22:13:26 +00:00
ceriel
ec29d3b4a1 Initial revision 1987-02-01 21:53:24 +00:00
ceriel
7ab43d62db *** empty log message *** 1987-02-01 21:27:52 +00:00
ceriel
e08ea100a4 Initial revision 1987-02-01 21:04:49 +00:00
ceriel
e5238c6fcf *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 20:50:31 +00:00
ceriel
496bba9475 New version 1987-01-30 20:48:31 +00:00
ceriel
923a85f5cc *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 20:39:45 +00:00
ceriel
2b9c2283db *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 20:27:28 +00:00
ceriel
095367ac29 machine name change: l68k2 --> m68k2 1987-01-30 20:24:35 +00:00
ceriel
47a1e91c19 name change of lib 1987-01-30 20:23:09 +00:00
ceriel
f648d5d0ab Name change of lib, added head_em 1987-01-30 20:22:52 +00:00
ceriel
f88e8c3ba4 1987-01-30 20:06:04 +00:00
ceriel
471884cdf4 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 19:58:55 +00:00
ceriel
9dd16696ef *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 19:31:26 +00:00
ceriel
c03c2ef9f2 Adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-30 19:20:31 +00:00
ceriel
1b09e55129 new assembler syntax 1987-01-30 18:41:42 +00:00
ceriel
5e36fd3351 Made more like other Makefiles 1987-01-30 18:24:42 +00:00
ceriel
7e68455893 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 18:15:22 +00:00
ceriel
076354168e error exit when compilation fails 1987-01-30 18:12:57 +00:00
ceriel
9390536d79 Error exit when compilation failes 1987-01-30 18:11:08 +00:00
ceriel
4b489cd254 Initial revision 1987-01-30 17:10:51 +00:00
ceriel
3c60c1918e changed #define m68020 to TBL68020.
Could otherwize cause problems when translated with ack
1987-01-30 10:57:17 +00:00
ceriel
4fb87d7c87 Initial revision 1987-01-30 10:49:21 +00:00
ceriel
0adac61dad *** empty log message *** 1987-01-30 10:18:40 +00:00
ceriel
ae504890c7 bug fix 1987-01-30 09:45:41 +00:00
ceriel
0452b7c326 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-29 23:30:46 +00:00
ceriel
e9d7db6f61 Initial revision 1987-01-29 23:25:01 +00:00
ceriel
0a279ebbbd Initial revision 1987-01-29 22:45:44 +00:00
ceriel
153e30bb1c Initial revision 1987-01-29 22:36:35 +00:00
ceriel
945d6a0188 Initial revision 1987-01-29 22:10:18 +00:00
ceriel
31b5e111bf Initial revision 1987-01-29 20:15:14 +00:00
ceriel
62746ef4ff Initial revision 1987-01-29 20:03:43 +00:00
ceriel
d0894b8c33 deleted NOFLOAT 1987-01-29 19:58:10 +00:00
ceriel
39bc96fbd1 Deleted NOFLOAT 1987-01-29 19:56:16 +00:00
ceriel
27e48672bb no F_DUM in dummy float 1987-01-29 19:49:35 +00:00
ceriel
536611f0a2 Initial revision 1987-01-29 19:42:53 +00:00
ceriel
c5897a8f81 Initial revision 1987-01-29 19:37:49 +00:00
ceriel
bfb89ae937 Added a check for unresolved references 1987-01-29 17:13:37 +00:00
ceriel
59a08bb733 Changed to handle new ack object format 1987-01-29 15:54:46 +00:00
ceriel
c9fce4aff9 typo fix 1987-01-29 14:54:26 +00:00
ceriel
91463b5a4e Initial revision 1987-01-29 14:17:23 +00:00
ceriel
3d00f0ea37 Adapted to current situation 1987-01-29 13:20:23 +00:00
ceriel
bc8229b952 don't use a sgttyb struct 1987-01-29 13:01:28 +00:00
ceriel
ef85335f8f name change of lib, moved head_em.s to libsys 1987-01-29 11:03:30 +00:00
ceriel
9871983602 Name change of lib 1987-01-29 11:01:27 +00:00
ceriel
7c658fff27 Name change of lib, added head_em 1987-01-29 10:47:27 +00:00
ceriel
de343361e5 Name change. 1987-01-29 10:46:53 +00:00
ceriel
1bbe040688 PC/IX is system 3, not V7 1987-01-29 10:33:53 +00:00
ceriel
c6f26eff9e Corrected syntax error 1987-01-29 09:43:40 +00:00
ceriel
0331b0a1e2 Added IOR, AND, XOR, COM without parameters, because the
Pascal runtime system needs at least one of them.
Also deleted some old bug circumvention
1987-01-28 23:22:07 +00:00
ceriel
7be94f7d44 more corrections 1987-01-28 22:54:52 +00:00
ceriel
eb0030af45 generate .o files 1987-01-28 22:26:27 +00:00
ceriel
e69ccee1f7 syntax error correction 1987-01-28 22:23:14 +00:00
ceriel
beaaa19ada generate .o files 1987-01-28 22:17:36 +00:00
ceriel
6aa3769e9f generating .o files 1987-01-28 22:14:40 +00:00
ceriel
1e5253e9e5 For generating .o files, aal archives 1987-01-28 22:14:12 +00:00
ceriel
f35c426e26 .byte --> .data1 1987-01-28 19:02:25 +00:00
ceriel
0bbda61037 adapted to new assembler 1987-01-28 18:57:04 +00:00
ceriel
eb703a6d80 Initial revision 1987-01-28 18:52:12 +00:00
ceriel
3bb50c7b8a endbss - begbss is no longer computable by the assembler 1987-01-28 18:49:59 +00:00
ceriel
de51d1ee8e Improvement of conversions 1987-01-28 17:36:21 +00:00
ceriel
a5c0f64d5e return exit status 1 when compilation failes 1987-01-28 17:26:52 +00:00
ceriel
160770d979 Bug fix: the STR instruction caused a translation with syntax errors 1987-01-28 17:22:25 +00:00
ceriel
f3a6d7c3ce correction of syntax error 1987-01-28 17:05:02 +00:00
ceriel
fc2e88758f declaration of gmtime added 1987-01-28 17:02:56 +00:00
ceriel
d35a16c30f Bug fix: %f did not work, if no width was specified 1987-01-28 16:52:16 +00:00
ceriel
f78cbc818f Avoid bug in VAX assembler. But i don't know what is happening. 1987-01-28 16:22:30 +00:00
bruce
9e61390e78 Corrected clean option to remove libopt.a 1987-01-28 15:39:10 +00:00
ceriel
aeacaeb08f Initial revision 1987-01-28 15:29:13 +00:00
ceriel
7cfd88dab7 Adapted to new assembler producing .o files 1987-01-28 15:27:59 +00:00
ceriel
187b008eb2 archive name change: tail --> libem_s.a 1987-01-28 15:23:22 +00:00
ceriel
aab8668d4b Bug fix 1987-01-28 15:15:28 +00:00
ceriel
50b2d9f4b8 Initial revision 1987-01-28 15:06:28 +00:00
ceriel
c996384000 Adapted for new assembler syntax 1987-01-28 15:06:01 +00:00
ceriel
0930a80dd3 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-28 15:03:39 +00:00
ceriel
212579440e bug fix 1987-01-28 14:38:38 +00:00
ceriel
132ed11e0e _doprint -->_doprnt 1987-01-28 14:28:45 +00:00
ceriel
ce561e5f3a made stdin, stdout, and stderr into compile time constants 1987-01-28 14:21:56 +00:00
ceriel
fb8fc4e07c Fixed introduced bug 1987-01-28 13:00:33 +00:00
ceriel
ebd44261fe cc --> $(CC), added -O flag to CFLAGS 1987-01-28 12:49:42 +00:00
ceriel
77e82ac376 floating point constants are no longer fatal 1987-01-28 00:11:28 +00:00
ceriel
5f7937dd33 Added action for pc runtime library 1987-01-27 23:38:02 +00:00
ceriel
ca796567f3 errno was'nt exported 1987-01-27 22:58:33 +00:00
ceriel
c5fe8ce4dc new version for assembler producing .o files 1987-01-27 20:37:46 +00:00
ceriel
c69f56bd2f By default only install tail_cc.1s and tail_cc.2g 1987-01-27 20:09:55 +00:00
ceriel
846f27eebc Added some system V things 1987-01-27 16:51:19 +00:00
ceriel
846d9a0c2d Initial revision 1987-01-27 16:44:28 +00:00
ceriel
3ea542769f Initial revision 1987-01-27 16:33:21 +00:00
ceriel
c1bae75a85 Initial revision 1987-01-27 16:21:02 +00:00
ceriel
b5c4cd7a00 Initial revision 1987-01-27 15:57:55 +00:00
bruce
6fb688f882 Ported code to Mantra and general clean up. 1987-01-27 14:15:23 +00:00
bruce
bbd5b115dd Changed to reflect location of EMHOME and conform to standard syntax. 1987-01-27 11:42:08 +00:00
ceriel
884a281dd4 Improved "clean" entry" 1987-01-27 10:52:09 +00:00
ceriel
89bbe4c782 correction of syntax errors 1987-01-27 10:50:43 +00:00
ceriel
e969c006b7 Contained syntax errors 1987-01-27 10:45:01 +00:00
ceriel
cfb3324b6f Better "clean" entry" 1987-01-27 10:41:19 +00:00
ceriel
145326b368 Adaption to new assembler generating .o files 1987-01-26 22:35:41 +00:00
ceriel
5abd614e01 Initial revision 1987-01-26 22:33:58 +00:00
ceriel
55f63a8a12 system call numbers are longwords 1987-01-26 22:15:21 +00:00
ceriel
4133a3cbc3 Initial revision 1987-01-26 21:51:58 +00:00
ceriel
6db629db4d Added stty, gtty 1987-01-26 21:47:59 +00:00
ceriel
0b484452fd Initial revision 1987-01-26 21:43:12 +00:00
ceriel
2c2688a680 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-26 21:22:23 +00:00
ceriel
0991948d3e Removed all those ../../.. references 1987-01-26 16:35:04 +00:00
ceriel
640f958d26 Improved "element size" handling. 1987-01-26 16:16:12 +00:00
ceriel
edae1fc950 Added a check that a tokenset in a stackpattern contains tokens
that all have the same size.
1987-01-26 16:14:39 +00:00
ceriel
88ea6fb11d new dependency 1987-01-26 15:01:25 +00:00
ceriel
74d48b9b91 bug fix for EM_MESARG 1987-01-26 14:04:33 +00:00
ceriel
80d363eac5 bug fixes in RMI and EXG 1987-01-26 13:36:40 +00:00
ceriel
8116e3181f now uses alloc module, bug fixes, -N option under USE_TMP, to not do so 1987-01-24 00:25:56 +00:00
ceriel
b4e4250144 added EM_wordsize, EM_pointersize 1987-01-23 16:15:57 +00:00
ceriel
df1b8c8f71 corrected typo 1987-01-23 16:04:20 +00:00
ceriel
872cd52f99 Bug fix: EM_MESARG gives em_arg, not em_args! 1987-01-23 16:00:37 +00:00
bruce
f4e7c2f6ce Fixed up indentation of trans.c output. 1987-01-22 14:27:02 +00:00
bruce
819136660e Don't put out "return" in outputtrans if action is not tested
otherwise compiling trans.c give warning about statment not reached.
1987-01-21 15:36:18 +00:00
ceriel
9acc354608 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-21 15:21:49 +00:00
bruce
959800d9b5 Version that implements a C_XXX to O_XXX library interface. 1987-01-21 14:27:04 +00:00
ceriel
93c2a95860 new assembler producing .o files 1987-01-20 14:53:11 +00:00
ceriel
4f94fb9ea0 Bug fix (?) 1987-01-20 14:47:49 +00:00
ceriel
32f1fc504c new assembler producing .o files 1987-01-20 14:20:33 +00:00
ceriel
3a2030f3b6 assembler now produces .o format 1987-01-20 14:14:19 +00:00
ceriel
6c762a19e7 Changed /lib/cpp to ../../../lib/cpp 1987-01-20 13:09:56 +00:00
ceriel
feea5a269f Adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-20 10:04:32 +00:00
ceriel
a410519ff5 Bug fix
Under the '-x' option, the archive was opened in "APPEND" mode.
1987-01-20 09:53:32 +00:00
ceriel
9f47676fa3 Bug fix in translation of "cms" 1987-01-20 09:31:31 +00:00
ceriel
ba75d4c907 end.s separate from libem_s.a 1987-01-19 15:20:49 +00:00
ceriel
08ca9ba4a4 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-19 10:53:45 +00:00
ceriel
bd56763235 Added exit in case of compilation failure 1987-01-19 10:52:25 +00:00
ceriel
433346583e new version for new assembler syntax 1987-01-19 10:51:50 +00:00
ceriel
d899835b31 bug fix 1987-01-19 10:42:34 +00:00
ceriel
4d4854d610 ASAR=aal 1987-01-19 10:37:38 +00:00
ceriel
4dda9a5183 exit on compilation error 1987-01-19 10:36:27 +00:00
ceriel
035c115ca8 exit when compilation fails 1987-01-19 10:33:24 +00:00
ceriel
4e17f5b9a5 Initial revision 1987-01-19 10:32:32 +00:00
ceriel
f72b739e21 Initial revision 1987-01-19 10:26:43 +00:00
ceriel
6de2acea83 Improved "make clean" 1987-01-19 10:19:56 +00:00
ceriel
fcd2e936b4 Improved the "make clean" 1987-01-19 10:17:58 +00:00
ceriel
41622dc2a9 Added c-flag 1987-01-19 09:41:49 +00:00
ceriel
0efc7ae07d Added 'c'-flag 1987-01-19 09:36:35 +00:00
ceriel
4489801c4f New version 1987-01-16 19:25:44 +00:00
ceriel
faa0c191a4 minor bug fix 1987-01-16 19:20:58 +00:00
ceriel
f9f1db874f conversion to new assembler syntax 1987-01-16 17:17:12 +00:00
ceriel
c6ace07201 new archive name. 1987-01-16 17:04:03 +00:00
ceriel
649a32fa82 conversion to new assembler syntax 1987-01-16 16:59:41 +00:00
ceriel
8dc5f90a88 new name for archive 1987-01-16 16:51:14 +00:00
ceriel
08cc79e513 new version for generating .o files 1987-01-16 16:50:50 +00:00
ceriel
d2014ff946 conversion to new assembler format 1987-01-16 16:49:46 +00:00
ceriel
d5148e0b0f Initial revision 1987-01-16 16:49:12 +00:00
ceriel
a3b0f08d57 conversion to new assembler format 1987-01-16 16:34:45 +00:00
ceriel
8f27f92269 Bug fix with WorkingDir 1987-01-16 16:14:22 +00:00
ceriel
e346f6fc74 version generating .o files 1987-01-16 15:40:01 +00:00
ceriel
3e2d693b37 as --> nas 1987-01-16 15:21:51 +00:00
ceriel
e4a90bc417 Bug fix. 1987-01-16 13:59:02 +00:00
ceriel
0b941ef495 Bug fixes 1987-01-16 13:51:45 +00:00
ceriel
45238eea0f Some bug fixes and minor extensions 1987-01-16 13:51:42 +00:00
ceriel
382c88eb17 Using object library 1987-01-15 22:06:16 +00:00
bruce
97cd4953b0 Initial revision 1987-01-15 18:12:26 +00:00
ceriel
ece95a2ee4 Some bug fixes 1987-01-15 17:36:26 +00:00
ceriel
8af94099a3 Replaced an occurrence of EOI by EOF. 1987-01-14 21:37:22 +00:00
ceriel
324cbd8327 Fixed a minor problem with off_fmt, when it did not produce
a '-' sign when neccesary
1987-01-14 17:49:19 +00:00
ceriel
9877db53d9 Fixed a minor problem with off_fmt, when this format would not
produce the '-' sign.
1987-01-14 17:47:31 +00:00
ceriel
493efb1bf7 added EX_SIDEEFFECTS, options['p'] --> ! options['L'], fixed some bugs 1987-01-14 09:58:51 +00:00
ceriel
0ffdfb4f76 Added rd_fd and wr_fd. 1987-01-13 15:10:23 +00:00
ceriel
b2c0f64992 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-13 13:13:50 +00:00
ceriel
e6f18b2838 Initial revision 1987-01-13 11:31:24 +00:00
ceriel
630e5d8082 Initial revision 1987-01-13 11:01:26 +00:00
ceriel
6d499785be Initial revision 1987-01-13 10:53:33 +00:00
ceriel
424337507d Added standard entries 1987-01-13 10:43:12 +00:00
ceriel
876369b2f1 Added standard entries 1987-01-13 10:30:06 +00:00
ceriel
692d3702a1 Added "standard" entries 1987-01-13 10:08:47 +00:00
ceriel
3cb30fa873 Added a "clean" entry. 1987-01-13 10:07:25 +00:00
ceriel
673b1d79e2 Initial revision 1987-01-13 10:01:07 +00:00
ceriel
28b3286e21 Added "standard" entries install, cmp, opr 1987-01-13 09:56:17 +00:00
ceriel
177e335cad Initial revision 1987-01-13 09:24:13 +00:00
ceriel
3c7511780b Initial revision 1987-01-12 17:21:59 +00:00
ceriel
6adc4ef78b Added documentation on EM_wordsize and EM_pointersize. 1987-01-12 15:54:16 +00:00
ceriel
9639f0a87b Also export EM_wordsize and EM_pointersize. 1987-01-12 15:42:38 +00:00
ceriel
e77bde5e75 Added TABLEFLAGS and CGGFLAGS. 1987-01-12 15:10:49 +00:00
ceriel
031d26deb4 Preprocess table. 1987-01-12 14:50:25 +00:00
ceriel
9e528bef6f Allow reading from standard input 1987-01-12 14:38:45 +00:00
ceriel
5ddf83ab5a force first line directive 1987-01-12 14:21:14 +00:00
ceriel
281f83968c This one works. 1987-01-12 14:06:47 +00:00
ceriel
cb2b167849 New Makefile, also generating opt2 (t.i. peephole optimizer after global ..) 1987-01-12 14:01:26 +00:00
ceriel
896de3243e Corrected the "install" entry. 1987-01-12 12:30:16 +00:00
ceriel
961d298b3f In some cases, the number after a HOL was'nt accurate. 1987-01-09 15:16:22 +00:00
ceriel
77f4f0f0c9 Bug fix. 1987-01-09 14:11:59 +00:00
ceriel
7d4d9c5c34 %c did not work on systems that have their bytes or their words reversed. 1987-01-08 17:40:25 +00:00
ceriel
5a0140cf3a Bug fix: order in archive longs is PDP-11 order! 1987-01-08 17:39:37 +00:00
ceriel
3ca2fcad1c added doc for C_init 1987-01-08 16:35:00 +00:00
ceriel
6f5afaa410 Added C_init 1987-01-08 16:20:59 +00:00
ceriel
0a8436a862 Added C_init. 1987-01-08 16:19:16 +00:00
ceriel
a26a4f7c9d arhdr --> ar_hdr.
updated docs on rd_arhdr.
1987-01-08 16:05:52 +00:00
ceriel
4219306f55 rd_arhdr now returns 1 if it succeeds, and 0 at end-of-file. 1987-01-08 16:04:20 +00:00
ceriel
ecf93dbf4f made error in macro parameter count into a warning 1987-01-08 14:57:18 +00:00
ceriel
3245258560 Added exclusive or operator 1987-01-08 14:27:07 +00:00
ceriel
e5820bdbaa Added bitwise operators 1987-01-08 14:22:32 +00:00
ceriel
0a237df13d Added xor-oprator 1987-01-08 14:21:56 +00:00
ceriel
ceee24a4cd Added bitwise and and or operators 1987-01-08 14:11:23 +00:00
ceriel
01ac83b971 fix to prevent loop resulting in stack overflow 1987-01-08 14:10:02 +00:00
ceriel
bfb60b8a33 small adaption to "awayreg". 1987-01-08 14:09:14 +00:00
ceriel
1239449207 Added bitwise EX_OR and EX_AND. 1987-01-08 14:03:43 +00:00
ceriel
cfc9f38ccd Generate line directives that are similar to the ones generated
by the Reiser preprocessor.
1987-01-08 12:42:44 +00:00
ceriel
0c5feb7493 wrong number of parameters no longer is an error. 1987-01-08 12:38:05 +00:00
ceriel
61158d4693 New description file, using LED. 1987-01-08 11:22:44 +00:00
ceriel
97f8083ee0 adapted to get .o files 1987-01-08 11:09:06 +00:00
ceriel
8f8e0242d8 "l86" --> "i86". 1987-01-08 11:04:25 +00:00
ceriel
c2805a25bd Initial revision 1987-01-08 10:41:08 +00:00
ceriel
037c2426ab Adapted to get .o files. 1987-01-08 10:29:45 +00:00
ceriel
669c5cf23f use "compare" shell script 1987-01-08 10:28:26 +00:00
ceriel
1a6f092a39 Initial revision 1987-01-08 10:21:35 +00:00
ceriel
9c50da1e82 changed name back: libem_s.a --> tail_em.a 1987-01-08 10:19:47 +00:00
ceriel
c754f6ca69 adapted to new assembler syntax 1987-01-08 10:13:48 +00:00
ceriel
5cc2c0ccfc Initial revision 1987-01-08 10:07:43 +00:00
ceriel
11695db3e3 I don't know! but it was changed. 1987-01-08 09:56:17 +00:00
ceriel
0fd6417833 Adapted to new assembler syntax. 1987-01-08 09:39:54 +00:00
ceriel
18376b38cf Initial revision 1987-01-07 17:13:41 +00:00
ceriel
be68581019 *** empty log message *** 1987-01-07 11:10:33 +00:00
ceriel
debef378c9 3 --> 3ACK 1987-01-06 18:54:48 +00:00
ceriel
ceff6f834a Removed a bug that led to infinite looping in obscure cases. 1987-01-06 18:49:00 +00:00
ceriel
300ac178de Initial revision 1987-01-06 18:45:35 +00:00
ceriel
70f8f5e921 Initial revision 1987-01-06 18:31:02 +00:00
ceriel
143b2531bb Initial revision 1987-01-06 15:16:53 +00:00
ceriel
56c9ada9e0 Initial revision 1987-01-06 14:04:26 +00:00
ceriel
ec678ff800 removed the Xmalloc entry 1987-01-06 13:46:48 +00:00
ceriel
9cb5c80981 Initial revision 1987-01-06 13:42:33 +00:00
ceriel
0f42cf1bd9 Added a "pr" and an "opr" entry. 1987-01-06 12:59:16 +00:00
ceriel
3d5a9bc78c Added a "pr" and an "opr" entry. 1987-01-06 12:42:31 +00:00
ceriel
a7aa5d93ff Initial revision 1987-01-06 11:41:50 +00:00
ceriel
3788350d7c Initial revision 1987-01-06 11:25:09 +00:00
ceriel
56a28240ff Initial revision 1987-01-06 11:05:35 +00:00
ceriel
cb96da9bfa Initial revision 1987-01-05 17:37:37 +00:00
ceriel
b63bf2720c Initial revision 1987-01-05 17:31:38 +00:00
ceriel
eb28fd80f9 Initial revision 1987-01-05 17:20:13 +00:00
ceriel
0de3e4a0af Initial revision 1987-01-05 14:56:11 +00:00
ceriel
2254b35256 Initial revision 1987-01-05 14:44:25 +00:00
ceriel
26326c178e Initial revision 1987-01-05 13:26:29 +00:00
ceriel
8addf6e9a5 Initial revision 1987-01-05 12:59:41 +00:00
ceriel
da3976277f Extended for new read_em module. 1987-01-05 12:51:37 +00:00
ceriel
0329b9ef9a added cleanup.c 1987-01-05 11:12:55 +00:00
ceriel
e32480406f Initial revision 1987-01-05 11:08:47 +00:00
ceriel
caeb6b311d Initial revision 1987-01-05 10:58:34 +00:00
ceriel
a92c8bf067 D_BUSY added, to check recursive deps in def modules 1986-12-16 15:22:33 +00:00
ceriel
33a89a8684 bug fix in LLlex.c, "string_token" 1986-12-16 14:30:33 +00:00
ceriel
9919cc1ba6 Introduced EMHOME. 1986-12-16 13:50:54 +00:00
ceriel
974e2f7d4a Added exit.c stty.c gtty.c 1986-12-16 10:25:44 +00:00
ceriel
7e78bd904d Initial revision 1986-12-16 10:23:21 +00:00
dick
78aaf2fd9d some small changes, asm() yields error message 1986-12-13 20:57:40 +00:00
ceriel
5bbac46b88 No longer use the "system-independant" tail_mon. 1986-12-12 17:56:05 +00:00
ceriel
70df23f6f8 head_em now resides in system dependant library. 1986-12-12 17:54:21 +00:00
ceriel
595cc41d9c Removed almost the whole file, as we now use assembly routines to
interface the systemcalls.
1986-12-12 17:51:03 +00:00
ceriel
184f06453a Initial revision 1986-12-12 16:12:19 +00:00
ceriel
cb19bd1dd4 Bloody assembler does not recognize ',' in .globl 1986-12-12 14:45:20 +00:00
ceriel
980953f861 .globl does not accept comma's 1986-12-12 14:40:25 +00:00
ceriel
d62336a718 Initial revision 1986-12-12 13:43:06 +00:00
ceriel
4c956c400e Initial revision 1986-12-12 12:49:50 +00:00
ceriel
9e6fe01229 Improved testing for 0-strings in the routine "mycat". 1986-12-11 17:04:40 +00:00
ceriel
e98c02b831 Corrected a typo. 1986-12-11 17:03:11 +00:00
ceriel
c6a49a018f Entry for "top", different entry for "LLgen". 1986-12-10 16:53:24 +00:00
ceriel
7d1822d04e Added EMHOME. 1986-12-10 15:30:42 +00:00
ceriel
19477f95a9 Adapted to typesetter and added a reference for LLgen. 1986-12-10 15:28:30 +00:00
ceriel
fcaf1a73b4 Added a reference for LLgen. 1986-12-10 15:28:06 +00:00
ceriel
0159b3297d Adapted to possible use of troff 1986-12-10 15:27:36 +00:00
ceriel
9ddde1cf40 Documented LLmessage(-1). 1986-12-10 15:26:10 +00:00
ceriel
cb6b68a05f added nmclash.c, mods to Makefile/Resolve 1986-12-10 15:13:04 +00:00
ceriel
42162f7b37 simplified 0-padding, minor cosmetic changes 1986-12-10 12:00:55 +00:00
ceriel
df86573d4c Initial revision 1986-12-10 11:40:00 +00:00
ceriel
96d9890d86 minor mods. 1986-12-10 11:31:35 +00:00
ceriel
1335534aae Initial revision 1986-12-10 10:38:42 +00:00
ceriel
c501c762cf removed the -n flag, but not its effect. The generated parser will
call LLmessage(-1) when saying "garbage at end of input".
1986-12-10 09:32:57 +00:00
ceriel
fe2e67d1c6 minor fixes 1986-12-09 17:41:06 +00:00
ceriel
7752bb27f6 Adapted to new assembler 1986-12-09 11:13:14 +00:00
erikb
8a95b29c86 added: file_info.h 1986-12-09 08:19:55 +00:00
ceriel
a6ecac6f1d Only call "newrelo" when needed. 1986-12-08 10:39:13 +00:00
ceriel
6bf947ee6e *** empty log message *** 1986-12-08 09:24:58 +00:00
erikb
ad5c92044c corrected basename() 1986-12-08 08:58:21 +00:00
ceriel
8702a522d8 *** empty log message *** 1986-12-05 17:18:54 +00:00
ceriel
4b3e6a8ab6 Working version. 1986-12-05 17:17:03 +00:00
ceriel
8fd1977ab0 *** empty log message *** 1986-12-05 17:12:24 +00:00
ceriel
b2f0b281cd Initial revision 1986-12-05 17:10:12 +00:00
ceriel
555c29971f initial version 1986-12-05 17:09:41 +00:00
ceriel
9aac83a83e *** empty log message *** 1986-12-05 16:59:51 +00:00
ceriel
28036b3741 Initial revision 1986-12-05 16:58:29 +00:00
ceriel
13a63ae5fe ??? 1986-12-05 16:36:40 +00:00
ceriel
947461e31f Removed DUK 1986-12-04 16:35:04 +00:00
ceriel
53d6dfcb6b version using input module and detecting preprocessor loops 1986-12-04 16:29:44 +00:00
ceriel
91aad0b28e Improved relocation reading code for the !incore strategy. 1986-12-03 13:09:15 +00:00
ceriel
24b7ad602a Improved compactification code. It was much to persistent, and
also too greedy. This causes long LONG linking times.
The current version is less greedy, but also gives up more
easily. Linking times are acceptable now.
1986-12-03 13:06:48 +00:00
ceriel
db43d1d8a7 Added definitions for "alloc", "hard_alloc". 1986-12-03 13:02:37 +00:00
ceriel
3e4629b077 made to work on small machines. 1986-12-02 16:16:08 +00:00
ceriel
abc2ba9a3c bug fix: size 0 error messages also appeared for labels 1986-12-02 11:39:34 +00:00
ceriel
149c764ca1 Added -i to LDFLAGS. 1986-12-02 11:25:51 +00:00
ceriel
e188fe0956 Version that uses libobject.a 1986-12-01 15:41:29 +00:00
ceriel
b44e39cce8 Version that uses libobject.a. 1986-12-01 15:35:28 +00:00
ceriel
c57d4ff268 some minor bug fixes 1986-12-01 10:06:53 +00:00
ceriel
ad40a77afd handle void properly, avoid 0-alignments, handle #if defined(..) 1986-12-01 10:00:23 +00:00
ceriel
36adbe54a5 Removed some signal handling stuff. The Ack-program should do that. 1986-12-01 09:43:00 +00:00
sater
59861f883b added support for modhead 1986-11-28 13:47:44 +00:00
sater
17f5bc21e7 debugging stuff happened to end up on stdout instead of stderr. 1986-11-28 13:41:09 +00:00
ceriel
a0c21bf820 many bug fixes, and added flexibility in alignments 1986-11-28 11:59:08 +00:00
ceriel
da54801353 newer version 1986-11-26 16:40:45 +00:00
ceriel
552f5a3f61 Initial revision 1986-11-24 21:52:09 +00:00
ceriel
8b718ee54b Initial revision 1986-11-24 21:45:03 +00:00
ceriel
dbb351f078 Handled gen.c wrong. This is corrected. 1986-11-24 21:30:57 +00:00
ceriel
00a2314999 make to work with newer version of LLgen. 1986-11-24 21:24:42 +00:00
ceriel
7c5553640e Added -DNDEBUG 1986-11-24 21:01:42 +00:00
ceriel
5ced6d6aef Initial revision 1986-11-24 20:58:35 +00:00
ceriel
3b2d51a96b Initial revision 1986-11-24 20:42:13 +00:00
ceriel
eba14fa801 Bug fix in "inc loc adi" patterns and the like. 1986-11-24 10:42:29 +00:00
ceriel
596c631a71 Check more, when an error occurred 1986-11-17 13:08:18 +00:00
ceriel
9d0ee46068 Trying to check more of an expression, giving some more sophisticated error messages,and be less wasteful with space for subranges 1986-11-17 11:41:28 +00:00
erikb
22d4d72ef4 adapted default IDEPTH value 1986-11-14 08:16:38 +00:00
ceriel
86018d09e1 changed sizes of labstr and argstr to accomodate longer identifiers. 1986-11-12 21:14:05 +00:00
ceriel
f7a6dc503c Changed sizes of "argstr" and "labstr", to accomodate longer
identifiers.
1986-11-12 21:04:38 +00:00
erikb
ed106b7feb removed the debug message for encountering STRING-type Values 1986-11-12 09:55:28 +00:00
erikb
d51281b576 updated the manual pages 1986-11-12 09:53:18 +00:00
erikb
f784236908 merged the vax and mantra versions 1986-11-11 13:47:58 +00:00
ceriel
45f608bac0 Initial revision 1986-11-11 13:44:58 +00:00
ceriel
fb16148641 Adapted to use of GCIPM. 1986-11-11 13:44:13 +00:00
ceriel
3bc3818955 Adapted to use General C Identifier processing Module (GCIPM).
Also changed so that output for "cid" or "cpp" is in alphabetical order.
1986-11-11 13:42:42 +00:00
ceriel
3860ab6f68 Adapted to new versions of programs 1986-11-11 13:42:16 +00:00
ceriel
94634ace27 Initial revision 1986-11-11 13:34:20 +00:00
erikb
6f8b72bfb3 corrected the treatment of static functions declared on non-global level 1986-11-10 09:16:27 +00:00
erikb
3ebe2a7176 use programs and modules from ACK instead of local versions 1986-11-10 09:14:29 +00:00
ceriel
87af36724b Avoid a bug in the C-optimizer of 4.1 BSD. 1986-11-07 17:54:30 +00:00
ceriel
7fd4e395da Constants changed to more sensible values. 1986-11-07 16:20:33 +00:00
ceriel
981bea82f4 Added "register" to a declaration. 1986-11-07 16:01:45 +00:00
ceriel
a761166dfa *** empty log message *** 1986-11-05 21:31:23 +00:00
ceriel
9291d87dab Several bug fixes 1986-11-05 14:33:00 +00:00
ceriel
97e027db33 Added some code to skip to EOF with LL_NEWMESS. 1986-11-03 14:09:28 +00:00
ceriel
7d2ee932e9 That was: LL_NEWMESS, not LL_NEWMESSAGE! 1986-11-03 10:28:21 +00:00
sater
79a736a9f6 Output was wrong with maxmembers<2 1986-11-03 09:13:32 +00:00
ceriel
541f3caf50 Removed the integer overflow check, as it is'nt checked by
"cg".
1986-10-30 15:44:25 +00:00
ceriel
162eb9bb70 forgot to restore return address in case ".trp" is called. 1986-10-30 15:01:16 +00:00
ceriel
a0a3f2d2b6 Added code that calls LLmessage(-1) when needed, and when LL_NEWMESS is
defined.
1986-10-29 11:30:50 +00:00
ceriel
eedc332a04 Added "nflag". 1986-10-29 11:29:47 +00:00
ceriel
ee27adc926 Added nflag, that allows the LLmessage(-1) call, to indicate garbage
at end of program.
1986-10-29 11:27:47 +00:00
ceriel
de5ac65dd6 Bug fix. Error recovery did not always work as expected. The generated
parser sometimes assumed that a token would not be deleted, and inserted
tokens in front of it, and then deleted the token after all. It should
at each error, first delete, and then insert.
1986-10-29 11:16:55 +00:00
ceriel
200034075d Some name changes in ../../modules/lib. 1986-10-28 17:04:40 +00:00
ceriel
f793e823ec Made the trap message more readable. 1986-10-27 10:17:36 +00:00
ceriel
3d016f7385 Did not work properly, printed wrong trap number. Does not work
properly now, because it does no save the registers.
1986-10-27 09:57:42 +00:00
sater
02ff84337a Typo corrected 1986-10-24 16:58:46 +00:00
ceriel
ca44bfc681 newer version with some bug fixes 1986-10-22 15:38:24 +00:00
ceriel
aac1207beb Error messages are printed differently now. A '%' in an error message
used to cause difficulties.
1986-10-22 15:30:46 +00:00
ceriel
c19358ee50 Bug fix involving '\\'. 1986-10-22 13:36:22 +00:00
ceriel
0595f74596 minor simplification. 1986-10-22 13:36:04 +00:00
ceriel
f932863ee1 minor fix to LLlex.c 1986-10-21 14:45:43 +00:00
ceriel
5f638d7aac newer version 1986-10-20 17:40:41 +00:00
ceriel
697ea6d946 Added an entry for the util/cmisc directory. 1986-10-20 15:00:14 +00:00
ceriel
cb2543df8a Improved the "clean"-entry 1986-10-20 14:58:25 +00:00
ceriel
8129bf95a4 Initial revision 1986-10-20 14:56:37 +00:00
ceriel
991df05826 *** empty log message *** 1986-10-20 14:42:41 +00:00
ceriel
83e08e04d7 Added "Modules" 1986-10-20 14:09:09 +00:00
ceriel
d8ba814b26 Adapted to the use of ../../modules/lib/libstr.a 1986-10-20 13:59:14 +00:00
ceriel
11d442c0a0 Use our own string-routines "strindex" and "strrindex". At least we
know their name!
1986-10-20 13:52:16 +00:00
ceriel
784bd9ec54 Use our own string routines strindex and strrindex. At least we know
their name!
1986-10-20 13:48:26 +00:00
ceriel
84f0869fde Fixed a bug: ack could not see the difference between ".mod" and ".m".
This is corrected.
1986-10-20 13:47:26 +00:00
ceriel
3a076895bb Caused a core dump on 68000-based machines (read: non-VAX) when called
at a certain (high) level of verbosity, -v5 for instance.
Cause: a null-reference. This is fixed.
1986-10-20 13:28:59 +00:00
ceriel
b8bb269c72 Replaced a few "bss 2" by "bss EM_WSIZE". 1986-10-20 11:28:29 +00:00
ceriel
baf5b74da2 A new version, that no longer tries to move all null parts to the end
of a segment. It also uses the "object" library to read and write ACK-
object files and libraries.
1986-10-20 10:17:57 +00:00
ceriel
8ffde3c86a I don't really know why, but the file was changed. 1986-10-20 09:35:51 +00:00
ceriel
e0926981a4 Deleted the #ifdef JOHAN stuff, and
added a #define MAXSECT.
1986-10-16 16:36:00 +00:00
ceriel
908eeaf9cd Removed some ridiculous code. 1986-10-15 13:58:51 +00:00
ceriel
b40489973e Removed part of test 127. It tried a LFR after doing a LOC and an ASS.
This is of course not allowed.
1986-10-13 14:45:18 +00:00
ceriel
256847556e Added a NOFLOAT define. (Taken from Koen Langendoen) 1986-10-13 14:42:31 +00:00
ceriel
36ef5b504b Apparently, ex_ap disappeared. Put it in again. 1986-10-10 15:21:35 +00:00
ceriel
1d0f716a4e Oops, forgot to remove the id_first definition. 1986-10-10 15:09:34 +00:00
ceriel
a43d257715 Added a "fmt_id" define, to prevent that no '_' is placed in front
of an identifier longer than 8 characters.
1986-10-10 15:05:10 +00:00
sater
2672c87f68 empty string was returned when it was not so good. 1986-10-09 16:15:00 +00:00
sater
ae2f236663 nullpointer and empty string were confused.
Long live the PDP and VAX
1986-10-09 16:12:24 +00:00
ceriel
703eb4e7a0 Added RANLIB 1986-10-09 13:21:33 +00:00
ceriel
591a0db767 Removed the "wordsize" variable. it was'nt needed, as we also have
EM_WSIZE.
1986-10-09 11:44:28 +00:00
ceriel
ec2b3e61c6 Addition of some changes by Kees Visser.
In packed structures, subrange types now occupy 1 byte if they fit in
1 byte, they occupy 2 bytes if they fit in 2, etc.
1986-10-09 11:09:27 +00:00
ceriel
9d54fe57f8 Changed a test that was word_size and alignment dependant. 1986-10-09 10:37:56 +00:00
ceriel
3030eb8cae newer version 1986-10-06 20:36:30 +00:00
ceriel
f3bf7cd5bc There was an error in test 026. It used local variables but declared none.
This is corrected.
1986-09-30 11:13:44 +00:00
erikb
5af21dfc79 modified the treatment of op=, ++ and -- operators 1986-09-29 14:01:34 +00:00
erikb
42112db262 modified the treatment of op=, ++ and -- operators 1986-09-29 13:16:11 +00:00
dick
66c247ba9c some very minor changes 1986-09-28 20:33:15 +00:00
ceriel
c3d4d40d1b many bug fixes 1986-09-25 19:39:06 +00:00
erikb
c967d1ab3a put heavily used pointer variables in registers 1986-09-24 13:53:16 +00:00
ceriel
bfad7d30f0 Added a pattern for "ldc ads". 1986-09-24 12:17:25 +00:00
ceriel
6a4a13d041 Initial revision 1986-09-24 11:24:37 +00:00
ceriel
a2599744f0 Addition of new patterns. 1986-09-23 09:41:47 +00:00
sater
9092e509c6 changed ad2str function not to add +0 at labels 1986-09-22 13:15:15 +00:00
sater
b5009c57b4 made debiug output better 1986-09-22 13:14:54 +00:00
erikb
f21743e213 if NOPP: made #line directives treated correctly 1986-09-22 13:04:04 +00:00
erikb
dad1ab3b22 some minor fixes 1986-09-17 12:31:45 +00:00
erikb
a968ce8437 changed some large static data structures into STATIC 1986-09-15 08:47:53 +00:00
erikb
225f1fb724 added one byte to ibuf 1986-09-12 12:58:22 +00:00
erikb
c6a51a39f0 built in the compile time flag NOFLOAT to get rid of the float stuff 1986-09-12 09:16:07 +00:00
ceriel
b6dde9472f Bug fix: The "cmp.l" instruction was sometimes used in an illegal way. 1986-09-10 16:03:11 +00:00
erikb
ecf5219493 corrected the treatment of the <<= and >>= operators 1986-09-10 10:23:26 +00:00
erikb
b9bce39f1e simplified the return expression in loadbuf() 1986-09-09 13:49:46 +00:00
em
c685aa11b5 set limit on optimization passes to prevent loop
in optimizer in case of bad table.
1986-09-09 13:10:15 +00:00
erikb
d7716c5e5a corrected the compile-time evaluation of ~<unsigned value> 1986-09-09 09:47:43 +00:00
ceriel
9dbd1060ad An improvement to prevent calls to the .cuu routine. 1986-09-05 16:35:12 +00:00
erikb
5927f264a8 various null-dereference problems fixed 1986-09-02 15:22:54 +00:00
erikb
c84c57be67 added some LINT facilities 1986-09-02 15:00:50 +00:00
sater
14b982346f Error fixed where w==2 was assumed 1986-08-28 10:28:42 +00:00
erikb
361613bb23 first operand to intexpr is arith typed 1986-08-26 14:59:36 +00:00
ceriel
a0db745586 newer version with bug fixes 1986-08-26 14:33:24 +00:00
erikb
e1c67b1fba unknown-sized locals retain their type 1986-08-26 10:30:39 +00:00
erikb
901d1b3af8 generate a con instruction for each character in a string constant 1986-08-25 08:47:07 +00:00
erikb
fc9f365b47 some minor bugs 1986-08-22 09:20:13 +00:00
erikb
06c0a20b4d made less environ and machine dependent 1986-08-22 09:10:12 +00:00
erikb
a7e97524e4 revised the treatment of "e op= f" expression 1986-08-13 10:05:39 +00:00
erikb
8217bef1eb added some #ifdef USE_TMP lines 1986-07-29 12:49:38 +00:00
erikb
7f74cabf12 added -T<path> option: create temporary file(s) in directory <path> 1986-07-29 11:46:00 +00:00
ceriel
cf8e8a5b96 Added a test for BLS with a blockmove of wordsize bytes. 1986-07-25 16:08:56 +00:00
ceriel
023073b422 Bug fix: the BLS instruction did'nt work with block moves of one word. 1986-07-25 15:57:03 +00:00
ceriel
6dd1a052d3 inn and set must be word-orientated, not byte-orientated. 1986-07-25 15:01:15 +00:00
ceriel
c422c4e130 Bug fix 1986-07-25 14:17:23 +00:00
ceriel
37320faecc Bug fix 1986-07-25 13:19:51 +00:00
ceriel
f68d0ffb7d Made tail_mon dependant on tail_mon.a 1986-07-23 11:06:29 +00:00
ceriel
79eab3513d Added a ".sect .text". The text "landed" in the bss segment. 1986-07-23 11:04:40 +00:00
ceriel
5d188dee44 Bug fix. It just did'nt work. 1986-07-22 15:11:09 +00:00
ceriel
729774d6f8 *** empty log message *** 1986-07-22 14:49:46 +00:00
ceriel
a067d1bc0d Adapted to the use of the new assembler. 1986-07-22 13:42:21 +00:00
ceriel
399a46eb92 Adapted to new assembler and made re-entrant. 1986-07-22 13:37:16 +00:00
ceriel
f514411cea Adapted to use of new assembler. 1986-07-22 13:23:14 +00:00
ceriel
aee6a1648a Initial revision 1986-07-22 11:07:48 +00:00
ceriel
f45f393b71 replaced all occurrences of "cc" by "$(CC)". 1986-07-22 11:01:54 +00:00
ceriel
2acc260239 Adapted so that anybody can do "make install". 1986-07-22 10:47:51 +00:00
ceriel
a184032321 Changed default machine to "vax4". 1986-07-22 10:36:04 +00:00
ceriel
4f3b82565f Added code to use different integer constants when compiled with
word_size >= 4.
1986-07-21 12:26:38 +00:00
ceriel
2934d628b5 Added -Vi... flag to Pascal compiler options. 1986-07-21 09:58:19 +00:00
ceriel
3c76cbaa1e Some changes needed for the new 4-4 Pascal compiler. 1986-07-21 09:53:44 +00:00
ceriel
83d21d8076 Added instructions to make pem44.m 1986-07-21 09:40:20 +00:00
ceriel
d0fdcb18db This is the result of the merging of 2.5 with 2.4.1.1, with some
minor fixes.
1986-07-21 09:30:11 +00:00
ceriel
5fd9c608ed Temporary variables are no longer overlapping. The operlapping caused
problems with register variables.
Also, code is added to prevent the generation of static exchanges.
only included if the preprocessor-constant
NO_EXC is defined.
1986-07-21 09:23:39 +00:00
dick
3434e1c53f some leaks plugged (as detected by the leak detector) 1986-07-18 22:23:23 +00:00
dick
824293a681 some leaks plugged (as detected by the leak detector) 1986-07-18 21:10:42 +00:00
dick
c9a188825d option NORCSID for lint in Makefile is nonsense 1986-07-17 22:17:59 +00:00
ceriel
d5a95fcac0 Some bug fixes 1986-07-14 15:00:08 +00:00
ceriel
832bdeb3be better compatibility between CARDINAL and ADDRESS 1986-07-10 16:27:26 +00:00
ceriel
965e75761d newer version 1986-07-08 14:59:02 +00:00
ceriel
bcfca75b56 newer version 1986-06-26 09:39:36 +00:00
ceriel
9932033365 newer version 1986-06-20 14:36:49 +00:00
ceriel
a9dfdc494b newer version 1986-06-17 12:04:05 +00:00
sater
f1a0c90fb1 removed sanity checking on result from sprintf
System IIIish systems seem to have their own idea.
1986-06-17 09:13:11 +00:00
sater
4398053245 Conversions from 1 byte integers were wrong.
Only discovered after new C-frontend.
1986-06-16 11:35:12 +00:00
ceriel
ec528b797e newer version 1986-06-10 13:18:52 +00:00
ceriel
966213238a There was a bug in the printing of the trap number.
This is corrected.
1986-06-06 23:35:42 +00:00
ceriel
7a9d436a56 newer version 1986-06-06 09:35:11 +00:00
ceriel
caf99ea472 newer version 1986-06-06 02:22:09 +00:00
ceriel
db258b68ea Increased the size of the expression node table. 1986-06-05 13:56:31 +00:00
ceriel
f12ea12eda Rediscovered a bug in the VAX 4.1 UNIX assembler. It handles $0f0.0 wrong!
The changes is the table insure that $0f0.0 is never generated.
1986-06-05 12:43:56 +00:00
ceriel
9e0ab0029b first, almost complete, version 1986-06-04 09:01:48 +00:00
ceriel
db795bc07a newer version 1986-05-30 18:48:00 +00:00
ceriel
6382054ae5 newer version 1986-05-28 18:36:51 +00:00
erikb
441ba991fa revised the type checking of expr in "switch (expr)" 1986-05-28 08:40:06 +00:00
ceriel
f56f8f56f3 newer version 1986-05-23 19:25:21 +00:00
ceriel
1cfe2b5dac newer version 1986-05-23 09:46:31 +00:00
ceriel
0f04bc72bd newer version 1986-05-21 18:32:20 +00:00
sater
5a84f07281 Non existing token fields in the format string caused memfaults
because fields were checked beyond the end of the tokeninfo. Fixed.
1986-05-21 15:08:57 +00:00
ceriel
a4887558b8 newer version 1986-05-16 17:15:36 +00:00
ceriel
15896e422c newer version 1986-05-14 09:03:51 +00:00
ceriel
0bf57a9c64 newer version 1986-05-01 19:06:53 +00:00
ceriel
53e3cd60d0 newer version 1986-04-28 18:06:58 +00:00
erikb
dd5b8dfabf various small layout corrections 1986-04-28 09:56:33 +00:00
ceriel
4173e3c487 newer version 1986-04-25 10:14:08 +00:00
ceriel
a254a8acb1 newer version 1986-04-23 22:12:22 +00:00
ceriel
ce160b4f1a newer version 1986-04-22 23:22:19 +00:00
ceriel
fef8659bf1 newer version 1986-04-22 22:36:16 +00:00
keie
de21842485 Added EODDZ to the exported externals.
It should have been there from the start.
1986-04-22 10:40:29 +00:00
ceriel
674791bf91 newer version 1986-04-21 17:27:06 +00:00
ceriel
6715e3b171 newer version 1986-04-18 17:53:47 +00:00
erikb
53255dcf48 various small corrections 1986-04-17 14:42:54 +00:00
ceriel
d3d6e637d6 newer version 1986-04-17 09:28:09 +00:00
ceriel
426c273de8 newer version 1986-04-15 17:51:53 +00:00
ceriel
7d76f2829a newer version 1986-04-12 02:21:24 +00:00
ceriel
64a9f1e5d7 newer version 1986-04-11 11:57:19 +00:00
ceriel
ba47f9fe7c newer version 1986-04-10 01:08:49 +00:00
ceriel
d1a2112163 safety commit 1986-04-09 18:14:49 +00:00
ceriel
b853ce1546 newer version 1986-04-08 23:51:11 +00:00
ceriel
6ff4d852e1 newer version 1986-04-08 23:34:10 +00:00
ceriel
629b8fdb88 newer version 1986-04-08 18:15:46 +00:00
ceriel
3de71150a6 newer version 1986-04-07 22:15:08 +00:00
ceriel
f2b68c8261 newer version 1986-04-07 17:40:38 +00:00
ceriel
376c47c98f newer version, partial parse trees 1986-04-06 17:42:56 +00:00
ceriel
0e4311490c A newer version 1986-04-04 13:47:04 +00:00
erikb
b5e1097890 corrected the treatment of PREDEF-ed macros 1986-04-04 11:31:03 +00:00
erikb
bb8d6b5143 revised the treatment of strings in initialisations 1986-04-04 09:54:50 +00:00
ceriel
c8453bb3f7 newer version, safety commit 1986-04-03 17:41:26 +00:00
erikb
4c75213caa adapted to print(3L) module 1986-04-03 14:32:56 +00:00
erikb
725d3fa6ea revised check_ival() (among some other small changes) 1986-04-03 11:33:32 +00:00
ceriel
52d743f223 Newer version, safety commit 1986-04-03 00:44:39 +00:00
ceriel
b89155a64a newer version, safety commit 1986-04-02 17:34:21 +00:00
erikb
66c571d217 revised the administration of Value expressions 1986-04-02 08:37:17 +00:00
ceriel
fac31cce07 Newer version, safety commit 1986-03-29 01:04:49 +00:00
dick
ad1feaf35c expression nodes now can have a flag EX_ERROR 1986-03-27 18:17:48 +00:00
ceriel
f2764393be safety commit, newer version 1986-03-27 17:37:41 +00:00
sater
851a68883c repaired inreg() pseudofunction, it delivered total nonsense 1986-03-27 15:49:16 +00:00
erikb
5bdb108e47 modified the string-constant printing routines; bts2str() is invoked 1986-03-27 11:01:12 +00:00
ceriel
f2ff7661e4 safety commit, newer version 1986-03-26 22:46:48 +00:00
ceriel
4a91a6bf4b newer version, safety commit 1986-03-26 17:53:13 +00:00
erikb
e8505e4434 introduced the string(3L) module 1986-03-26 16:58:43 +00:00
ceriel
7f174a46c3 A newer version, safety commit 1986-03-26 15:11:02 +00:00
dick
8546fbe868 identifier pfd_type renamed to fdtpp 1986-03-26 14:01:10 +00:00
erikb
80155f7b4c introduced the em_code(3L) and em_mes(3L) modules 1986-03-25 16:40:43 +00:00
erikb
1afbf0e20f adapted to the system(3L) interface 1986-03-25 10:39:23 +00:00
ceriel
0e39681621 some improvements 1986-03-24 17:29:57 +00:00
erikb
0d63470af3 fixed a garbage collection problem 1986-03-21 13:26:28 +00:00
ceriel
b683a21217 Initial version 1986-03-20 14:52:03 +00:00
erikb
9f8f8c1a9c fixed a bug in check_*_expr() 1986-03-20 13:09:47 +00:00
sater
5c71bad6e1 Relaxed input syntax for from STACK coercions
No gen clause is necessary anymore.
1986-03-19 16:14:12 +00:00
erikb
ea73b04ef3 improved lay-out 1986-03-19 16:07:32 +00:00
erikb
f14b5ead0e Added C_init(), an empty-bodied routine 1986-03-19 12:36:02 +00:00
erikb
48cbb00cbe Recovered from some inconsistencies. 1986-03-19 12:31:05 +00:00
erikb
fe073353c0 last modifications in order to introduce the EM library mechanism 1986-03-18 09:01:59 +00:00
dick
5880700ab4 some long lines split 1986-03-17 17:47:04 +00:00
dick
021d8d1fec more calls of expr_error() for better error reporting 1986-03-15 18:16:30 +00:00
dick
c80f2c0817 improved error reporting for initialization expressions
miscellaneous changes
1986-03-14 16:15:16 +00:00
erikb
6e53274b6a simplified the EM con/rom functions (86/03/13) 1986-03-13 13:27:44 +00:00
erikb
43e75cec60 renamed some EM code functions according to the 86/03/11 EMCODE definition 1986-03-11 15:21:30 +00:00
erikb
4b2ac75e94 added the possibility to prepend your own libc.a before the default 1986-03-11 14:46:46 +00:00
erikb
5f734a6210 removed a reference to declarator.str 1986-03-10 15:59:43 +00:00
erikb
c0becb6dc7 Introduced the ALLOCDEF mechanism 1986-03-10 15:20:30 +00:00
erikb
3dbb828d82 Introduction of ALLOCDEF 1986-03-10 15:18:00 +00:00
erikb
69e7c2d0ae introduced the ALLOCDEF mechanism 1986-03-10 15:16:33 +00:00
erikb
5d1e9f0c86 renamed declarator.h as declar.h 1986-03-10 15:10:56 +00:00
erikb
787061ffd4 *** empty log message *** 1986-03-10 13:15:40 +00:00
erikb
bc296e2dcc *** empty log message *** 1986-03-10 13:07:55 +00:00
em
c21def03db updated 1986-03-05 17:12:39 +00:00
dick
916a65f5d6 generated itables no longer in RCS; avoid overflow in app.codes.pr 1986-03-05 16:58:40 +00:00
em
c2dc6da49f Added the possibility of a third field in the pseudo-instruction
description.
This change is upwards compatible with the previous version, t.i., it still
works the same with the previous version of "em_table".
1986-03-05 14:27:08 +00:00
em
0f84a92306 Added a third field to the pseudos indicating the type(s) of argument(s).
New types are:
	t	cst	{0,1}
	a	par
	v	val
	e	dlb
Also added : ?, * and +, having the usual regular expression meaning.
1986-03-05 13:45:38 +00:00
dick
f0cb9591ec adapting to phototypesetter 1986-03-04 15:30:45 +00:00
ceriel
249314e586 Bug fix: The "calls" instruction could be called with
first argument > 255. This is corrected.
1986-03-04 11:39:22 +00:00
dick
10569743c8 adapting to phototypesetter 1986-02-28 18:02:00 +00:00
dick
1cd71875ac small adjustments 1986-02-28 17:46:09 +00:00
dick
43fd3df629 entry clean added 1986-02-27 14:57:35 +00:00
keie
7592c2cb1a Adapted to our ack environment. 1986-02-11 11:22:43 +00:00
keie
7606d347a0 Added a warning message. 1986-02-11 11:18:57 +00:00
keie
9c10e17f06 Ack is using good old cpp again. 1986-02-11 11:15:19 +00:00
keie
2d429613e6 *** empty log message *** 1986-02-11 11:14:11 +00:00
keie
2ff183fd2a Too long ago. 1986-02-11 11:13:41 +00:00
bal
b48d45c38d increased STACK_DEPTH from 50 to 250 1986-02-10 11:04:33 +00:00
ceriel
e2cfecffe3 Added some new patterns involving multiplies with 0, 1 etc. 1986-02-10 10:14:41 +00:00
ceriel
847de065d6 A minor improvement. 1986-02-10 10:08:27 +00:00
dick
9694054674 updated for photo-typesetter 1986-02-04 17:37:41 +00:00
em
f3e2248cc4 fixed bug in number() -- hex letters mistreated 1986-02-03 14:30:19 +00:00
sater
ef48465b2a Hex numbers didn't work. Corrected bug in myatoi(). 1986-01-24 16:08:34 +00:00
dick
d112eb710c adapted to phototypesetter 1986-01-20 20:39:09 +00:00
sater
144ef77113 Some old changes by keie, plus added tbl to ncg.doc 1985-12-04 16:08:21 +00:00
sater
5c0660793d Changed to be printed on laserprinter.
Removed paragraph about bug, since bug is now solved
1985-12-04 15:52:51 +00:00
sater
a91e33ce96 Corrected error in otime of initialisation of booleans 1985-12-02 13:55:06 +00:00
ceriel
5b09f4211d A minor change in the LL.output format. 1985-11-26 13:27:51 +00:00
ceriel
4b31842ecc Remove targets before installing new ones 1985-11-25 16:26:59 +00:00
ceriel
7e978197d2 New manual page for a completely new version of LLgen. 1985-11-25 16:00:18 +00:00
ceriel
1284cf0187 Changed dependancies 1985-11-25 15:57:43 +00:00
ceriel
fb36b6b633 New version of LLgen, new version of this Makefile ... 1985-11-25 15:52:56 +00:00
ceriel
8b48512de7 New version, with a much faster parser. 1985-11-25 15:50:51 +00:00
ceriel
70a5d416d1 New version, much faster 1985-11-25 15:50:19 +00:00
ceriel
42d0e056fb Completely new version, generating a much faster parser 1985-11-25 15:48:42 +00:00
ceriel
f055d610d3 Completely new version, generating a much faster parser. 1985-11-25 15:47:51 +00:00
bal
5ac646f89f Yet another bug reported by sater. 1985-11-18 16:55:53 +00:00
keie
b493f98f39 The extra BSD4.2 code caused two branches to be out of range. 1985-10-15 15:53:48 +00:00
keie
2e947a5e91 BSD4.3 size returns an error when it cannot find one of
its arguments.
1985-10-15 15:47:12 +00:00
bal
c9c168d853 Several optimization patterns for DAS (Delftse Ada Subset) frontend added. 1985-10-14 09:27:24 +00:00
ceriel
e494e09063 Initial revision 1985-10-03 18:31:47 +00:00
ceriel
aab6140bfa different interface. 1985-10-03 17:19:14 +00:00
bal
98d06cffb2 0 / -1 confusion for properties (bug reported by sater). 1985-10-03 14:47:28 +00:00
bal
de79024451 0 / -1 confusion for properties (2 bugs reported by sater). 1985-10-03 14:45:53 +00:00
bal
dcb4b71a3d 0 / -1 confusion for properties (bug reported by sater). 1985-10-03 14:41:44 +00:00
ceriel
d07e8114c6 More safety, also after terms and nonterminals. 1985-10-03 12:38:55 +00:00
ceriel
67beb0c4d5 *** empty log message *** 1985-10-03 10:36:07 +00:00
ceriel
ca4cc6fe80 Initial revision 1985-10-03 10:35:55 +00:00
ceriel
4ed4dab397 *** empty log message *** 1985-10-03 10:25:40 +00:00
ceriel
6b74749c12 Initial revision 1985-10-03 10:25:23 +00:00
ceriel
b83ab7873e A more precise safety after a term. 1985-10-02 22:49:16 +00:00
ceriel
73153b484b Initial revision 1985-10-02 22:20:04 +00:00
ceriel
40915d76c6 Name change : tail_em.vend -> end_em.s 1985-09-19 14:03:13 +00:00
bal
8668e313f8 bug fixed: same problem as in r1.3, now with csb.
Solution: only do block fusion if first block end on bra.
1985-09-19 11:14:55 +00:00
bal
a18c5dd9c4 bug fixed: last instruction of first block in block fusion optimization
can be a conditional branch. (bug detected by Ceriel).
1985-09-18 16:27:29 +00:00
bal
53f6b51cde sprintf does not return pointer to string so the assert(s==string) does
not make any sense.
1985-09-06 11:39:06 +00:00
bal
6a4d9703cc exit(0) added (trouble with make) 1985-09-06 11:38:00 +00:00
bal
0d9459bdd6 MAXSTAB set to 2500 (problem with argument list of ROM for new C front-end). 1985-09-06 11:06:32 +00:00
bal
57a2371a16 bug fixed: null-pointer dereference. 1985-08-13 14:03:23 +00:00
em
cd5fb7ea8c Added str0 and str 1. 1985-07-26 17:38:22 +00:00
em
8ebd47f7d7 The identifier ns occurs in C programs. 1985-07-26 17:15:15 +00:00
em
bccc87a808 Annita's versie 1985-07-26 17:14:13 +00:00
em
478209a840 This one works correctly for programs failing to translate. 1985-07-26 17:04:31 +00:00
em
1c5cb87985 removed a superfluous line. 1985-07-26 15:37:11 +00:00
em
83103c314b Initial revision 1985-07-26 12:52:13 +00:00
em
bc759a2903 *** empty log message *** 1985-07-26 12:51:45 +00:00
em
6bdc39213b Initial revision 1985-07-26 11:56:24 +00:00
em
0e7eb937b4 Not using libmon. 1985-07-26 11:47:54 +00:00
em
e63968056e Added RCSID 1985-07-26 11:45:49 +00:00
em
9ef57888fa Initial revision 1985-07-26 11:38:59 +00:00
em
6710f21388 *** empty log message *** 1985-07-26 11:29:08 +00:00
em
b5efab645f Initial revision 1985-07-26 11:05:30 +00:00
ceriel
5d86ead6c0 There was a bug in the "str $1==0" instruction. It said:
str $1==0	| source4 |
			remove(ALL) "jsb\t.strlb"	|	| |
It should of course have been
str $1==0	| STACK |	jsb\t.strlb"	|	| |
1985-07-21 11:34:33 +00:00
bal
7b4b53af21 bugs for ngf 8 and fif 4 fixed (asp 16 --> asp 8). 1985-07-19 18:02:25 +00:00
bal
2e5bf801a0 patterns for "loc loc cii/cui/ciu/cuu $1==$2" added. 1985-07-19 17:58:34 +00:00
bal
04cee55976 .sect .text added 1985-07-19 13:43:03 +00:00
bal
479827380c .sect .text added 1985-07-18 14:52:56 +00:00
keie
6f22e5b7d9 %D => %ld 1985-06-21 12:55:17 +00:00
keie
6de8b41da2 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-19 13:42:49 +00:00
keie
3e6e781c8d Now using AALMAG instead of ARMAG for led libraries. 1985-06-12 10:31:28 +00:00
keie
57acada057 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 16:57:01 +00:00
keie
68e92c8319 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 16:05:04 +00:00
keie
1b972eff60 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 15:32:18 +00:00
keie
b11d9ce683 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 14:52:43 +00:00
keie
1c19000977 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 13:55:48 +00:00
keie
eea5656df7 *** empty log message *** 1985-06-10 13:50:36 +00:00
keie
8749fb1da8 Using new magic number for 'aal' archives. 1985-06-10 12:41:51 +00:00
keie
a90254c045 Added AALMAG, for making distiction between 'led' archives
with SYMDEF and archives made/altered with 'arch'.
1985-06-10 11:28:06 +00:00
keie
dacde83aae Removed debugging printout. 1985-06-10 11:23:22 +00:00
keie
42c2a9754f Adapted by Sjoerd to amoeba. 1985-06-10 10:53:15 +00:00
keie
44ccf469d9 Changed to get led working under amoeba.
Author: K.S. Mullender.
1985-06-10 10:48:49 +00:00
keie
1c9723afd7 Using new assembler & linker. 1985-06-04 11:43:01 +00:00
keie
23bf60a80e Adapated to use of new linker & assembler. 1985-06-04 11:30:54 +00:00
keie
04e97ce36b *** empty log message *** 1985-06-04 11:18:43 +00:00
keie
0370ea6d61 Adapted to use of the new assembler & linker 1985-06-04 11:18:09 +00:00
keie
a9bbf81f93 Adapted to use of new assembler & linker 1985-06-04 10:57:42 +00:00
keie
fa2547ddf7 Adapted to use of new linker & assembler. 1985-06-04 10:44:10 +00:00
keie
a26a8318da Adapted to using the new assembler & linker. 1985-06-04 10:40:50 +00:00
keie
206c33b6bc Added a module for fake floating point. 1985-06-04 10:39:45 +00:00
keie
5acb12ebe0 Now prevents inclusion of failed compilations into libraries. 1985-06-04 10:32:27 +00:00
keie
040aa7115c Adapted to use of new assmbler and linker. 1985-06-04 10:32:07 +00:00
keie
531353e14d More adapted to use by march. 1985-06-04 10:30:18 +00:00
keie
3f83d34dd9 Adapted to use of the new assembler and linker. 1985-06-04 10:29:56 +00:00
keie
5fc5b3c32d A version that tells march to not try to include objects
of modules that failed to translate in the library.
1985-06-04 10:26:06 +00:00
keie
227a684c70 Adapted tu use new assembler & linker. 1985-06-04 10:25:30 +00:00
keie
be932f0f5b 1 - Changed %D into %ld.
2 - Adapted to the new linker.
1985-06-04 10:21:15 +00:00
em
37c3bced4b Adapted to using the new linker. 1985-06-04 09:48:00 +00:00
em
4eed0fe226 Added one remark intended for bug circumvention. 1985-05-28 15:57:52 +00:00
em
4d183a3757 *** empty log message *** 1985-05-23 13:56:24 +00:00
keie
177af75c93 *** empty log message *** 1985-05-13 11:19:24 +00:00
keie
f90babad30 Adapted to installation in the EM tree. 1985-05-13 11:09:53 +00:00
keie
8cbd17b1ba *** empty log message *** 1985-05-13 11:06:30 +00:00
bal
0db1db10b8 Bug fixed: cg generated instructions like "and.l #2,a4", which are
not allowed on the 68000.
The condition "inreg($...) < 2" is added to every EM-pattern that
accesses local non-register variables. So the ordering of the
patterns for regvar/non-regvar is no longer important.
1985-05-01 12:53:33 +00:00
keie
eb025dae5c Added a message to the effect that 'local commons' can not be handled. 1985-04-29 11:55:30 +00:00
keie
cec503a1b4 Changed trap number into bit shifted by number for ignore mask.
The whole example is, at leat, unclear.
The trap for EFOVL never occurs!
1985-04-25 13:37:59 +00:00
keie
5472fafa56 Add hoc solution of .align problem. 1985-04-23 12:55:01 +00:00
em
a0a7a48c3b The reading of the input is now machine independent. 1985-04-22 15:13:24 +00:00
em
89a37681fc *** empty log message *** 1985-04-22 14:12:26 +00:00
keie
7b6ed6733f Added assignment for debuuging info. 1985-04-19 13:28:56 +00:00
keie
78961d37c1 Now using out.h from ../../h 1985-04-18 15:22:22 +00:00
keie
b391be598b Now using arch.h, out.h and ranlib.h from ../../h 1985-04-18 15:21:16 +00:00
bal
d0e857ddb2 Initial revision 1985-04-18 15:14:37 +00:00
bal
928e341f16 Bug fixed: incorrect return value
New version adapted from m68k4 version.
1985-04-18 15:12:29 +00:00
bal
3759de23eb Extra systems calls added 1985-04-18 15:12:06 +00:00
ceriel
9c9976c121 Er zat een bug in het patroon
lol adp stl met $1 < 0.
Ten onrechte werd in de gegenereerde code het AP register gebruikt.
Dit moest natuurlijk FP zijn.
1985-04-17 13:38:36 +00:00
keie
eb3fc1d43e Added provision to print (possibly in mach.h defined) modhead
on the output assmble file as the very first text.
1985-04-16 16:14:55 +00:00
bal
7b745d6fb2 Bug fixed for pattern 'sti $1 > 4' (ADDREG -> ADDSCR)
Bug was present since version 1.1
1985-04-16 15:24:23 +00:00
3482 changed files with 161252 additions and 19881 deletions

19
.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
Action
Copyright
NEW
README
TakeAction
bin
doc
emtest
etc
first
h
include
modules
lang
lib
mach
man
mkun
util

59
Action
View File

@@ -7,12 +7,25 @@ end
name "EM definition"
dir etc
end
name "C preprocessor"
dir util/cpp
name "LL(1) Parser generator"
dir util/LLgen
end
name "EM definition library"
dir util/data
end
name "C utilities"
dir util/cmisc
end
name "Modules"
dir modules/src
indir
end
name "C preprocessor"
dir util/cpp
end
name "ACK object utilities"
dir util/amisc
end
name "Encode/Decode"
dir util/misc
end
@@ -25,6 +38,10 @@ end
name "EM Peephole optimizer"
dir util/opt
end
name "EM Global optimizer"
dir util/ego
indir
end
name "ACK archiver"
dir util/arch
end
@@ -34,18 +51,24 @@ end
name "Bootstrap for backend tables"
dir util/cgg
end
name "LL(1) Parser generator"
dir util/LLgen
end
name "Bootstrap for newest form of backend tables"
dir util/ncgg
end
name "LED link editor"
dir util/led
end
name "TOPGEN target optimizer generator"
dir util/topgen
end
name "C frontend"
dir lang/cem/comp
dir lang/cem/cemcom
end
name "Basic frontend"
dir lang/basic/src
end
name "Occam frontend"
dir lang/occam/comp
end
name "Intel 8086 support"
dir mach/i86
indir
@@ -82,10 +105,6 @@ name "4-4 Interpreter support"
dir mach/int44
indir
end
name "IBM PC/IX support"
dir mach/ix
indir
end
name "Motorola 68000 2-4 support"
dir mach/m68k2
indir
@@ -114,14 +133,26 @@ name "Signetics 2650 support"
dir mach/s2650
indir
end
name "Vax 2-4 support"
dir mach/vax2
indir
end
name "Vax 4-4 support"
dir mach/vax4
indir
end
name "M68020 System V/68 support"
dir mach/m68020
indir
end
name "Sun 3 M68020 support"
dir mach/sun3
indir
end
name "Sun 2 M68000 support"
dir mach/sun2
indir
end
name "Mantra M68000 System V.0 support"
dir mach/mantra
indir
end
name "Z80 support"
dir mach/z80
indir

View File

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
/*
* (c) copyright 1983 by the Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
* A M S T E R D A M C O M P I L E R K I T
*
* This product is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
* (c) copyright 1987 by the Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
*
* Permission to use, sell, duplicate or disclose this software must be
* obtained in writing. Requests for such permissions may be sent to
@@ -14,4 +14,3 @@
* The Netherlands
*
*/

View File

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
exec sh TakeAction distr distr/Action

38
NEW
View File

@@ -1,17 +1,27 @@
What's new:
A lot of things have changed since that previous distribution.
A lot of things have changed since the previous distribution.
It is not wise to mix files created by the previous version of the Kit
with files belonging to this version, although that might sometimes work.
The major additions are:
- Basic frontend
- New codegenerator
- LL(1) parser generator
- Vax backend with 4-byte wordsize
- Motorola 68000 backend with 4-byte wordsize
- Motorola 68000 interpreter for 2- and 4-byte wordsize
- Z8000 assembler and backend.
- 6805 assembler
- NatSem 16032 assembler
- Intel 8080 backend
- Zilog Z80 backend
- Signetics 2650 assembler
The major changes are:
- a new C-compiler and runtime system
- a new C preprocessor
- new assembler framework, allowing the generation of relocatable
object code for most processors
- new versions of all assemblers, using the new assembler framework
- a new link-editor, linking is now a separate and fast phase for most
machines
- improved Pascal compiler, now also handles 4-byte wordsize
- Motorola M68020 backend and assembler
- Support for (some) SUN systems
- improved version of LL(1) parser generator, producing faster code
- a new language: Occam
- better System V support, the Kit should now just compile and run
Ceriel J.H. Jacobs
Dept. of Math. and Computer Science
Vrije Universiteit
Postbus 7161
1007 MC Amsterdam
The Netherlands
(UseNet: ceriel@cs.vu.nl)

View File

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ RETC=0
do
eval set $LINE
case x"$1" in
x#*) ;;
x!*) ;;
xname) SYS="$2"
ACTION='make $PAR'
DIR=.
@@ -44,12 +44,18 @@ do
FAIL="$2" ;;
xsuccess) SUCC="$2" ;;
xdir) DIR="$2" ;;
xsystem) case `ack_sys` in
$2) ;;
*) echo "Sorry, $SYS can only be made on $2 systems"
xsystem) PAT="$2"
oIFS=$IFS
IFS="|"
eval set $2
case x`ack_sys` in
x$1|x$2|x$3|x$4|x$5|x$6|x$7) ;;
*) echo "Sorry, $SYS can only be made on $PAT systems"
DOIT=no
;;
esac ;;
esac
IFS=$oIFS
;;
xend) case $DOIT in
no) continue ;;
esac

1
bin/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
em.pascal

View File

@@ -1 +1 @@
exec /usr/em/doc/em.doc/int/em /usr/em/doc/em.doc/int/tables ${1-e.out} core
exec /usr/em/doc/em/int/em /usr/em/doc/em/int/tables ${1-e.out} core

View File

@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
name "Installation manual"
dir doc
end
name "EM documentation"
dir doc/em.doc
end
name "Pascal bootstrap files"
dir lang/pc/pem
end
name "LLgen bootstrap files"
dir util/LLgen
end
name "MSC6500 vend_library"
dir mach/6500/libem
end

View File

@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
name "vax2/cg bootstrap files"
dir mach/vax2/cg
end
name "vax4/cg bootstrap files"
dir mach/vax4/cg
end

View File

@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-- ./bin/em.pascal no RCS file
-- ./doc/em.doc/doc.pr no RCS file
-- ./doc/install.pr no RCS file
-- ./h/em_mnem.h no RCS file
-- ./h/em_pseu.h no RCS file
-- ./h/em_spec.h no RCS file
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.c no RCS file
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.h no RCS file
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem22.m no RCS file
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem24.m no RCS file
-- ./lib/LLgen/incl no RCS file
-- ./lib/LLgen/rec no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/head_em no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/head_i no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em.vend no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_mon no RCS file
-- ./mach/6500/libem/tail_em.ve.s.a no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
-- ./mach/z80/int/libpc/pc_tail.c.a no RCS file
-- ./mkun/pubmac no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q1 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q2 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q3 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q4 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q5 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q6 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q7 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q8 no distr2 yet
-- ./util/LLgen/src/parser no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.c no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.h no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/tokens.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_flag.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_mnem.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_pseu.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_ptyp.c no RCS file

View File

@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
How to make a fresh distribution:
For a distribution you need ".distr" files and RCS files.
The EM home directory contains a file called ".distr". It contains
the names of all the files and directories you want to have in the distribution.
The directories should contain .distr files, the other files should
be placed under RCS.
The current RCS revision name is "distr2".
The are files that derive from other files and yet should be placed
in the distribution.
These files should not be placed under RCS.
The file "Exceptions" in this directory contains the current list of
these files.
When all this is correct, use the shell script mktree the extract
the distribution from the EM tree.
cd /usr/em ; sh distr/mktree destination_tree >distr/f.attf 2>&1
Make sure that the destination tree exists and is empty!
Failing to do that will almost certainly result in a welter of
error messages.
The file f.attf contains mktree error messages and should be compared
to Exceptions.
The actions of mktree are quite complicated. It starts in the current
directory reading the ".distr" file, after copying that file to the
destination tree.
For each file mentioned there it performes certain actions:
1- Directory Change to that directory and call yourself recursively.
2- File
a- Try to do "co -rdistr2 destination_tree/path/destination_file"
on succes "chmod +w destination_file"
else
b- Try to do "co destination_tree/destination_file"
on succes "chmod +w destination_file" and
give message that says "Missing distr2 entry" (or some such).
else
c- I Does a file LIST exist in this directory AND
is the first line of LIST equal to the name of the
destination file? If so, try to extract all the files
named in the rest of the LIST file and call the program
arch to create a library "arch cr `cat LIST`".
In this manner libraries can be distributed whose members
have their own RCS file!
else
II try to do "cp file destination_tree/path/destination_file"
on succes give message that says "Missing RCS entry"
(or some such).
else
d-
give message that says "Missing entry" (or some such).
Now you have the tree but not everything is kosher yet.
Some files derive from other files in the tree, those derivations should
be done with the use of an already installed distribution.
The files Action and Action1 in this directory contain the actions
we now take. (Confession: most of the time we use /usr/em)
One warning, to re-nroff the IR-81 report it takes more then just nroff
because most nroff's can't stand that report and stop half-way.
The ntroff program does the trick, but only on the 11's.
tbl sources | ntroff -Tlp | ntlp
After running these re-derivation programs the distrubtion tree starts
to look like the tree you need.
There are too many files there though, especially the files created by
the derivation process.
That is why we now give the command:
dtar cdf distr2 .
The file distr2 is the one you should put on tape!
But,.... before doing that: Try it out!
Repeat the process described in the installation manual.
Only if that succeeds you are sure that you included the files needed,
and gave all other files the correct "distr2" RCS id.
After you sent the tape away, forbid ANYBODY to touch the distr2 id
in your RCS files.
Good Luck,
Ed Keizer, 85/4/15.

View File

@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
: ${CDIR=.}
if test ! -r .distr
then
echo ++ no .distr in $CDIR
exit 0
fi
${DS-:} $CDIR
for i in `cat .distr`
do
if test -d $i
then
( if cd $i
then
${DD-:} $CDIR $i
CDIR=$CDIR/$i
export CDIR
exec /usr/em/distr/dwalk
else
echo ++ Could not access $CDIR/$i
fi
)
else
${DF-:} $CDIR $i
fi
done

View File

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
echo $1/$2

View File

@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-- ./bin/em.pascal no RCS file
-- ./doc/em.doc/doc.pr no RCS file
-- ./doc/install.pr no RCS file
-- ./h/em_mnem.h no RCS file
-- ./h/em_pseu.h no RCS file
-- ./h/em_spec.h no RCS file
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.c no RCS file
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.h no RCS file
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem22.m no RCS file
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem24.m no RCS file
-- ./lib/LLgen/incl no RCS file
-- ./lib/LLgen/rec no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/head_em no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/head_i no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em.vend no RCS file
-- ./lib/ix/tail_mon no RCS file
-- ./mach/6500/libem/tail_em.ve.s.a no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
-- ./mach/z80/int/libpc/pc_tail.c.a no RCS file
-- ./mkun/pubmac no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q1 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q2 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q3 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q4 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q5 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q6 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q7 no distr2 yet
-- ./mkun/tmac.q8 no distr2 yet
-- ./util/LLgen/src/parser no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.c no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.h no RCS file
-- ./util/LLgen/src/tokens.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_flag.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_mnem.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_pseu.c no RCS file
-- ./util/data/em_ptyp.c no RCS file

View File

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
case $# in
0) DIR=. ;;
1) DIR=$1 ;;
*) echo $0 [directory] ; exit 1 ;;
esac
DD=`pwd`/listall.d
DW=`pwd`/dwalk
export DD
cd $DIR
$DW

View File

@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
echo "<$1/$2>"
ls -bCdx `cat .distr`

View File

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
case $# in
0) DIR=. ;;
1) DIR=$1 ;;
*) echo $0 [directory] ; exit 1 ;;
esac
DD=`pwd`/echod
DW=`pwd`/dwalk
export DD
cd $DIR
$DW

View File

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
set -e
for i in `tail +2 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`
do
${DF-false} $1 $i
done
cd $DESTDIR/$1
arch cr `cat LIST`
: I do not remove the files constituating the library, because
: they might be present in .distr

View File

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
mkdir $DESTDIR/$1/$2

View File

@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
if co -q -rdistr2 $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
then
chmod +w $DESTDIR/$1/$2
elif co -q $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
then
chmod +w $DESTDIR/$1/$2
echo -- $1/$2 no distr2 yet
elif grep LIST .distr >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
(test "$2" = "`head -1 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`") >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
${DA-false} "$1" "$2"
then
: Fetched library contents one by one and put them together
elif cp $2 $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
then
echo -- $1/$2 no RCS file
else
echo ++ $1/$2 not present
fi
case $2 in
LIST) if (test -r $DESTDIR/$1/`head -1 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`) >/dev/null 2>&1
then echo ++ LIST files must be in .distr before their libraries!!!
fi ;;
esac

View File

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
cp .distr $DESTDIR/$1

View File

@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
case $# in
1) ;;
*) echo $0 directory ; exit 1 ;;
esac
DDIR=/usr/em/distr
case $1 in
/*) DESTDIR=$1 ;;
*) DESTDIR=`pwd`/$1 ;;
esac
DS=$DDIR/mks
DD=$DDIR/mkd
DF=$DDIR/mkf
DA=$DDIR/mka
export DESTDIR DS DD DF DA
$DDIR/dwalk

View File

@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
REV=
FILE=
while :
do
case $# in
0) break ;;
esac
ARG="$1"
shift
case "$ARG" in
-r*) REV=`echo "$ARG"| sed s/-r//` ;;
-*) FLAGS="$FLAGS $ARG" ;;
*) case x$FILE in
x) FILE="$ARG" ;;
*) echo todistr can only be done on one file at the time
exit 1 ;;
esac
esac
done
case x$REV in
x) REV=`rlog -h "$FILE"|sed -n -e '/head/s/^head:[ ]*//p'` ;;
esac
case x$REV in
x) exit 2 ;;
esac
rcs -ndistr2:$REV $FLAGS $FILE

View File

@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
DD=`pwd`/ts
echo OK

23
doc/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
Makefile
ack.doc
basic.doc
cg.doc
crefman.doc
em
install.doc
install.pr
ncg.doc
pcref.doc
peep.doc
regadd.doc
toolkit.doc
v7bugs.doc
val.doc
LLgen
6500.doc
i80.doc
z80.doc
m68020.doc
top
ego
occam

View File

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
. \" $Header$"
.po +10
.ND
.RP
.ND Dec 1984
.TL
.B
A backend table for the 6500 microprocessor
@@ -12,212 +12,6 @@ The backend table is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit (ACK).
It translates the intermediate language family EM to a machine
code for the MCS6500 microprocessor family.
.AE
.PP
.bp
.NH
Introduction.
.PP
As more and more organizations aquire many micro and minicomputers,
the need for portable compilers is becoming more and more acute.
The present situation, in which each harware vendor provides its
own compilers -- each with its own deficiencies and extensions, and
none of them compatible -- leaves much to be desired.
The ideal situation would be an integrated system containing
a family of (cross) compilers, each compiler accepting a standard
source language and, producing code for a wide variety of target
machines. Furthermore, the compilers should be compatible, so programs
written in one language can call procedures written in another
language. Finally, the system should be designed so as to make
adding new languages and, new machines easy. Such an integerated
system is being built at the Vrije Universiteit.
.PP
The compiler building system, which is called the "Amsterdam Compiler
Kit" (ACK), can be thought of as a "tool kit." It consists of
a number of parts that can be combined to form compilers (and
interpreters) with various properties. The tool kit is based
on an idea (UNCOL) that was first suggested in 1960 [5],
but which never really caught on then. The problem which UNCOL
attemps to solve is how to make a compiler for each of
.B
N
.R
languages on
.B
M
.R
different machines without having to write
.B
N
.R
x
.B
M
.R
programs.
.PP
As shown in Fig. 1, the UNCOL approach is to write
.B
N
.R
"front ends," each of which translates
one source language to a common
intermediate language, UNCOL (UNiversal Computer Oriented
Language), and
.B
M
.R
"back ends," each of which translates programs
in UNCOL to a specific machine language. Under these conditions,
only
.B
N
.R
+
.B
M
.R
programs must be written to provide all
.B
N
.R
languages on all
.B
M
.R
machines, instead of
.B
N
.R
x
.B
M
.R
programs.
.PP
Various reseachers have attempted to design a suitable UNCOL [1,6],
but none of these have become popular. It is the believe of the
designers of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit that previous attemps
have failed because they have been too ambitious, that is, they have
tried to cover all languages and all machines using a single UNCOL.
The approach of the designers is more modest:
they cater only to algebraic languages and machines whose memory
consist of 8-bit bytes, each with its own address.
Typical languages that could be handled include Ada, ALGOL 60,
ALGOL 68, BASIC, C, FORTRAN, Modula, Pascal, PL/I, PL/M, PLAIN and
RATFOR, where COBOL, LISP and SNOBOL would be less efficient.
Examples of machines that could be included are the Intel 8080 and
8086, Motorola 6800, 6809 and 68000, Zilog Z80 and Z8000, DEC PDP-11
and Vax, MOS Technology MCS6500 family and IBM but not the Burroughs
6700, CDC Cyber or Univac 1108 (because they are not byte_oriented).
With these restrictions the designers believe that the old UNCOL
idea can be used as the basis of a practical compiler-building
system.
.sp 10
.bp
.NH
An overview of the Amsterdam Compiler kit
.PP
The tool kit consists of eight components:
.IP 1.
The preprocessor.
.IP 2.
The front ends.
.IP 3.
The peephole optimizer.
.IP 4.
The global optimizer.
.IP 5.
The back end.
.IP 6.
The target machine optimizer.
.IP 7.
The universal assembler/linker.
.IP 8.
The utility package.
.PP
A fully optimizing compiler, depicted in Fig. 2, has seven cascaded
phases. Conceptually, each component reads an input file and writes
a transformed output file to be used as input to the next component.
In practice, some components may use temporary files to allow
multiple passes over the input or internal intermediate files.
.sp 20
.PP
In the following paragraphs a brief decription of each component
is given.
A more detailed description of the back end will be given in the
rest of this document. For a more detailed descripiton on the rest
of the components see [7]. A program to be compiled is first fed
into the (language independed) preprocessor, which provides a
simple macro facility and similar textual facilities.
The preprocessor's ouput is a legal program in one of the programming
languages supported, whereas the input is a program possibly
augmented with macro's, etc.
.PP
This output goes into the appropriate front end, whose job it is to
produce intermediate cade.
This intermediate code (the UNCOL of ACK) is the machine language
for a simple stack machine EM (Encoding Machine).
A typical front end might build a parse tree from the input
and then use the parse tree to generate EM cade,
which is similar to reverse Polish.
In order to perform this work, the front end has to maintain tables of declare
tables of declared variables, labels, etc., determine where
to place the data structures in memory and so on.
.PP
The EM code generated by the front end is fed into the peephole
optimizer, which scans it with a window of a view instructions,
replacing certain inefficient code sequences by better ones.
Such a search is important because EM contains instructions to
handle numerous important special cases efficiently
(e.g. incrementing a variable by 1).
It is our strategy to relieve the front ends of the burden
of hunting for special cases because there are many front ends
and just one peephole optimizer.
By handeling the special cases in the peephole optimizer,
the front ends become simpler, easier to write and easier to maintain.
.PP
Following the peephole optimizer is a global optimizer [2],
which unlike the peephole optimizer, examines the program as a whole.
It builts a data flow graph to make possible a variety of global
optimizations, among them, moving invariant code out of loops,
avoiding redundant computations, live/dead analysis and
eliminating tail recursion.
Note that the output of the global optimizer is still EM code.
.PP
Next comes the back end, which differs from the front ends in a
fundamental way.
Each front end is a separate program, whereas the back end is a
single program that is driven by a machine dependent driving table.
The driving table for a specific machine tells how EM code is
mapped onto the machine's assembly language.
Although a simple driving table just might macro expand each
EM instruction into a sequence of target machine instructions,
a much more sophisticated translation strategy is normaly used,
as described later.
For speech, the back end does not actually read in the driving
table at run time.
Instead, the tables are compiled along with the back end in advance,
resulting in one binairy program per machine.
.PP
The output of the back end is a program in the assembly language
of some particular machine.
The next component in the pipeline reads this program and performs
peephole optimization on it.
The optimizations performed here involve idiosyncrasies of the
target machine that cannot be performed by the machine-independent
EM-to-EM peephole optimizer.
Typically these optimizations take advantage of the special
instructions or special addressing modes.
.PP
The optimized target machine assembly code then goes into the final
component in the pipeline, the universal assembler/linker.
This program assembles the input to object format, extracting
routines from libraries and including them as needed.
.PP
The final component of the tool kit is the utility package,
which contains various test programs, interpreters for EM code,
EM libraries, conversion programs and other aids for the
implementer and user.
.bp
.DS C
.B
@@ -264,7 +58,7 @@ manufactured by Acorn Computer Ltd..
The MOS Technology MCS6500
.PP
The MCS6500 is as a family of CPU devices developed by MOS
Technology.
Technology [1].
The members of the MCS6500 family are the same chips in a
different housing.
The MCS6502, the big brother in the family, can handle 64k
@@ -861,7 +655,7 @@ The above description of the machine table is
a description of the table for the MCS6500.
It uses only a part of the possibilities which the code generator
generator offers.
For a more precise and detailed description see [4].
For a more precise and detailed description see [2].
.DS C
.B
THE BACK END TABLE.
@@ -1141,7 +935,7 @@ This subroutine expects the multiplicand in zero page
at locations ARTH, ARTH+1, while the multiplier is in zero
page locations ARTH+2, ARTH+3.
For a description of the algorithms used for multiplication and
division, see [9].
division, see [3].
A table content is:
.sp 1
.br
@@ -2071,34 +1865,6 @@ if it is to be used on a MCS6500.
REFERENCES.
.R
.IP 1.
Haddon. B.K., and Waite, W.M.
Experience with the Universal Intermediate Language Janus.
.B
Software Practice & Experience 8
.R
,
5 (Sept.-Oct. 1978), 601-616.
.RS
.PP
An intermediate language for use with Algol 68, Pascal, etc.
is described.
The paper discusses some problems encountered and how they were
dealt with.
.RE
.IP 2.
Lowry, E.S., and Medlock, C.W. Object Code Optimization.
.B
Commun. ACM 12
.R
,
(Jan. 1969), 13-22.
.RS
.PP
A classical paper on global object code optimization.
It covers data flow analysis, common subexpressions, code motion,
register allocation and other techniques.
.RE
.IP 3.
Osborn, A., Jacobson, S., and Kane, J. The Mos Technology MCS6500.
.B
An Introduction to Microcomputers ,
@@ -2109,7 +1875,7 @@ Volume II, Some Real Products (june 1977) chap. 9.
A hardware description of some real existing CPU's, such as
the Intel Z80, MCS6500, etc. is given in this book.
.RE
.IP 4.
.IP 2.
van Staveren, H.
The table driven code generator from the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, (July 11, 1983).
@@ -2117,43 +1883,7 @@ Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, (July 11, 1983).
.PP
The defining document for writing a back end table.
.RE
.IP 5.
Steel, T.B., Jr. UNCOL: The Myth and the Fact. in
.B
Ann. Rev. Auto. Prog.
.R
Goodman, R. (ed.), vol 2., (1960), 325-344.
.RS
.PP
An introduction to the UNCOL idea by its originator.
.RE
.IP 6.
Steel. T.B., Jr. A first Version of UNCOL.
.B
Proc. Western Joint Comp. Conf.
.R
,
(1961), 371-377.
.IP 7.
Tanenbaum, A.S., Stevenson, J.W., Keizer, E.G., and van Staveren,
H.
A Practical Tool Kit for Making Portable Compilers.
Informatica Rapport 74, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, 1983.
.RS
.PP
An overview on the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
.RE
.IP 8.
Tanenbaum, A.S., Stevenson, J.W., Keizer, E.G., and van Staveren,
H.
Description of an Experimental Machine Architecture for use with
Block Structured Languages.
Informatica Rapport 81, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, 1983.
.RS
.PP
The defining document for EM.
.RE
.IP 9.
.IP 3.
Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organization.
Prentice Hall. (1976).
.RS

3
doc/LLgen/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
LLgen.n
LLgen.refs
Makefile

1042
doc/LLgen/LLgen.n Normal file

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

54
doc/LLgen/LLgen.refs Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
%T An ALL(1) Compiler Generator
%A D. R. Milton
%A L. W. Kirchhoff
%A B. R. Rowland
%B Proc. of the SIGPLAN '79 Symposium on Compiler Construction
%D August 1979
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%N 8
%P 152-157
%V 14
%T Lex - A Lexical Analyser Generator
%A M. E. Lesk
%I Bell Laboratories
%D October 1975
%C Murrey Hill, New Jersey
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 39
%T Yacc: Yet Another Compiler Compiler
%A S. C. Johnson
%I Bell Laboratories
%D 1975
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 32
%T The C Programming Language
%A B. W. Kernighan
%A D. M. Ritchie
%I Prentice-Hall, Inc.
%C Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
%D 1978
%A M. Griffiths
%T LL(1) Grammars and Analysers
%E F. L. Bauer and J. Eickel
%B Compiler Construction, An Advanced Course
%I Springer-Verlag
%C New York, N.Y.
%D 1974
%T Make - A Program for Maintaining Computer Programs
%A S. I. Feldman
%J Software - Practice and Experience
%V 10
%N 8
%P 255-265
%D August 1979
%T Methods for the Automatic Construction of Error Correcting Parsers
%A J. R\*:ohrich
%J Acta Informatica
%V 13
%P 115-139
%D 1980

8
doc/LLgen/Makefile Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
# $Header$
EQN=eqn
REFER=refer
TBL=tbl
../LLgen.doc: LLgen.n LLgen.refs
$(REFER) -sA+T -p LLgen.refs LLgen.n | $(EQN) | $(TBL) > $@

View File

@@ -2,52 +2,67 @@
SUF=pr
PRINT=cat
RESFILES=cref.$(SUF) pcref.$(SUF) val.$(SUF) v7bugs.$(SUF) install.$(SUF)\
ack.$(SUF) cg.$(SUF) regadd.$(SUF) peep.$(SUF) toolkit.$(SUF) LLgen.$(SUF)\
basic.$(SUF) 6500.$(SUF) ncg.$(SUF)
NROFF=nroff
TBL=tbl
EQN=eqn
PIC=pic
REFER=refer
MS=-ms
cref.$(SUF): cref.doc
tbl $? | $(NROFF) >$@
v7bugs.$(SUF): v7bugs.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
ack.$(SUF): ack.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
cg.$(SUF): cg.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
ncg.$(SUF): ncg.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
regadd.$(SUF): regadd.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
install.$(SUF): install.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
pcref.$(SUF): pcref.doc
$(NROFF) $? >$@
basic.$(SUF): basic.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
peep.$(SUF): peep.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
val.$(SUF): val.doc
$(NROFF) $? >$@
toolkit.$(SUF): toolkit.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
LLgen.$(SUF): LLgen.doc
eqn $? | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
RESFILES= \
toolkit.$(SUF) install.$(SUF) em.$(SUF) ack.$(SUF) v7bugs.$(SUF) \
peep.$(SUF) cg.$(SUF) ncg.$(SUF) regadd.$(SUF) LLgen.$(SUF) \
basic.$(SUF) crefman.$(SUF) pcref.$(SUF) val.$(SUF) \
6500.$(SUF) i80.$(SUF) z80.$(SUF) top.$(SUF) ego.$(SUF) \
m68020.$(SUF) occam.$(SUF)
.SUFFIXES: .doc .$(SUF)
.doc.$(SUF):
$(NROFF) $(MS) $< > $@
crefman.$(SUF): crefman.doc
$(EQN) crefman.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
v7bugs.$(SUF): v7bugs.doc
$(NROFF) v7bugs.doc >$@
install.$(SUF): install.doc
$(TBL) install.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
pcref.$(SUF): pcref.doc
$(NROFF) pcref.doc >$@
val.$(SUF): val.doc
$(NROFF) val.doc >$@
6500.$(SUF): 6500.doc
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
$(TBL) 6500.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
LLgen.doc: LLgen.X
LLgen.X:
cd LLgen; make "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) "REFER="$(REFER)
top.doc: top.X
top.X:
cd top; make "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) "REFER="$(REFER)
occam.doc: occam.X
occam.X:
cd occam; make "PIC="$(PIC) "TBL="$(TBL) "EQN="$(EQN)
ego.doc: ego.X
ego.X:
cd ego; make "REFER="$(REFER)
em.$(SUF): em.X
em.X:
cd em; make "TBL="$(TBL) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "SUF="$(SUF)
install cmp:
distr: install.doc
nroff -Tlp install.doc >install.pr
tbl install.doc | nroff -Tlp $(MS) >install.pr
pr:
@make "SUF="$SUF "NROFF="$NROFF "PRINT="$PRINT $(RESFILES) \
>make.pr.out 2>&1
@make "SUF="$(SUF) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) \
"PIC="$(PIC) "MS="$(MS) \
$(RESFILES) >make.pr.out 2>&1
@$(PRINT) $(RESFILES)
opr:
make pr | opr
clean:
-rm -f *.old $(RESFILES) *.t
-rm -f *.old $(RESFILES) *.t *.out LLgen.doc top.doc \
occam.doc ego.doc

View File

@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
.\" $Header$
.nr LL 7.5i
.tr ~
.nr PD 1v
.tr ~
.TL
Ack Description File
.br
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Reference Manual
.AU
Ed Keizer
.AI
Wiskundig Seminarium
Vakgroep Informatica
Vrije Universiteit
Amsterdam
.NH
@@ -24,16 +23,16 @@ source file.
Each transformation table entry tells which input suffixes are
allowed and what suffix/name the output file has.
When the output file does not already satisfy the request of the
user, with the flag \fB-c.suffix\fP, the table is scanned
user, with the flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP, the table is scanned
starting with the next transformation in the table for another
transformation that has as input suffix the output suffix of
the previous transformation.
A few special transformations are recognized, among them is the
combiner.
A program combining several files into one.
When no stop suffix was specified (flag \fB-c.suffix\fP) \fIack\fP
stops after executing the combiner with as arguments the -
possibly transformed - input files and libraries.
combiner, which is
a program combining several files into one.
When no stop suffix was specified (flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP) \fIack\fP
stops after executing the combiner with as arguments the \-
possibly transformed \- input files and libraries.
\fIAck\fP will only perform the transformations in the order in
which they are presented in the table.
.LP
@@ -60,7 +59,7 @@ convoluted.
First, when the last filename in the program call name is not
one of \fIack\fP, \fIcc\fP, \fIacc\fP, \fIpc\fP or \fIapc\fP,
this filename is used as the backend description name.
Second, when the \fB-m\fP is present the \fB-m\fP is chopped of this
Second, when the \fB\-m\fP is present the \fB\-m\fP is chopped of this
flag and the rest is used as the backend description name.
Third, when both failed the shell environment variable ACKM is
used.
@@ -75,7 +74,8 @@ This descriptions are simply files read in at compile time.
At the moment of writing this document, the descriptions
included are: pdp, fe, i86, m68k2, vax2 and int.
The name of a description is first searched for internally,
then in the directory lib/ack and finally in the current
then in lib/descr/\fIname\fP, then in
lib/\fIname\fP/descr, band finally in the current
directory of the user.
.NH
Using the description file
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Syntax: (\fIsuffix sequence\fP:\fIsuffix sequence\fP=\fItext\fP)
.br
Example: (.c.p.e:.e=tail_em)
.br
If the two suffix sequences have a common member -~\&.e in this
case~- the text is produced.
If the two suffix sequences have a common member \-~\&.e in this
case~\- the text is produced.
When no common member is present the empty string is produced.
Thus the example given is a constant expression.
Normally, one of the suffix sequences is produced by variable
@@ -134,17 +134,17 @@ the text following the \fIneed\fP is appended to both the HEAD and
TAIL variable.
The value of the variable RTS is determined by the first
transformation used with a \fIrts\fP property.
.LP
.IP
Two runtime flags have effect on the value of one or more of
these variables.
The flag \fB-.suffix\fP has the same effect on these three variables
The flag \fB\-.suffix\fP has the same effect on these three variables
as if a file with that \fBsuffix\fP was included in the argument list
and had to be translated.
The flag \fB-r.suffix\fP only has that effect on the TAIL
The flag \fB\-r.suffix\fP only has that effect on the TAIL
variable.
The program call names \fIacc\fP and \fIcc\fP have the effect
of an automatic \fB-.c\fB flag.
\fIApc\fP and \fIpc\fP have the effect of an automatic \fB-.p\fP flag.
of an automatic \fB\-.c\fP flag.
\fIApc\fP and \fIpc\fP have the effect of an automatic \fB\-.p\fP flag.
.IP "Line splitting"
.br
The string is transformed into a sequence of strings by replacing
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ of the line.
Three special two-characters sequences exist: \e#, \e\e and
\e<newline>.
Their effect is described under 'backslashing' above.
Each - nonempty - line starts with a keyword, possibly
Each \- nonempty \- line starts with a keyword, possibly
preceded by blank space.
The keyword can be followed by a further specification.
The two are separated by blank space.
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ The lines in between associate properties to a transformation
and may be presented in any order.
The identifier after the \fIname\fP keyword determines the name
of the transformation.
This name is used for debugging and by the \fB-R\fP flag.
This name is used for debugging and by the \fB\-R\fP flag.
The keywords are used to specify which input suffices are
recognized by that transformation,
the program to run, the arguments to be handed to that program
@@ -205,14 +205,13 @@ The possible keywords are:
.br
followed by a sequence of suffices.
Each file with one of these suffices is allowed as input file.
Preprocessor transformations, those with the \fBP\fP property
after the \fIprop\fP keyword, do not need the \fIfrom\fP
Preprocessor transformations do not need the \fIfrom\fP
keyword. All other transformations do.
.nr PD 0
.IP \fIto\fP
.br
followed by the suffix of the output file name or in the case of a
linker -~indicated by C option after the \fIprop\fP keyword~-
linker
the output file name.
.IP \fIprogram\fP
.br
@@ -235,9 +234,9 @@ assignment separated by blank space.
As soon as both description files are read, \fIack\fP looks
at all transformations in these files to find a match for the
flags given to \fIack\fP.
The flags \fB-m\fP, \fB-o\fP,
\fI-O\fP, \fB-r\fP, \fB-v\fP, \fB-g\fP, -\fB-c\fP, \fB-t\fP,
\fB-k\fP, \fB-R\fP and -\f-.\fP are specific to \fIack\fP and
The flags \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-o\fP,
\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-r\fP, \fB\-v\fP, \fB\-g\fP, \-\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-t\fP,
\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-R\fP and \-\fB\-.\fP are specific to \fIack\fP and
not handed down to any transformation.
The matching is performed in the order in which the entries
appear in the definition.
@@ -249,11 +248,11 @@ replaced by the characters matched by
the * in the expression.
The right hand part is also subject to variable replacement.
The variable will probably be used in the program arguments.
The \fB-l\fP flags are special,
The \fB\-l\fP flags are special,
the order in which they are presented to \fIack\fP must be
preserved.
The identifier LNAME is used in conjunction with the scanning of
\fB-l\fP flags.
\fB\-l\fP flags.
The value assigned to LNAME is used to replace the flag.
The example further on shows the use all this.
.IP \fIargs\fP
@@ -261,39 +260,51 @@ The example further on shows the use all this.
The keyword is followed by the program call arguments.
It is subject to backslashing, variable replacement, expression
replacement, line splitting and IO replacement.
The variables assigned to by \fImapflags\P will probably be
The variables assigned to by \fImapflags\fP will probably be
used here.
The flags not recognized by \fIack\fP or any of the transformations
are passed to the linker and inserted before all other arguments.
.IP \fIprop\fB
.IP \fIstdin\fP
.br
This -~optional~- keyword is followed by a sequence of options,
each option is indicated by one character
signifying a special property of the transformation.
This keyword indicates that the transformation reads from standard input.
.IP \fIstdout\fP
.br
This keyword indicates that the transformation writes on standard output.
.IP \fIoptimizer\fP
.br
This keyword indicates that this transformation is an optimizer.
.IP \fIlinker\fP
.br
This keyword indicates that this transformation is the linker.
.IP \fIcombiner\fP
.br
This keyword indicates that this transformation is a combiner. A combiner
is a program combining several files into one, but is not a linker.
An example of a combiner is the global optimizer.
.IP \fIprep\fP
.br
This \-~optional~\- keyword is followed an option indicating its relation
to the preprocessor.
The possible options are:
.DS X
< the input file will be read from standard input
> the output file will be written on standard output
p the input files must be preprocessed
m the input files must be preprocessed when starting with #
O this transformation is an optimizer and may be skipped
P this transformation is the preprocessor
C this transformation is the linker
always the input files must be preprocessed
cond the input files must be preprocessed when starting with #
is this transformation is the preprocessor
.DE
.IP \fIrts\fP
.br
This -~optional~- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
used to set the variable RTS, if it was not already set.
Thus the variable RTS is set by the first transformation
executed which such a property or as a result from \fIack\fP's program
call name (acc, cc, apc or pc) or by the \fB-.suffix\fP flag.
call name (acc, cc, apc or pc) or by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
.IP \fIneed\fP
.br
This -~optional~- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
concatenated to the NEEDS variable.
This is done once for every transformation used or indicated
by one of the program call names mentioned above or indicated
by the \fB-.suffix\fP flag.
by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
.br
.nr PD 1v
.NH
@@ -302,119 +313,118 @@ Conventions used in description files
\fIAck\fP reads two description files.
A few of the variables defined in the machine specific file
are used by the descriptions of the front-ends.
Other variables, set by \fack\fB, are of use to all
Other variables, set by \fIack\fP, are of use to all
transformations.
.PP
\fIAck\fP sets the variable EM to the home directory of the
Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
The variable SOURCE is set to the name of the argument that is currently
being massaged, this is usefull for debugging.
The variable SUFFIX is set to the suffix of the argument that is
currently being massaged.
.br
The variable M indicates the
directory in mach/{M}/lib/tail_..... and NAME is the string to
be defined by the preprocessor with -D{NAME}.
directory in lib/{M}/tail_..... and NAME is the string to
be defined by the preprocessor with \-D{NAME}.
The definitions of {w}, {s}, {l}, {d}, {f} and {p} indicate
EM_WSIZE, EM_SSIZE, EM_LSIZE, EM_DSIZE, EM_FSIZE and EM_PSIZE
respectively.
.br
The variable INCLUDES is used as the last argument to \fIcpp\fP,
it is currently used to add the directory {EM}/include to
The variable INCLUDES is used as the last argument to \fIcpp\fP.
It is used to add directories to
the list of directories containing #include files.
{EM}/include contains a few files used by the library routines
for part III from the
.UX
manual.
These routines are included in the kit.
.PP
The variables HEAD, TAIL and RTS are set by \fIack\fP and used
to compose the arguments for the linker.
.NH
Example
.sp 1
description for front-end
.PP
Description for front-end
.DS X
name cpp # the C-preprocessor
# no from, it's governed by the P property
to .i # result files have suffix i
program {EM}/lib/cpp # pathname of loadfile
mapflag -I* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -I* # grab -I.. -U.. and
mapflag -U* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -U* # -D.. to use as arguments
mapflag -D* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -D* # in the variable CPP_F
args {CPP_F?} {INCLUDES?} -D{NAME} -DEM_WSIZE={w} -DEM_PSIZE={p} \
-DEM_SSIZE={s} -DEM_LSIZE={l} -DEM_FSIZE={f} -DEM_DSIZE={d} <
# The arguments are: first the -[IUD]...
# then the include dir's for this machine
# then the NAME and size valeus finally
# followed by the input file name
prop >P # Output on stdout, is preprocessor
.ta 4n 40n
name cpp # the C-preprocessor
# no from, it's governed by the P property
to .i # result files have suffix i
program {EM}/lib/cpp # pathname of loadfile
mapflag \-I* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-I* # grab \-I.. \-U.. and
mapflag \-U* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-U* # \-D.. to use as arguments
mapflag \-D* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-D* # in the variable CPP_F
args {CPP_F?} {INCLUDES?} \-D{NAME} \-DEM_WSIZE={w} \-DEM_PSIZE={p} \e
\-DEM_SSIZE={s} \-DEM_LSIZE={l} \-DEM_FSIZE={f} \-DEM_DSIZE={d} <
# The arguments are: first the \-[IUD]...
# then the include dir's for this machine
# then the NAME and size valeus finally
# followed by the input file name
stdout # Output on stdout
prep is # Is preprocessor
end
name cem # the C-compiler proper
from .c # used for files with suffix .c
to .k # produces compact code files
program {EM}/lib/em_cem # pathname of loadfile
mapflag -p CEM_F={CEM_F?} -Xp # pass -p as -Xp to cem
mapflag -L CEM_F={CEM_F?} -l # pass -L as -l to cem
args -Vw{w}i{w}p{p}f{f}s{s}l{l}d{d} {CEM_F?}
# the arguments are the object sizes in
# the -V... flag and possibly -l and -Xp
prop <>p # input on stdin, output on stdout, use cpp
rts .c # use the C run-time system
need .c # use the C libraries
name cem # the C-compiler proper
from .c # used for files with suffix .c
to .k # produces compact code files
program {EM}/lib/em_cem # pathname of loadfile
mapflag \-p CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-Xp # pass \-p as \-Xp to cem
mapflag \-L CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-l # pass \-L as \-l to cem
args \-Vw{w}i{w}p{p}f{f}s{s}l{l}d{d} {CEM_F?}
# the arguments are the object sizes in
# the \-V... flag and possibly \-l and \-Xp
stdin # input from stdin
stdout # output on stdout
prep always # use cpp
rts .c # use the C run-time system
need .c # use the C libraries
end
name decode # make human readable files from compact code
from .k.m # accept files with suffix .k or .m
to .e # produce .e files
program {EM}/lib/em_decode # pathname of loadfile
args < # the input file name is the only argument
prop > # the output comes on stdout
name decode # make human readable files from compact code
from .k.m # accept files with suffix .k or .m
to .e # produce .e files
program {EM}/lib/em_decode # pathname of loadfile
args < # the input file name is the only argument
stdout # the output comes on stdout
end
.DE
.DS X
.ta 4n 40n
Example of a backend, in this case the EM assembler/loader.
var w=2 # wordsize 2
var p=2 # pointersize 2
var s=2 # short size 2
var l=4 # long size 4
var f=4 # float size 4
var d=8 # double size 8
var M=int # Unused in this example
var NAME=int22 # for cpp (NAME=int results in #define int 1)
var LIB=mach/int/lib/tail_ # part of file name for libraries
var RT=mach/int/lib/head_ # part of file name for run-time startoff
var SIZE_FLAG=-sm # default internal table size flag
var INCLUDES=-I{EM}/include # use {EM}/include for #include files
name asld # Assembler/loader
from .k.m.a # accepts compact code and archives
to e.out # output file name
program {EM}/lib/em_ass # load file pathname
mapflag -l* LNAME={EM}/{LIB}* # e.g. -ly becomes
# {EM}/mach/int/lib/tail_y
mapflag -+* ASS_F={ASS_F?} -+* # recognize -+ and --
mapflag --* ASS_F={ASS_F?} --*
mapflag -s* SIZE_FLAG=-s* # overwrite old value of SIZE_FLAG
args {SIZE_FLAG} \
({RTS}:.c={EM}/{RT}cc) ({RTS}:.p={EM}/{RT}pc) -o > < \
(.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}pc) \
(.c:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}cc.1s {EM}/{LIB}cc.2g) \
(.c.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}mon)
# -s[sml] must be first argument
# the next line contains the choice for head_cc or head_pc
# and the specification of in- and output.
# the last three args lines choose libraries
prop C # This is the final stage
var w=2 # wordsize 2
var p=2 # pointersize 2
var s=2 # short size 2
var l=4 # long size 4
var f=4 # float size 4
var d=8 # dou<6F><75>XY<17>H<EFBFBD>\<5C>و<19>[H<1B>e startoff
var SIZE_FLAG=\-sm # default internal table size flag
var INCLUDES=\-I{EM}/include # use {EM}/include for #include files
name asld # Assembler/loader
from .k.m.a # accepts compact code and archives
to e.out # output file name
program {EM}/lib/em_ass # load file pathname
mapflag \-l* LNAME={EM}/{LIB}* # e.g. \-ly becomes
# {EM}/mach/int/lib/tail_y
mapflag \-+* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-+* # recognize \-+ and \-\-
mapflag \-\-* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-\-*
mapflag \-s* SIZE_FLAG=\-s* # overwrite old value of SIZE_FLAG
args {SIZE_FLAG} \e
({RTS}:.c={EM}/{RT}cc) ({RTS}:.p={EM}/{RT}pc) \-o > < \e
(.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}pc) \e
(.c:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}cc.1s {EM}/{LIB}cc.2g) \e
(.c.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}mon)
# \-s[sml] must be first argument
# the next line contains the choice for head_cc or head_pc
# and the specification of in- and output.
# the last three args lines choose libraries
linker
end
.DE
The command "ack -mint -v -v -I../h -L -ly prog.c"
would result in the following
The command \fIack \-mint \-v \-v \-I../h \-L \-ly prog.c\fP
would result in the following
calls (with exec(II)):
.DS X
1) /lib/cpp -I../h -I/usr/em/include -Dint22 -DEM_WSIZE=2 -DEM_PSIZE=2
-DEM_SSIZE=2 -DEM_LSIZE=4 -DEM_FSIZE=4 -DEM_DSIZE=8 prog.c
2) /usr/em/lib/em_cem -Vw2i2p2f4s2l4d8 -l
3) /usr/em/lib/em_ass -sm /usr/em/mach/int/lib/head_cc -o e.out prog.k
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_y /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.1s
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.2g /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_mon
.ta 4n
1) /lib/cpp \-I../h \-I/usr/em/include \-Dint22 \-DEM_WSIZE=2 \-DEM_PSIZE=2 \e
\-DEM_SSIZE=2 \-DEM_LSIZE=4 \-DEM_FSIZE=4 \-DEM_DSIZE=8 prog.c
2) /usr/em/lib/em_cem \-Vw2i2p2f4s2l4d8 \-l
3) /usr/em/lib/em_ass \-sm /usr/em/mach/int/lib/head_cc \-o e.out prog.k
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_y /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.1s
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.2g /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_mon
.DE

View File

@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
.\" $Header$
.RP
.ND Nov 1984
.TL
The table driven code generator from
.br
@@ -17,6 +18,11 @@ The Amsterdam Compiler Kit is such a collection of tools.
This document provides a description of the internal workings
of the table driven code generator in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
and a description of syntax and semantics of the driving table.
.PP
>>> NOTE <<<
.br
This document pertains to the \fBold\fP code generator. Refer to the
"Second Revised Edition" for the new code generator.
.AE
.NH 1
Introduction
@@ -197,10 +203,10 @@ This is given as
.DS
FORMAT = string
.DE
The default for string is "%d" or "%ld" depending on the wordsize of
the machine. For example on the PDP 11 one can use
The default for string is "%ld".
For example on the PDP 11 one can use
.DS
FORMAT= "0%o"
FORMAT= "0%lo"
.DE
to satisfy the old UNIX assembler that reads octal unless followed by
a period, and the ACK assembler that follows C conventions.
@@ -974,7 +980,7 @@ and their range depends on the machine at hand.
The type 'int' is used for things like labelcounters that won't require
more than 16 bits precision.
The type 'word' is used among others to assemble datawords and
is of type 'long' if EM_WSIZE>2.
is of type 'long'.
The type 'full' is used for addresses and is of type 'long' if
EM_WSIZE>2 or EM_PSIZE>2.
.PP
@@ -1115,13 +1121,13 @@ Example mach.h for the PDP-11
#define cst_fmt "$%d."
#define off_fmt "%d."
#define ilb_fmt "I%02x%x"
#define ilb_fmt "I%x_%x"
#define dlb_fmt "_%d"
#define hol_fmt "hol%d"
#define hol_off "%d.+hol%d"
#define hol_off "%ld.+hol%d"
#define con_cst(x) fprintf(codefile,"%d.\en",x)
#define con_cst(x) fprintf(codefile,"%ld.\en",x)
#define con_ilb(x) fprintf(codefile,"%s\en",x)
#define con_dlb(x) fprintf(codefile,"%s\en",x)

View File

@@ -1,324 +0,0 @@
.\" $Header$
.ll 72
.nr ID 4
.de hd
'sp 2
'tl ''-%-''
'sp 3
..
.de fo
'bp
..
.tr ~
. TITLE
.de TL
.sp 15
.ce
\\fB\\$1\\fR
..
. AUTHOR
.de AU
.sp 15
.ce
by
.sp 2
.ce
\\$1
..
. DATE
.de DA
.sp 3
.ce
( Dated \\$1 )
..
. INSTITUTE
.de VU
.sp 3
.ce 4
Wiskundig Seminarium
Vrije Universteit
De Boelelaan 1081
Amsterdam
..
. PARAGRAPH
.de PP
.sp
.ti +\n(ID
..
.nr CH 0 1
. CHAPTER
.de CH
.nr SH 0 1
.bp
.in 0
\\fB\\n+(CH.~\\$1\\fR
.PP
..
. SUBCHAPTER
.de SH
.sp 3
.in 0
\\fB\\n(CH.\\n+(SH.~\\$1\\fR
.PP
..
. INDENT START
.de IS
.sp
.in +\n(ID
..
. INDENT END
.de IE
.in -\n(ID
.sp
..
.de PT
.ti -\n(ID
.ta \n(ID
.fc " @
"\\$1@"\c
.fc
..
. DOUBLE INDENT START
.de DS
.sp
.in +\n(ID
.ll -\n(ID
..
. DOUBLE INDENT END
.de DE
.ll +\n(ID
.in -\n(ID
.sp
..
. EQUATION START
.de EQ
.sp
.nf
..
. EQUATION END
.de EN
.fi
.sp
..
. ITEM
.de IT
.sp
.in 0
\\fB~\\$1\\fR
.ti +5
..
.de CS
.br
~-~\\
..
.br
.fi
.TL "Ack-C reference manual"
.AU "Ed Keizer"
.DA "September 12, 1983"
.VU
.wh 0 hd
.wh 60 fo
.CH "Introduction"
The C frontend included in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit
translates UNIX-V7 C into compact EM code [1].
The language accepted is described in [2] and [3].
This document describes which implementation dependent choices were
made in the Ack-C frontend and
some restrictions and additions.
.CH "The language"
.PP
Under the same heading as used in [2] we describe the
properties of the Ack-C frontend.
.IT "2.2 Identifiers"
External identifiers are unique up to 7 characters and allow
both upper and lower case.
.IT "2.3 Keywords"
The word \fBvoid\fP is also reserved as a keyword.
.IT "2.4.3 Character constants"
The ASCII-mapping is used when a character is converted to an
integer.
.IT "2.4.4 Floating constants"
To prevent loss of precision the compiler does not perform
floating point constant folding.
.IT "2.6 Hardware characteristics"
The size of objects of the several arithmetic types and
pointers depend on the EM-implementation used.
The ranges of the arithmetic types depend on the size used,
the C-frontend assumes two's complement representation for the
integral types.
All sizes are multiples of bytes.
The calling program \fIack\fP[4] passes information about the
size of the types to the compiler proper.
.br
However, a few general remarks must be made:
.sp 1
.IS
.PT (a)
The size of pointers is a multiple of
(or equal to) the size of an \fIint\fP.
.PT (b)
The following relations exist for the sizes of the types
mentioned:
.br
.ti +5
\fIchar<=short<=int<=long\fP
.PT (c)
Objects of type \fIchar\fP use one 8-bit byte of storage,
although several bytes are allocated sometimes.
.PT (d)
All sizes are in multiples of bytes.
.PT (e)
Most EM implementations use 4 bytes for floats and 8 bytes
for doubles, but exceptions to this rule occur.
.IE
.IT "4 What's in a name"
The type \fIvoid\fP is added.
Objects of type void do not exist.
Functions declared as returning void, do not return a value at all.
.IT "6.1 Characters and integers"
Objects of type \fIchar\fP are unsigned and do not cause
sign-extension when converted to \fIint\fP.
The range of characters values is from 0 to 255.
.IT "6.3 Floating and integral"
Floating point numbers are truncated towards zero when
converted to the integral types.
.IT "6.4 Pointers and integers"
When a \fIlong\fP is added to or subtracted from a pointer and
longs are larger then pointers the \fIlong\fP is converted to an
\fIint\fP before the operation is performed.
.IT "7.2 Unary operators"
It is allowed to cast any expression to the type \fIvoid\fP.
.IT "8.2 Type specifiers"
One type is added to the type-specifiers:
.br
.IS
void
.IE
.IT "8.5 Structure and union declarations"
The only type allowed for fields is \fIint\fP.
Fields with exactly the size of \fIint\fP are signed,
all other fields are unsigned.
.br
The size of any single structure must be less then 4096 bytes.
.IT "8.6 Initialization"
Initialization of structures containing bit fields is not
allowed.
There is one restriction when using an 'address expression' to initialize
an integral variable.
The integral variable must have the same size as a pointer.
Conversions altering the size of the address expression are not allowed.
.IT "9.10 Return statement"
Return statements of the form:
.IS
return ;
.IE
are the only form of return statement allowed in a function of type
function returning void.
.IT "10.1 External function definitions"
The total amount for storage used for parameters
in any function must be less then 4096 bytes.
The same holds for the total amount of storage occupied by the
automatic variables declared inside any function.
.sp
Using formal parameters whose size is smaller the the size of an int
is less efficient on several machines.
At procedure entry these parameters are converted from integer to the
declared type, because the compiler doesn't know where the least
significant bytes are stored in the int.
.IT "11.2 Scope of externals"
Most C compilers are rather lax in enforcing the restriction
that only one external definition without the keyword
\fIextern\fP is allowed in a program.
The Ack-C frontend is very strict in this.
The only exception is that declarations of arrays with a
missing first array bounds expression are regarded to have an
explicit keyword \fIextern\fP.
.IT "14.4 Explicit pointer conversions"
Pointers may be larger the ints, thus assigning a pointer to an
int and back will not always result in the same pointer.
The process mentioned above works with integrals
of the same size or larger as pointers in all EM implementations
having such integrals.
When converting pointers to an integral type or vice-versa,
the pointers is seen as an unsigned int.
.br
EM guarantees that any object can be placed at a word boundary,
this allows the C-programs to use \fIint\fP pointers
as pointers to objects of any type not smaller than an \fIint\fP.
.CH "Frontend options"
The C-frontend has a few options, these are controlled
by flags:
.IS
.PT -V
This flag is followed by a sequence of letters each followed by
positive integers. Each letter indicates a
certain type, the integer following it specifies the size of
objects of that type. One letter indicates the wordsize used.
.IS
.sp 1
.TS
center tab(:);
l l16 l l.
letter:type:letter:type
w:wordsize:i:int
s:short:l:long
f:float:d:double
p:pointer::
.TE
.sp 1
All existing implementations use an integer size equal to the
wordsize.
.IE
The calling program \fIack\fP[4] provides the frontend with
this flag, with values depending on the machine used.
.sp 1
.PT -l
The frontend normally generates code to keep track of the line
number and source file name at runtime for debugging purposes.
Currently a pointer to a
string containing the filename is stored at a fixed place in
memory at each function
entry and the line number at the start of every expression.
At the return from a function these memory locations are not reset to
the values they had before the call.
Most library routines do not use this feature and thus do not
ruin the current line number and filename when called.
However, you are really unlucky when your program crashes due
to a bug in such a library function, because the line number
and filename do not indicate that something went wrong inside
the library function.
.br
Providing the flag -l to the frontend tells it not to generate
the code updating line number and file name.
This is, for example, used when translating the stdio library.
.br
When the \fIack\fP[4] is called with the -L flag it provides
the frontend with this flag.
.sp 1
.PT -Xp
When this flag is present the frontend generates a call to
the function \fBprocentry\fP at each function entry and a
call to \fBprocexit\fP at each function exit.
Both functions are provided with one parameter,
a pointer to a string containing the function name.
.br
When \fIack\fP is called with the -p flag it provides the
frontend with this flag.
.IE
.CH References
.IS
.PT [1]
A.S. Tanenbaum, Hans van Staveren, Ed Keizer and Johan
Stevenson \fIDescription of a machine architecture for use with
block structured languages\fP Informatica report IR-81.
.sp 1
.PT [2]
B.W. Kernighan and D.M. Ritchie, \fIThe C Programming
language\fP, Prentice-Hall, 1978
.PT [3]
D.M. Ritchie, \fIC Reference Manual\fP
.sp
.PT [4]
UNIX manual ack(I).

627
doc/crefman.doc Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,627 @@
.EQ
delim $$
.EN
.RP
.TL
ACK/CEM Compiler
.br
Reference Manual
.AU
Erik H. Baalbergen
.AI
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science
Vrije Universiteit
Amsterdam
The Netherlands
.AB no
.AE
.NH
C Language
.PP
This section discusses the extensions to and deviations from the C language,
as described in [1].
The issues are numbered according to the reference manual.
.SH
2.2 Identifiers
.PP
Upper and lower case letters are different.
The number of significant letters
is 32 by default, but may be set to another value using the \fB\-M\fP option.
The identifier length should be set according to the rest of the compilation
programs.
.SH
2.3 Keywords
.SH
\f5asm\fP
.PP
The keyword \f5asm\fP
is recognized.
However, the statement
.DS
.ft 5
asm(string);
.ft R
.DE
is skipped, while a warning is given.
.SH
\f5enum\fP
.PP
The \f5enum\fP keyword is recognized and interpreted.
.SH
\f5entry\fP, \f5fortran\fP
.PP
The words \f5entry\fP and \f5fortran\fP
are reserved under the restricted option.
The words are not interpreted by the compiler.
.SH
2.4.1 Integer Constants
.PP
An octal or hex constant which is less than or equal to the largest unsigned
(target) machine integer is taken to be \f5unsigned\fP.
An octal or hex constant which exceeds the largest unsigned (target) machine
integer is taken to be \f5long\fP.
.SH
2.4.3 Character Constants
.PP
A character constant is a sequence of 1 up to \f5sizeof(int)\fP characters
enclosed in single quotes.
The value of a character constant '$c sub 1 c sub 2 ... c sub n$'
is $d sub n + M \(mu d sub {n - 1} + ... + M sup {n - 1} \(mu d sub 2 + M sup n \(mu d sub 1$,
where M is 1 + maximum unsigned number representable in an \f5unsigned char\fP,
and $d sub i$ is the signed value (ASCII)
of character $c sub i$.
.SH
2.4.4 Floating Constants
.PP
The compiler does not support compile-time floating point arithmetic.
.SH
2.6 Hardware characteristics
.PP
The compiler is capable of producing EM code for machines with the following
properties
.IP \(bu
a \f5char\fP is 8 bits
.IP \(bu
the size of \f5int\fP is equal to the word size
.IP \(bu
the size of \f5short\fP may not exceed the size of \f5int\fP
.IP \(bu
the size of \f5int\fP may not exceed the size of \f5long\fP
.IP \(bu
the size of pointers is equal to the size of either \f5short\fP, \f5int\fP
or \f5long\fP
.LP
.SH
4 What's in a name?
.SH
\f5char\fP
.PP
Objects of type \f5char\fP are taken to be signed.
The combination \f5unsigned char\fP is legal.
.SH
\f5unsigned\fP
.PP
The type combinations \f5unsigned char\fP, \f5unsigned short\fP and
\f5unsigned long\fP are supported.
.SH
\f5enum\fP
.PP
The data type \f5enum\fP is implemented as described
in \fIRecent Changes to C\fP (see appendix A).
.I Cem
treats enumeration variables as if they were \f5int\fP.
.SH
\f5void\fP
.PP
Type \f5void\fP is implemented.
The type specifies an empty set of values, which takes no storage space.
.SH
\fRFundamental types\fP
.PP
The names of the fundamental types can be redefined by the user, using
\f5typedef\fP.
.SH
7 Expressions
.PP
The order of evaluation of expressions depends on the complexity of the
subexpressions.
In case of commutative operations, the most complex subexpression is
evaluated first.
Parameter lists are evaluated from right to left.
.SH
7.2 Unary operators
.PP
The type of a \f5sizeof\fP expression is \f5unsigned int\fP.
.SH
7.13 Conditional operator
.PP
Both the second and the third expression in a conditional expression may
include assignment operators.
They may be structs or unions.
.SH
7.14 Assignment operators
.PP
Structures may be assigned, passed as arguments to functions, and returned
by functions.
The types of operands taking part must be the same.
.SH
8.2 Type specifiers
.PP
The combinations \f5unsigned char\fP, \f5unsigned short\fP
and \f5unsigned long\fP are implemented.
.SH
8.5 Structure and union declarations
.PP
Fields of any integral type, either signed or unsigned,
are supported, as long as the type fits in a word on the target machine.
.PP
Fields are left adjusted by default; the first field is put into the left
part of a word, the next one on the right side of the first one, etc.
The \f5-Vr\fP option in the call of the compiler
causes fields to be right adjusted within a machine word.
.PP
The tags of structs and unions occupy a different name space from that of
variables and that of member names.
.SH
9.7 Switch statement
.PP
The type of \fIexpression\fP in
.DS
.ft 5
\f5switch (\fP\fIexpression\fP\f5)\fP \fIstatement\fP
.ft
.DE
must be integral.
A warning is given under the restricted option if the type is \f5long\fP.
.SH
10 External definitions
.PP
See [4] for a discussion on this complicated issue.
.SH
10.1 External function definitions
.PP
Structures may be passed as arguments to functions, and returned
by functions.
.SH
11.1 Lexical scope
.PP
Typedef names may be redeclared like any other variable name; the ice mentioned
in \(sc11.1 is walked correctly.
.SH
12 Compiler control lines
.PP
Lines which do not occur within comment, and with \f5#\fP as first
character, are interpreted as compiler control line.
There may be an arbitrary number of spaces, tabs and comments (collectively
referred as \fIwhite space\fP) following the \f5#\fP.
Comments may contain newline characters.
Control lines with only white space between the \f5#\fP and the line separator
are skipped.
.PP
The #\f5include\fP, #\f5ifdef\fP, #\f5ifndef\fP, #\f5undef\fP, #\f5else\fP and
#\f5endif\fP control lines and line directives consist of a fixed number of
arguments.
The list of arguments may be followed an arbitrary sequence of characters,
in which comment is interpreted as such.
(I.e., the text between \f5/*\fP and \f5*/\fP is skipped, regardless of
newlines; note that commented-out lines beginning with \f5#\fP are not
considered to be control lines.)
.SH
12.1 Token replacement
.PP
The replacement text of macros is taken to be a string of characters, in which
an identifier may stand for a formal parameter, and in which comment is
interpreted as such.
Comments and newline characters, preceeded by a backslash, in the replacement
text are replaced by a space character.
.PP
The actual parameters of a macro are considered tokens and are
balanced with regard to \f5()\fP, \f5{}\fP and \f5[]\fP.
This prevents the use of macros like
.DS
.ft 5
CTL([)
.ft
.DE
.PP
Formal parameters of a macro must have unique names within the formal-parameter
list of that macro.
.PP
A message is given at the definition of a macro if the macro has
already been #\f5defined\fP, while the number of formal parameters differ or
the replacement texts are not equal (apart from leading and trailing
white space).
.PP
Recursive use of macros is detected by the compiler.
.PP
Standard #\f5defined\fP macros are
.DS
\f5__FILE__\fP name of current input file as string constant
\f5__DATE__\fP curent date as string constant; e.g. \f5"Tue Wed 2 14:45:23 1986"\fP
\f5__LINE__\fP current line number as an integer
.DE
.PP
No message is given if \fIidentifier\fP is not known in
.DS
.ft 5
#undef \fIidentifier\fP
.ft
.DE
.SH
12.2 File inclusion
.PP
A newline character is appended to each file which is included.
.SH
12.3 Conditional compilation
.PP
The #\f5if\fP, #\f5ifdef\fP and #\f5ifndef\fP control lines may be followed
by an arbitrary number of
.DS
.ft 5
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
.ft
.DE
control lines, before the corresponding #\f5else\fP or #\f5endif\fP
is encountered.
The construct
.DS
.ft 5
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
some text
#endif /* corresponding to #elif */
.ft
.DE
is equivalent to
.DS
.ft 5
#else
#if \fIconstant-expression\fP
some text
#endif /* corresponding to #if */
#endif /* corresponding to #else */
.ft
.DE
.PP
The \fIconstant-expression\fP in #\f5if\fP and #\f5elif\fP control lines
may contain the construction
.DS
.ft 5
defined(\fIidentifier\fP)
.ft
.DE
which is replaced by \f51\fP, if \fIidentifier\fP has been #\f5defined\fP,
and by \f50\fP, if not.
.PP
Comments in skipped lines are interpreted as such.
.SH
12.4 Line control
.PP
Line directives may occur in the following forms:
.DS
.ft 5
#line \fIconstant\fP
#line \fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
#\fIconstant\fP
#\fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
.ft
.DE
Note that \fIfilename\fP is enclosed in double quotes.
.SH
14.2 Functions
.PP
If a pointer to a function is called, the function the pointer points to
is called instead.
.SH
15 Constant expressions
.PP
The compiler distinguishes the following types of integral constant expressions
.IP \(bu
field-width specifier
.IP \(bu
case-entry specifier
.IP \(bu
array-size specifier
.IP \(bu
global variable initialization value
.IP \(bu
enum-value specifier
.IP \(bu
truth value in \f5#if\fP control line
.LP
.PP
Constant integral expressions are compile-time evaluated while an effort
is made to report overflow.
Constant floating expressions are not compile-time evaluated.
.NH
Compiler flags
.IP \fB\-C\fR
Run the preprocessor stand-alone while maintaining the comments.
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP=\fIstring-of-characters\fP
.br
Define \fIname\fR as macro with \fIstring-of-characters\fR as
replacement text.
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP
.br
Equal to \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP\fB=1\fP.
.IP \fB\-E\fP
Run the preprocessor stand alone, i.e.,
list the sequence of input tokens and delete any comments.
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
.IP \fB\-I\fIpath\fR
.br
Prepend \fIpath\fR to the list of include directories.
To put the directories "include", "sys/h" and "util/h" into the
include directory list in that order, the user has to specify
.DS
.ft 5
-Iinclude -Isys/h -Iutil/h
.ft R
.DE
An empty \fIpath\fP causes the standard include
directory (usually \f5/usr/include\fP) to be forgotten.
.IP \fB\-M\fP\fIn\fP
.br
Set maximum significant identifier length to \fIn\fP.
.IP \fB\-n\fP
Suppress EM register messages.
The user-declared variables are not stored into registers on the target
machine.
.IP \fB\-p\fP
Generate the EM \fBfil\fP and \fBlin\fP instructions in order to enable
an interpreter to keep track of the current location in the source code.
.IP \fB\-P\fP
Equivalent with \fB\-E\fP, but without line directives.
.IP \fB\-R\fP
Interpret the input as restricted C (according to the language as
described in [1]).
.IP \fB\-T\fP\fIpath\fP
.br
Create temporary files, if necessary, in directory \fIpath\fP.
.IP \fB\-U\fP\fIname\fP
.br
Get rid of the compiler-predefined macro \fIname\fP, i.e.,
consider
.DS
.ft 5
#undef \fIname\fP
.ft R
.DE
to appear in the beginning of the file.
.IP \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIn\fR,\ \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIncm\fR.\fIn\fR\ ...
.br
Set the size and alignment requirements.
The letter \fIc\fR indicates the simple type, which is one of
\fBs\fR(short), \fBi\fR(int), \fBl\fR(long), \fBf\fR(float), \fBd\fR(double)
or \fBp\fR(pointer).
If \fIc\fR is \fBS\fP or \fBU\fP, then \fIn\fP is taken to be the initial
alignment of structs or unions, respectively.
The effective alignment of a struct or union is the least common multiple
of the initial struct/union alignment and the alignments of its members.
The \fIm\fR parameter can be used to specify the length of the type (in bytes)
and the \fIn\fR parameter for the alignment of that type.
Absence of \fIm\fR or \fIn\fR causes the default value to be retained.
To specify that the bitfields should be right adjusted instead of the
default left adjustment, specify \fBr\fR as \fIc\fR parameter.
.IP \fB\-w\fR
Suppress warning messages
.IP \fB\-\-\fIcharacter\fR
.br
Set debug-flag \fIcharacter\fP.
This enables some special features offered by a debug and develop version of
the compiler.
Some particular flags may be recognized, others may have surprising effects.
.RS
.IP \fBd\fP
Generate a dependency graph, reflecting the calling structure of functions.
Lines of the form
.DS
.ft 5
DFA: \fIcalling-function\fP: \fIcalled-function\fP
.ft
.DE
are generated whenever a function call is encountered.
.IP \fBf\fP
Dump whole identifier table, including macros and reserved words.
.IP \fBh\fP
Supply hash-table statistics.
.IP \fBi\fP
Print names of included files.
.IP \fBm\fP
Supply statistics concerning the memory allocation.
.IP \fBt\fP
Dump table of identifiers.
.IP \fBu\fP
Generate extra statistics concerning the predefined types and identifiers.
Works in combination with \fBf\fP or \fBt\fP.
.IP \fBx\fP
Print expression trees in human-readable format.
.RE
.LP
.SH
References
.IP [1]
Brian W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie,
.I
The C Programming Language
.R
.IP [2]
L. Rosler,
.I
Draft Proposed Standard - Programming Language C,
.R
ANSI X3J11 Language Subcommittee
.IP [3]
Erik H. Baalbergen, Dick Grune, Maarten Waage,
.I
The CEM Compiler,
.R
Informatica Manual IM-4, Dept. of Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije
Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands
.IP [4]
Erik H. Baalbergen,
.I
Modeling global declarations in C,
.R
internal paper
.LP
.bp
.SH
Appendix A - Enumeration Type
.PP
The syntax is
.sp
.RS
.I enum-specifier :
.RS
\&\f5enum\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
.br
\&\f5enum\fP \fIidentifier\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
.br
\&\f5enum\fP \fIidentifier\fP
.RE
.sp
\&\fIenum-list\fP :
.RS
\&\fIenumerator\fP
.br
\&\fIenum-list\fP , \fIenumerator\fP
.RE
.sp
\&\fIenumerator\fP :
.RS
\&\fIidentifier\fP
.br
\&\fIidentifier\fP = \fIconstant-expression\fP
.RE
.sp
.RE
The identifier has the same role as the structure tag in a struct specification.
It names a particular enumeration type.
.PP
The identifiers in the enum-list are declared as constants, and may appear
whenever constants are required.
If no enumerators with
.B =
appear, then the values of the constants begin at 0 and increase by 1 as the
declaration is read from left to right.
An enumerator with
.B =
gives the associated identifier the value indicated; subsequent identifiers
continue the progression from the assigned value.
.PP
Enumeration tags and constants must all be distinct, and, unlike structure
tags and members, are drawn from the same set as ordinary identifiers.
.PP
Objects of a given enumeration type are regarded as having a type distinct
from objects of all other types.
.bp
.SH
Appendix B: C grammar in LL(1) form
.PP
The \fBbold-faced\fP and \fIitalicized\fP tokens represent terminal symbols.
.vs 16
.nf
\fBexternal definitions\fP
program: external-definition*
external-definition: ext-decl-specifiers [declarator [function | non-function] | '\fB;\fP'] | asm-statement
ext-decl-specifiers: decl-specifiers?
non-function: initializer? ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]* '\fB;\fP'
function: declaration* compound-statement
.sp 1
\fBdeclarations\fP
declaration: decl-specifiers init-declarator-list? '\fB;\fP'
decl-specifiers: other-specifier+ [single-type-specifier other-specifier*]? | single-type-specifier other-specifier*
other-specifier: \fBauto\fP | \fBstatic\fP | \fBextern\fP | \fBtypedef\fP | \fBregister\fP | \fBshort\fP | \fBlong\fP | \fBunsigned\fP
type-specifier: decl-specifiers
single-type-specifier: \fItype-identifier\fP | struct-or-union-specifier | enum-specifier
init-declarator-list: init-declarator ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]*
init-declarator: declarator initializer?
declarator: primary-declarator ['\fB(\fP' formal-list ? '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' declarator
primary-declarator: identifier | '\fB(\fP' declarator '\fB)\fP'
arrayer: '\fB[\fP' constant-expression? '\fB]\fP'
formal-list: formal ['\fB,\fP' formal]*
formal: identifier
enum-specifier: \fBenum\fP [enumerator-pack | identifier enumerator-pack?]
enumerator-pack: '\fB{\fP' enumerator ['\fB,\fP' enumerator]* '\fB,\fP'? '\fB}\fP'
enumerator: identifier ['\fB=\fP' constant-expression]?
struct-or-union-specifier: [ \fBstruct\fP | \fBunion\fP] [ struct-declaration-pack | identifier struct-declaration-pack?]
struct-declaration-pack: '\fB{\fP' struct-declaration+ '\fB}\fP'
struct-declaration: type-specifier struct-declarator-list '\fB;\fP'?
struct-declarator-list: struct-declarator ['\fB,\fP' struct-declarator]*
struct-declarator: declarator bit-expression? | bit-expression
bit-expression: '\fB:\fP' constant-expression
initializer: '\fB=\fP'? initial-value
cast: '\fB(\fP' type-specifier abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP'
abstract-declarator: primary-abstract-declarator ['\fB(\fP' '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' abstract-declarator
primary-abstract-declarator: ['\fB(\fP' abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP']?
.sp 1
\fBstatements\fP
statement:
expression-statement
| label '\fB:\fP' statement
| compound-statement
| if-statement
| while-statement
| do-statement
| for-statement
| switch-statement
| case-statement
| default-statement
| break-statement
| continue-statement
| return-statement
| jump
| '\fB;\fP'
| asm-statement
;
expression-statement: expression '\fB;\fP'
label: identifier
if-statement: \fBif\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement [\fBelse\fP statement]?
while-statement: \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
do-statement: \fBdo\fP statement \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
for-statement: \fBfor\fP '\fB(\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB)\fP' statement
switch-statement: \fBswitch\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
case-statement: \fBcase\fP constant-expression '\fB:\fP' statement
default-statement: \fBdefault\fP '\fB:\fP' statement
break-statement: \fBbreak\fP '\fB;\fP'
continue-statement: \fBcontinue\fP '\fB;\fP'
return-statement: \fBreturn\fP expression? '\fB;\fP'
jump: \fBgoto\fP identifier '\fB;\fP'
compound-statement: '\fB{\fP' declaration* statement* '\fB}\fP'
asm-statement: \fBasm\fP '\fB(\fP' \fIstring\fP '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
.sp 1
\fBexpressions\fP
initial-value: assignment-expression | initial-value-pack
initial-value-pack: '\fB{\fP' initial-value-list '\fB}\fP'
initial-value-list: initial-value ['\fB,\fP' initial-value]* '\fB,\fP'?
primary: \fIidentifier\fP | constant | \fIstring\fP | '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP'
secundary: primary [index-pack | parameter-pack | selection]*
index-pack: '\fB[\fP' expression '\fB]\fP'
parameter-pack: '\fB(\fP' parameter-list? '\fB)\fP'
selection: ['\fB.\fP' | '\fB\->\fP'] identifier
parameter-list: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
postfixed: secundary postop?
unary: cast unary | postfixed | unop unary | size-of
size-of: \fBsizeof\fP [cast | unary]
binary-expression: unary [binop binary-expression]*
conditional-expression: binary-expression ['\fB?\fP' expression '\fB:\fP' assignment-expression]?
assignment-expression: conditional-expression [asgnop assignment-expression]?
expression: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
unop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' | '\fB!\fP' | '\fB~ \fP' | '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
postop: '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
multop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB/\fP' | '\fB%\fP'
addop: '\fB+\fP' | '\fB\-\fP'
shiftop: '\fB<<\fP' | '\fB>>\fP'
relop: '\fB<\fP' | '\fB>\fP' | '\fB<=\fP' | '\fB>=\fP'
eqop: '\fB==\fP' | '\fB!=\fP'
arithop: multop | addop | shiftop | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' | '\fB|\fP'
binop: arithop | relop | eqop | '\fB&&\fP' | '\fB||\fP'
asgnop: '\fB=\fP' | '\fB+\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB*\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB/\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB%\fP' '\fB=\fP'
| '\fB<<\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB>>\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB&\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB|\fP' '\fB=\fP'
| '\fB+=\fP' | '\fB\-=\fP' | '\fB*=\fP' | '\fB/=\fP' | '\fB%=\fP'
| '\fB<<=\fP' | '\fB>>=\fP' | '\fB&=\fP' | '\fB^=\fP' | '\fB|=\fP'
constant: \fIinteger\fP | \fIfloating\fP
constant-expression: assignment-expression
identifier: \fIidentifier\fP | \fItype-identifier\fP
.fi

18
doc/ego/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
Makefile
bo
ca
cf
cj
cs
ic
il
intro
lv
ov
ra
refs.gen
refs.opt
refs.stat
sp
sr
ud

52
doc/ego/Makefile Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
REFS=-p refs.opt -p refs.stat -p refs.gen
INTRO=intro/intro?
OV=ov/ov?
IC=ic/ic?
CF=cf/cf?
IL=il/il?
SR=sr/sr?
CS=cs/cs?
SP=sp/sp?
UD=ud/ud?
LV=lv/lv?
CJ=cj/cj?
BO=bo/bo?
RA=ra/ra?
CA=ca/ca?
EGO=$(INTRO) $(OV) $(IC) $(CF) $(IL) $(SR) $(CS) $(SP) $(CJ) $(BO) \
$(UD) $(LV) $(RA) $(CA)
REFER=refer
../ego.doc: $(EGO)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail > ../ego.doc
ego.f: $(EGO)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ego.f
intro.f: $(INTRO)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ov/head $(INTRO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > intro.f
ov.f: $(OV)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ov/head $(OV) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ov.f
ic.f: $(IC)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ic/head $(IC) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ic.f
cf.f: $(CF)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cf/head $(CF) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cf.f
il.f: $(IL)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) il/head $(IL) intro/tail | nroff -ms > il.f
sr.f: $(SR)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) sr/head $(SR) intro/tail | nroff -ms > sr.f
cs.f: $(CS)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cs/head $(CS) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cs.f
sp.f: $(SP)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) sp/head $(SP) intro/tail | nroff -ms > sp.f
cj.f: $(CJ)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cj/head $(CJ) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cj.f
bo.f: $(BO)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) bo/head $(BO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > bo.f
ud.f: $(UD)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ud/head $(UD) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ud.f
lv.f: $(LV)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) lv/head $(LV) intro/tail | nroff -ms > lv.f
ra.f: $(RA)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ra/head $(RA) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ra.f
ca.f: $(CA)
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ca/head $(CA) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ca.f

1
doc/ego/bo/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
bo1

151
doc/ego/bo/bo1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Branch Optimization
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The Branch Optimization phase (BO) performs two related
(branch) optimizations.
.NH 3
Fusion of basic blocks
.PP
If two basic blocks B1 and B2 have the following properties:
.DS
SUCC(B1) = {B2}
PRED(B2) = {B1}
.DE
then B1 and B2 can be combined into one basic block.
If B1 ends in an unconditional jump to the beginning of B2, this
jump can be eliminated,
hence saving a little execution time and object code size.
This technique can be used to eliminate some deficiencies
introduced by the front ends (for example, the "C" front end
translates switch statements inefficiently due to its one pass nature).
.NH 3
While-loop optimization
.PP
The straightforward way to translate a while loop is to
put the test for loop termination at the beginning of the loop.
.DS
while cond loop LAB1: Test cond
body of the loop ---> Branch On False To LAB2
end loop code for body of loop
Branch To LAB1
LAB2:
Fig. 10.1 Example of Branch Optimization
.DE
If the condition fails at the Nth iteration, the following code
gets executed (dynamically):
.DS
N * conditional branch (which fails N-1 times)
N-1 * unconditional branch
N-1 * body of the loop
.DE
An alternative translation is:
.DS
Branch To LAB2
LAB1:
code for body of loop
LAB2:
Test cond
Branch On True To LAB1
.DE
This translation results in the following profile:
.DS
N * conditional branch (which succeeds N-1 times)
1 * unconditional branch
N-1 * body of the loop
.DE
So the second translation will be significantly faster if N >> 2.
If N=2, execution time will be slightly increased.
On the average, the program will be speeded up.
Note that the code sizes of the two translations will be the same.
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
The basic block fusion technique is implemented
by traversing the control flow graph of a procedure,
looking for basic blocks B with only one successor (S).
If one is found, it is checked if S has only one predecessor
(which has to be B).
If so, the two basic blocks can in principle be combined.
However, as one basic block will have to be moved,
the textual order of the basic blocks will be altered.
This reordering causes severe problems in the presence
of conditional jumps.
For example, if S ends in a conditional branch,
the basic block that comes textually next to S must stay
in that position.
So the transformation in Fig. 10.2 is illegal.
.DS
LAB1: S1 LAB1: S1
BRA LAB2 S2
... --> BEQ LAB3
LAB2: S2 ...
BEQ LAB3 S3
S3
Fig. 10.2 An illegal transformation of Branch Optimization
.DE
If B is moved towards S the same problem occurs if the block before B
ends in a conditional jump.
The problem could be solved by adding one extra branch,
but this would reduce the gains of the optimization to zero.
Hence the optimization will only be done if the block that
follows S (in the textual order) is not a successor of S.
This condition assures that S does not end in a conditional branch.
The condition always holds for the code generated by the "C"
front end for a switch statement.
.PP
After the transformation has been performed,
some attributes of the basic blocks involved (such as successor and
predecessor sets and immediate dominator) must be recomputed.
.PP
The while-loop technique is applied to one loop at a time.
The list of basic blocks of the loop is traversed to find
a block B that satisfies the following conditions:
.IP 1.
the textually next block to B is not part of the loop
.IP 2.
the last instruction of B is an unconditional branch;
hence B has only one successor, say S
.IP 3.
the textually next block of B is a successor of S
.IP 4.
the last instruction of S is a conditional branch
.LP
If such a block B is found, the control flow graph is changed
as depicted in Fig. 10.3.
.DS
| |
| v
v |
|-----<------| ----->-----|
____|____ | |
| | | |-------| |
| S1 | | | v |
| Bcc | | | .... |
|--| | | | |
| --------- | | ----|---- |
| | | | | |
| .... ^ | | S2 | |
| | | | | |
| --------- | | | | |
v | | | ^ --------- |
| | S2 | | | | |
| | BRA | | | |-----<-----
| | | | | v
| --------- | | ____|____
| | | | | |
| ------>------ | | S1 |
| | | Bnn |
|-------| | | |
| | ----|----
v | |
|----<--|
|
v
Fig. 10.3 Transformation of the CFG by Branch Optimization
.DE

1
doc/ego/ca/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
ca1

75
doc/ego/ca/ca1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Compact assembly generation
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The "Compact Assembly generation phase" (CA) transforms the
intermediate code of the optimizer into EM code in
Compact Assembly Language (CAL) format.
In the intermediate code, all program entities
(such as procedures, labels, global variables)
are denoted by a unique identifying number (see 3.5).
In the CAL output of the optimizer these numbers have to
be replaced by normal identifiers (strings).
The original identifiers of the input program are used whenever possible.
Recall that the IC phase generates two files that can be
used to map unique identifying numbers to procedure names and
global variable names.
For instruction labels CA always generates new names.
The reasons for doing so are:
.IP -
instruction labels are only visible inside one procedure, so they can
not be referenced in other modules
.IP -
the names are not very suggestive anyway, as they must be integer numbers
.IP -
the optimizer considerably changes the control structure of the program,
so there is really no one to one mapping of instruction labels in
the input and the output program.
.LP
As the optimizer combines all input modules into one module,
visibility problems may occur.
Two modules M1 and M2 can both define an identifier X (provided that
X is not externally visible in any of these modules).
If M1 and M2 are combined into one module M, two distinct
entities with the same name would exist in M, which
is not allowed.
.[~[
tanenbaum machine architecture
.], section 11.1.4.3]
In these cases, CA invents a new unique name for one of the entities.
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
CA first reads the files containing the procedure and global variable names
and stores the names in two tables.
It scans these tables to make sure that all names are different.
Subsequently it reads the EM text, one procedure at a time,
and outputs it in CAL format.
The major part of the code that does the latter transformation
is adapted from the EM Peephole Optimizer.
.PP
The main problem of the implementation of CA is to
assure that the visibility rules are obeyed.
If an identifier must be externally visible (i.e.
it was externally visible in the input program)
and the identifier is defined (in the output program) before
being referenced,
an EXA or EXP pseudo must be generated for it.
(Note that the optimizer may change the order of definitions and
references, so some pseudos may be needed that were not
present in the input program).
On the other hand, an identifier may be only internally visible.
If such an identifier is referenced before being defined,
an INA or INP pseudo must be emitted prior to its first reference.
.UH
Acknowledgements
.PP
The author would like to thank Andy Tanenbaum for his guidance,
Duk Bekema for implementing the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
and writing the initial documentation of that phase,
Dick Grune for reading the manuscript of this report
and Ceriel Jacobs, Ed Keizer, Martin Kersten, Hans van Staveren
and the members of the S.T.W. user's group for their
interest and assistance.

6
doc/ego/cf/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
cf1
cf2
cf3
cf4
cf5
cf6

94
doc/ego/cf/cf1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
.bp
.NH
The Control Flow Phase
.PP
In the previous chapter we described the intermediate
code of the global optimizer.
We also specified which part of this code
was constructed by the IC phase of the optimizer.
The Control Flow Phase (\fICF\fR) does
the remainder of the job,
i.e. it determines:
.IP -
the control flow graphs
.IP -
the loop tables
.IP -
the calling, change and use attributes of
the procedure table entries
.LP
CF operates on one procedure at a time.
For every procedure it first reads the EM instructions
from the EM-text file and groups them into basic blocks.
For every basic block, its successors and
predecessors are determined,
resulting in the control flow graph.
Next, the immediate dominator of every basic block
is computed.
Using these dominators, any loop in the
procedure is detected.
Finally, interprocedural analysis is done,
after which we will know the global effects of
every procedure call on its environment.
.sp
CF uses the same internal data structures
for the procedure table and object table as IC.
.NH 2
Partitioning into basic blocks
.PP
With regard to flow of control, we distinguish
three kinds of EM instructions:
jump instructions, instruction label definitions and
normal instructions.
Jump instructions are all conditional or unconditional
branch instructions,
the case instructions (CSA/CSB)
and the RET (return) instruction.
A procedure call (CAL) is not considered to be a jump.
A defining occurrence of an instruction label
is regarded as an EM instruction.
.PP
An instruction starts
a new basic block, in any of the following cases:
.IP 1.
It is the first instruction of a procedure
.IP 2.
It is the first of a list of instruction label
defining occurrences
.IP 3.
It follows a jump
.LP
If there are several consecutive instruction labels
(which is highly unusual),
all of them are put in the same basic block.
Note that several cases may overlap,
e.g. a label definition at the beginning of a procedure
or a label following a jump.
.PP
A simple Finite State Machine is used to model
the above rules.
It also recognizes the end of a procedure,
marked by an END pseudo.
The basic blocks are stored internally as a doubly linked
linear list.
The blocks are linked in textual order.
Every node of this list has the attributes described
in the previous chapter (see syntax rule for
basic_block).
Furthermore, every node contains a pointer to its
EM instructions,
which are represented internally
as a linear, doubly linked list,
just as in the IC phase.
However, instead of one list per procedure (as in IC)
there is now one list per basic block.
.PP
On the fly, a table is build that maps
every label identifier to the label definition
instruction.
This table is used for computing the control flow.
The table is stored as a dynamically allocated array.
The length of the array is the number of labels
of the current procedure;
this value can be found in the procedure table,
where it was stored by IC.

50
doc/ego/cf/cf2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
.NH 2
Control Flow
.PP
A \fIsuccessor\fR of a basic block B is a block C
that can be executed immediately after B.
C is said to be a \fIpredecessor\fR of B.
A block ending with a RET instruction
has no successors.
Such a block is called a \fIreturn block\fR.
Any block that has no predecessors cannot be
executed at all (i.e. it is unreachable),
unless it is the first block of a procedure,
called the \fIprocedure entry block\fR.
.PP
Internally, the successor and predecessor
attributes of a basic block are stored as \fIsets\fR.
Alternatively, one may regard all these
sets of all basic blocks as a conceptual \fIgraph\fR,
in which there is an edge from B to C if C
is in the successor set of B.
We call this conceptual graph
the \fIControl Flow Graph\fR.
.PP
The only successor of a basic block ending on an
unconditional branch instruction is the block that
contains the label definition of the target of the jump.
The target instruction can be found via the LAB_ID
that is the operand of the jump instruction,
by using the label-map table mentioned
above.
If the last instruction of a block is a
conditional jump,
the successors are the target block and the textually
next block.
The last instruction can also be a case jump
instruction (CSA or CSB).
We then analyze the case descriptor,
to find all possible target instructions
and their associated blocks.
We require the case descriptor to be allocated in
a ROM, so it cannot be changed dynamically.
A case jump via an alterable descriptor could in principle
go to any label in the program.
In the presence of such an uncontrolled jump,
hardly any optimization can be done.
We do not expect any front end to generate such a descriptor,
however, because of the controlled nature
of case statements in high level languages.
If the basic block does not end in a jump instruction,
its only successor is the textually next block.

53
doc/ego/cf/cf3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
.NH 2
Immediate dominators
.PP
A basic block B dominates a block C if every path
in the control flow graph from the procedure entry block
to C goes through B.
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
of C on any path from the entry block.
See also
.[~[
aho compiler design
.], section 13.1.]
.PP
There are a number of algorithms to compute
the immediate dominator relation.
.IP 1.
Purdom and Moore give an algorithm that is
easy to program and easy to describe (although the
description they give is unreadable;
it is given in a very messy Algol60 program full of gotos).
.[
predominators
.]
.IP 2.
Aho and Ullman present a bitvector algorithm, which is also
easy to program and to understand.
(See
.[~[
aho compiler design
.], section 13.1.]).
.IP 3
Lengauer and Tarjan introduce a fast algorithm that is
hard to understand, yet remarkably easy to implement.
.[
lengauer dominators
.]
.LP
The Purdom-Moore algorithm is very slow if the
number of basic blocks in the flow graph is large.
The Aho-Ullman algorithm in fact computes the
dominator relation,
from which the immediate dominator relation can be computed
in time quadratic to the number of basic blocks, worst case.
The storage requirement is also quadratic to the number
of blocks.
The running time of the third algorithm is proportional
to:
.DS
(number of edges in the graph) * log(number of blocks).
.DE
We have chosen this algorithm because it is fast
(as shown by experiments done by Lengauer and Tarjan),
it is easy to program and requires little data space.

93
doc/ego/cf/cf4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
.NH 2
Loop detection
.PP
Loops are detected by using the loop construction
algorithm of.
.[~[
aho compiler design
.], section 13.1.]
This algorithm uses \fIback edges\fR.
A back edge is an edge from B to C in the CFG,
whose head (C) dominates its tail (B).
The loop associated with this back edge
consists of C plus all nodes in the CFG
that can reach B without going through C.
.PP
As an example of how the algorithm works,
consider the piece of program of Fig. 4.1.
First just look at the program and think for
yourself what part of the code constitutes the loop.
.DS
loop
if cond then 1
-- lots of simple
-- assignment
-- statements 2 3
exit; -- exit loop
else
S; -- one statement
end if;
end loop;
Fig. 4.1 A misleading loop
.DE
Although a human being may be easily deceived
by the brackets "loop" and "end loop",
the loop detection algorithm will correctly
reply that only the test for "cond" and
the single statement in the false-part
of the if statement are part of the loop!
The statements in the true-part only get
executed once, so there really is no reason at all
to say they're part of the loop too.
The CFG contains one back edge, "3->1".
As node 3 cannot be reached from node 2,
the latter node is not part of the loop.
.PP
A source of problems with the algorithm is the fact
that different back edges may result in
the same loop.
Such an ill-structured loop is
called a \fImessy\fR loop.
After a loop has been constructed, it is checked
if it is really a new loop.
.PP
Loops can partly overlap, without one being nested
inside the other.
This is the case in the program of Fig. 4.2.
.DS
1: 1
S1;
2:
S2; 2
if cond then
goto 4;
S3; 3 4
goto 1;
4:
S4;
goto 1;
Fig. 4.2 Partly overlapping loops
.DE
There are two back edges "3->1" and "4->1",
resulting in the loops {1,2,3} and {1,2,4}.
With every basic block we associate a set of
all loops it is part of.
It is not sufficient just to record its
most enclosing loop.
.PP
After all loops of a procedure are detected, we determine
the nesting level of every loop.
Finally, we find all strong and firm blocks of the loop.
If the loop has only one back edge (i.e. it is not messy),
the set of firm blocks consists of the
head of this back edge and its dominators
in the loop (including the loop entry block).
A firm block is also strong if it is not a
successor of a block that may exit the loop;
a block may exit a loop if it has an (immediate) successor
that is not part of the loop.
For messy loops we do not determine the strong
and firm blocks. These loops are expected
to occur very rarely.

79
doc/ego/cf/cf5 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
.NH 2
Interprocedural analysis
.PP
It is often desirable to know the effects
a procedure call may have.
The optimization below is only possible if
we know for sure that the call to P cannot
change A.
.DS
A := 10; A:= 10;
P; -- procedure call --> P;
B := A + 2; B := 12;
.DE
Although it is not possible to predict exactly
all the effects a procedure call has, we may
determine a kind of upper bound for it.
So we compute all variables that may be
changed by P, although they need not be
changed at every invocation of P.
We can get hold of this set by just looking
at all assignment (store) instructions
in the body of P.
EM also has a set of \fIindirect\fR assignment
instructions,
i.e. assignment through a pointer variable.
In general, it is not possible to determine
which variable is affected by such an assignment.
In these cases, we just record the fact that P
does an indirect assignment.
Note that this does not mean that all variables
are potentially affected, as the front ends
may generate messages telling that certain
variables can never be accessed indirectly.
We also set a flag if P does a use (load) indirect.
Note that we only have to look at \fIglobal\fR
variables.
If P changes or uses any of its locals,
this has no effect on its environment.
Local variables of a lexically enclosing
procedure can only be accessed indirectly.
.PP
A procedure P may of course call another procedure.
To determine the effects of a call to P,
we also must know the effects of a call to the second procedure.
This second one may call a third one, and so on.
Effectively, we need to compute the \fItransitive closure\fR
of the effects.
To do this, we determine for every procedure
which other procedures it calls.
This set is the "calling" attribute of a procedure.
One may regard all these sets as a conceptual graph,
in which there is an edge from P to Q
if Q is in the calling set of P. This graph will
be referred to as the \fIcall graph\fR.
(Note the resemblance with the control flow graph).
.PP
We can detect which procedures are called by P
by looking at all CAL instructions in its body.
Unfortunately, a procedure may also be
called indirectly, via a CAI instruction.
Yet, only procedures that are used as operand of an LPI
instruction can be called indirect,
because this is the only way to take the address of a procedure.
We determine for every procedure whether it does
a CAI instruction.
We also build a set of all procedures used as
operand of an LPI.
.sp
After all procedures have been processed (i.e. all CFGs
are constructed, all loops are detected,
all procedures are analyzed to see which variables
they may change, which procedures they call,
whether they do a CAI or are used in an LPI) the
transitive closure of all interprocedural
information is computed.
During the same process,
the calling set of every procedure that uses a CAI
is extended with the above mentioned set of all
procedures that can be called indirect.

21
doc/ego/cf/cf6 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
.NH 2
Source files
.PP
The sources of CF are in the following files and packages:
.IP cf.h: 14
declarations of global variables and data structures
.IP cf.c:
the routine main; interprocedural analysis;
transitive closure
.IP succ:
control flow (successor and predecessor)
.IP idom:
immediate dominators
.IP loop:
loop detection
.IP get:
read object and procedure table;
read EM text and partition it into basic blocks
.IP put:
write tables, CFGs and EM text
.LP

1
doc/ego/cj/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
cj1

136
doc/ego/cj/cj1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Cross jumping
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The "Cross Jumping" optimization technique (CJ)
.[
wulf design optimizing compiler
.]
is basically a space optimization technique. It looks for pairs of
basic blocks (B1,B2), for which:
.DS
SUCC(B1) = SUCC(B2) = {S}
.DE
(So B1 and B2 both have one and the same successor).
If the last few non-branch instructions are the same for B1 and B2,
one such sequence can be eliminated.
.DS
Pascal:
if cond then
S1
S3
else
S2
S3
(pseudo) EM:
TEST COND TEST COND
BNE *1 BNE *1
S1 S1
S3 ---> BRA *2
BRA *2 1:
1: S2
S2 2:
S3 S3
2:
Fig. 9.1 An example of Cross Jumping
.DE
As the basic blocks have the same successor,
at least one of them ends in an unconditional branch instruction (BRA).
Hence no extra branch instruction is ever needed, just the target
of an existing branch needs to be changed; neither the program size
nor the execution time will ever increase.
In general, the execution time will remain the same, unless
further optimizations can be applied because of this optimization.
.PP
This optimization is particularly effective,
because it cannot always be done by the programmer at the source level,
as demonstrated by the Fig. 8.2.
.DS
Pascal:
if cond then
x := f(4)
else
x := g(5)
EM:
... ...
LOC 4 LOC 5
CAL F CAL G
ASP 2 ASP 2
LFR 2 LFR 2
STL X STL X
Fig. 9.2 Effectiveness of Cross Jumping
.DE
At the source level there is no common tail,
but at the EM level there is a common tail.
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
The implementation of cross jumping is rather straightforward.
The technique is applied to one procedure at a time.
The control flow graph of the procedure
is scanned for pairs of basic blocks
with the same (single) successor and with common tails.
Note that there may be more than two such blocks (e.g. as the result
of a case statement).
This is dealt with by repeating the entire process until no
further optimizations can de done for the current procedure.
.sp
If a suitable pair of basic blocks has been found, the control flow
graph must be altered. One of the basic
blocks must be split into two.
The control flow graphs before and after the optimization are shown
in Fig. 9.3 and Fig. 9.4.
.DS
-------- --------
| | | |
| S1 | | S2 |
| S3 | | S3 |
| | | |
-------- --------
| |
|------------------|--------------------|
|
v
Fig. 9.3 CFG before optimization
.DE
.DS
-------- --------
| | | |
| S1 | | S2 |
| | | |
-------- --------
| |
|--------------------<------------------|
v
--------
| |
| S3 |
| |
--------
|
v
Fig. 9.4 CFG after optimization
.DE
Some attributes of the three resulting blocks (such as immediate dominator)
are updated.
.PP
In some cases, cross jumping might split the computation of an expression
into two, by inserting a branch somewhere in the middle.
Most code generators will generate very poor assembly code when
presented with such EM code.
Therefor, cross jumping is not performed in these cases.

5
doc/ego/cs/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
cs1
cs2
cs3
cs4
cs5

42
doc/ego/cs/cs1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Common subexpression elimination
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The Common Subexpression Elimination optimization technique (CS)
tries to eliminate multiple computations of EM expressions
that yield the same result.
It places the result of one such computation
in a temporary variable,
and replaces the other computations by a reference
to this temporary variable.
The primary goal of this technique is to decrease
the execution time of the program,
but in general it will save space too.
.PP
As an example of the application of Common Subexpression Elimination,
consider the piece of program in Fig. 7.1(a).
.DS
x := a * b; TMP := a * b; x := a * b;
CODE; x := TMP; CODE
y := c + a * b; CODE y := x;
y := c + TMP;
(a) (b) (c)
Fig. 7.1 Examples of Common Subexpression Elimination
.DE
If neither a nor b is changed in CODE,
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(b),
which saves one multiplication,
but costs an extra store instruction.
If the value of x is not changed in CODE either,
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(c).
In this case
the extra store is not needed.
.PP
In the following sections we will describe
which transformations are done
by CS and how this phase
was implemented.

83
doc/ego/cs/cs2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
.NH 2
Specification of the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
.PP
In this section we will describe
the window
through which CS examines the code,
the expressions recognized by CS,
and finally the changes made to the code.
.NH 3
The working window
.PP
The CS algorithm is applied to the
largest sequence of textually adjacent basic blocks
B1,..,Bn, for which
.DS
PRED(Bj) = {Bj-1}, j = 2,..,n.
.DE
Intuitively, this window consists of straight line code,
with only one entry point (at the beginning); it may
contain jumps, which should all have their targets outside the window.
This is illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
.DS
x := a * b; (1)
if x < 10 then (2)
y := a * b; (3)
Fig. 7.2 The working window of CS
.DE
Line (2) can only be executed after line (1).
Likewise, line (3) can only be executed after
line (2).
Both a and b have the same values at line (1) and at line (3).
.PP
Larger windows were avoided.
In Fig. 7.3, the value of a at line (4) may have been obtained
at more than one point.
.DS
x := a * b; (1)
if x < 10 then (2)
a := 100; (3)
y := a * b; (4)
Fig. 7.3 Several working windows
.DE
.NH 3
Recognized expressions.
.PP
The computations eliminated by CS need not be normal expressions
(like "a * b"),
but can even consist of a single operand that is expensive to access,
such as an array element or a record field.
If an array element is used,
its address is computed implicitly.
CS is able to eliminate either the element itself or its
address, whichever one is most profitable.
A variable of a textually enclosing procedure may also be
expensive to access, depending on the lexical level difference.
.NH 3
Transformations
.PP
CS creates a new temporary local variable (TMP)
for every eliminated expression,
unless it is able to use an existing local variable.
It emits code to initialize this variable with the
result of the expression.
Most recurrences of the expression
can simply be replaced by a reference to TMP.
If the address of an array element is recognized as
a common subexpression,
references to the element itself are replaced by
indirect references through TMP (see Fig. 7.4).
.DS
x := A[i]; TMP := &A[i];
. . . --> x := *TMP;
A[i] := y; . . .
*TMP := y;
Fig. 7.4 Elimination of an array address computation
.DE
Here, '&' is the 'address of' operator,
and unary '*' is the indirection operator.
(Note that EM actually has different instructions to do
a use-indirect or an assign-indirect.)

243
doc/ego/cs/cs3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
.NH 3
The value number method
.PP
To determine whether two expressions have the same result,
there must be some way to determine whether their operands have
the same values.
We use a system of \fIvalue numbers\fP
.[
kennedy data flow analysis
.]
in which each distinct value of whatever type,
created or used within the working window,
receives a unique identifying number, its value number.
Two items have the same value number if and only if,
based only upon information from the instructions in the window,
their values are provably identical.
For example, after processing the statement
.DS
a := 4;
.DE
the variable a and the constant 4 have the same value number.
.PP
The value number of the result of an expression depends only
on the kind of operator and the value number(s) of the operand(s).
The expressions need not be textually equal, as shown in Fig. 7.5.
.DS
a := c; (1)
use(a * b); (2)
d := b; (3)
use(c * d); (4)
Fig. 7.5 Different expressions with the same value number
.DE
At line (1) a receives the same value number as c.
At line (2) d receives the same value number as b.
At line (4) the expression "c * d" receives the same value number
as the expression "a * b" at line (2),
because the value numbers of their left and right operands are the same,
and the operator (*) is the same.
.PP
As another example of the value number method, consider Fig. 7.6.
.DS
use(a * b); (1)
a := 123; (2)
use(a * b); (3)
Fig. 7.6 Identical expressions with the different value numbers
.DE
Although textually the expressions "a * b" in line 1 and line 3 are equal,
a will have different value numbers at line 3 and line 1.
The two expressions will not mistakenly be recognized as equivalent.
.NH 3
Entities
.PP
The Value Number Method distinguishes between operators and operands.
The value numbers of operands are stored in a table,
called the \fIsymbol table\fR.
The value number of a subexpression depends on the
(root) operator of the expression and on the value numbers
of its operands.
A table of "available expressions" is used to do this mapping.
.PP
CS recognizes the following kinds of EM operands, called \fIentities\fR:
.IP
- constant
- local variable
- external variable
- indirectly accessed entity
- offsetted entity
- address of local variable
- address of external variable
- address of offsetted entity
- address of local base
- address of argument base
- array element
- procedure identifier
- floating zero
- local base
- heap pointer
- ignore mask
.LP
Whenever a new entity is encountered in the working window,
it is entered in the symbol table and given a brand new value number.
Most entities have attributes (e.g. the offset in
the current stackframe for local variables),
which are also stored in the symbol table.
.PP
An entity is called static if its value cannot be changed
(e.g. a constant or an address).
.NH 3
Parsing expressions
.PP
Common subexpressions are recognized by simulating the behaviour
of the EM machine.
The EM code is parsed from left to right;
as EM is postfix code, this is a bottom up parse.
At any point the current state of the EM runtime stack is
reflected by a simulated "fake stack",
containing descriptions of the parsed operands and expressions.
A descriptor consists of:
.DS
(1) the value number of the operand or expression
(2) the size of the operand or expression
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
that constitutes the operand or expression
.DE
Note that operands may consist of several EM instructions.
Whenever an operator is encountered, the
descriptors of its operands are on top of the fake stack.
The operator and the value numbers of the operands
are used as indices in the table of available expressions,
to determine the value number of the expression.
.PP
During the parsing process,
we keep track of the first line of each expression;
we need this information when we decide to eliminate the expression.
.NH 3
Updating entities
.PP
An entity is assigned a value number when it is
used for the first time
in the working window.
If the entity is used as left hand side of an assignment,
it gets the value number of the right hand side.
Sometimes the effects of an instruction on an entity cannot
be determined exactly;
the current value and value number of the entity may become
inconsistent.
Hence the current value number must be forgotten.
This is achieved by giving the entity a new value number
that was not used before.
The entity is said to be \fIkilled\fR.
.PP
As information is lost when an entity is killed,
CS tries to save as many entities as possible.
In case of an indirect assignment through a pointer,
some analysis is done to see which variables cannot be altered.
For a procedure call, the interprocedural information contained
in the procedure table is used to restrict the set of entities that may
be changed by the call.
Local variables for which the front end generated
a register message can never be changed by an indirect assignment
or a procedure call.
.NH 3
Changing the EM text
.PP
When a new expression comes available,
it is checked whether its result is saved in a local
that may go in a register.
The last line of the expression must be followed
by a STL or SDL instruction
(depending on the size of the result)
and a register message must be present for
this local.
If there is such a local,
it is recorded in the available expressions table.
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
is found,
the value number of the local is compared against
the value number of the result.
If they are different the local cannot be used and is forgotten.
.PP
The available expressions are linked in a list.
New expressions are linked at the head of the list.
In this way expressions that are contained within other
expressions appear later in the list,
because EM-expressions are postfix.
The elimination process walks through the list,
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
If an expression is eliminated,
any expression later on in the list, contained in the former expression,
is removed from the list,
as expressions can only be eliminated once.
.PP
A STL or SDL is emitted after the first occurrence of the expression,
unless there was an existing local variable that could hold the result.
.NH 3
Desirability analysis
.PP
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
Therefore some machine-dependent information is needed
to decide whether it is desirable to
eliminate a given expression.
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
exactly what code will be generated,
some heuristics are used.
CS essentially looks for some special cases
that should not be eliminated.
These special cases can be turned on or off for a given machine,
as indicated in a machine descriptor file.
.PP
Some operators can sometimes be translated
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
Such an operator is only eliminated
if its operand is itself expensive,
i.e. it is not just a simple load.
The machine descriptor file contains a set of such operators.
.PP
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
is only beneficial if the difference in lexical levels
exceeds a certain threshold.
The machine descriptor file contains this threshold.
.PP
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
We assume that this is only possible when the
size of the array element is greater than some limit.
.PP
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
If this is the case,
the SLI instruction between a LOC
and an ADS is not eliminated.
.PP
To handle unforseen cases, the descriptor file may also contain
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
.NH 3
The algorithm
.PP
After these preparatory explanations,
the algorithm itself is easy to understand.
For each instruction within the current window,
the following steps are performed in the given order :
.IP 1.
Check if this instruction defines an entity.
If so, the set of entities is updated accordingly.
.IP 2.
Kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
.IP 3.
Simulate the instruction on the fake-stack.
If this instruction is an operator,
update the list of available expressions accordingly.
.PP
The result of this process is
a list of available expressions plus the information
needed to eliminate them.
Expressions that are desirable to eliminate are eliminated.
Next, the window is shifted and the process is repeated.

305
doc/ego/cs/cs4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,305 @@
.NH 2
Implementation.
.PP
In this section we will discuss the implementation of the CS phase.
We will first describe the basic actions that are undertaken
by the algorithm, than the algorithm itself.
.NH 3
Partioning the EM instructions
.PP
There are over 100 EM instructions.
For our purpose we partition this huge set into groups of
instructions which can be more or less conveniently handled together.
.PP
There are groups for all sorts of load instructions:
simple loads, expensive loads, loads of an array element.
A load is considered \fIexpensive\fP when more than one EM instructions
are involved in loading it.
The load of a lexical entity is also considered expensive.
For instance: LOF is expensive, LAL is not.
LAR forms a group on its own,
because it is not only an expensive load,
but also implicitly includes the ternary operator AAR,
which computes the address of the array element.
.PP
There are groups for all sorts of operators:
unary, binary, and ternary.
The groups of operators are further partitioned according to the size
of their operand(s) and result.
\" .PP
\" The distinction between operators and expensive loads is not always clear.
\" The ADP instruction for example,
\" might seem a unary operator because it pops one item
\" (a pointer) from the stack.
\" However, two ADP-instructions which pop an item with the same value number
\" need not have the same result,
\" because the attributes (an offset, to be added to the pointer)
\" can be different.
\" Is it then a binary operator?
\" That would give rise to the strange, and undesirable,
\" situation that some binary operators pop two operands
\" and others pop one.
\" The conclusion is inevitable:
\" we have been fooled by the name (ADd Pointer).
\" The ADP-instruction is an expensive load.
\" In this context LAF, meaning Load Address of oFfsetted,
\" would have been a better name,
\" corresponding to LOF, like LAL,
\" Load Address of Local, corresponds to LOL.
.PP
There are groups for all sorts of stores:
direct, indirect, array element.
The SAR forms a group on its own for the same reason
as appeared with LAR.
.PP
The effect of the remaining instructions is less clear.
They do not help very much in parsing expressions or
in constructing our pseudo symboltable.
They are partitioned according to the following criteria:
.RS
.IP "-"
They change the value of an entity without using the stack
(e.g. ZRL, DEE).
.IP "-"
They are subroutine calls (CAI, CAL).
.IP "-"
They change the stack in some irreproduceable way (e.g. ASP, LFR, DUP).
.IP "-"
They have no effect whatever on the stack or on the entities.
This does not mean they can be deleted,
but they can be ignored for the moment
(e.g. MES, LIN, NOP).
.IP "-"
Their effect is too complicate too compute,
so we just assume worst case behaviour.
Hopefully, they do not occur very often.
(e.g. MON, STR, BLM).
.IP "-"
They signal the end of the basic block (e.g. BLT, RET, TRP).
.RE
.NH 3
Parsing expressions
.PP
To recognize expressions,
we simulate the behaviour of the EM machine,
by means of a fake-stack.
When we scan the instructions in sequential order,
we first encounter the instructions that load
the operands on the stack,
and then the instruction that indicates the operator,
because EM expressions are postfix.
When we find an instruction to load an operand,
we load on the fake-stack a struct with the following information:
.DS
(1) the value number of the operand
(2) the size of the operand
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
that constitutes the operand
.DE
In most cases, (3) will point to the line
that loaded the operand (e.g. LOL, LOC),
i.e. there is only one line that refers to this operand,
but sometimes some information must be popped
to load the operand (e.g. LOI, LAR).
This information must have been pushed before,
so we also pop a pointer to the first line that pushed
the information.
This line is now the first line that defines the operand.
.PP
When we find the operator instruction,
we pop its operand(s) from the fake-stack.
The first line that defines the first operand is
now the first line of the expression.
We now have all information to determine
whether the just parsed expression has occurred before.
We also know the first and last line of the expression;
we need this when we decide to eliminate it.
Associated with each available expression is a set of
which the elements contains the first and last line of
a recurrence of this expression.
.PP
Not only will the operand(s) be popped from the fake-stack,
but the following will be pushed:
.DS
(1) the value number of the result
(2) the size of the result
(3) a pointer to the first line of the expression
.DE
In this way an item on the fake-stack always contains
the necessary information.
As you see, EM expressions are parsed bottum up.
.NH 3
Updating entities
.PP
As said before,
we build our private "symboltable",
while scanning the EM-instructions.
The behaviour of the EM-machine is not only reflected
in the fake-stack,
but also in the entities.
When an entity is created,
we do not yet know its value,
so we assign a brand new value number to it.
Each time a store-instruction is encountered,
we change the value number of the target entity of this store
to the value number of the token that was popped
from the fake-stack.
Because entities may overlap,
we must also "forget" the value numbers of entities
that might be affected by this store.
Each such entity will be \fIkilled\fP,
i.e. assigned a brand new valuenumber.
.PP
Because we lose information when we forget
the value number of an entity,
we try to save as much entities as possible.
When we store into an external,
we don't have to kill locals and vice versa.
Furthermore, we can see whether two locals or
two externals overlap,
because we know the offset from the local base,
resp. the offset within the data block,
and the size.
The situation becomes more complicated when we have
to consider indirection.
The worst case is that we store through an unknown pointer.
In that case we kill all entities except those locals
for which a so-called \fIregister message\fP has been generated;
this register message indicates that this local can never be
accessed indirectly.
If we know this pointer we can be more careful.
If it points to a local then the entity that is accessed through
this pointer can never overlap with an external.
If it points to an external this entity can never overlap with a local.
Furthermore, in the latter case,
we can find the data block this entity belongs to.
Since pointer arithmetic is only defined within a data block,
this entity can never overlap with entities that are known to
belong to another data block.
.PP
Not only after a store-instruction but also after a
subroutine-call it may be necessary to kill entities;
the subroutine may affect global variables or store
through a pointer.
If a subroutine is called that is not available as EM-text,
we assume worst case behaviour,
i.e. we kill all entities without register message.
.NH 3
Additions and replacements.
.PP
When a new expression comes available,
we check whether the result is saved in a local
that may go in a register.
The last line of the expression must be followed
by a STL or SDL instruction,
depending on the size of the result
(resp. WS and 2*WS),
and a register message must be present for
this local.
If we have found such a local,
we store a pointer to it with the available expression.
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
is found,
we compare the value number of the local against
the value number of the result.
When they are different we remove the pointer to it,
because we cannot use it.
.PP
The available expressions are singly linked in a list.
When a new expression comes available,
we link it at the head of the list.
In this way expressions that are contained within other
expressions appear later in the list,
because EM-expressions are postfix.
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
we walk through the list,
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
When we decide to eliminate an expression,
we look at the expressions in the tail of the list,
starting from where we are now,
to delete expressions that are contained within
the chosen one because
we cannot eliminate an expression more than once.
.PP
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
and we do not have a local that holds the result,
we emit a STL or SDL after the line where the expression
was first found.
The other occurrences are simply removed,
unless they contain instructions that not only have
effect on the stack; e.g. messages, stores, calls.
Before each instruction that needs the result on the stack,
we emit a LOL or LDL.
When the expression was an AAR,
but the instruction was a LAR or a SAR,
we append a LOI resp. a STI of the number of bytes
in an array-element after each LOL/LDL.
.NH 3
Desirability analysis
.PP
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
Therefore we need some machine dependent information
to decide whether it is desirable to
eliminate a given expression.
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
exactly what code will be generated,
we use some heuristics.
In most cases it will save time when we eliminate an
operator, so we just do it.
We only look for some special cases.
.PP
Some operators can in some cases be translated
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
We only eliminate such an operator,
when its operand is itself "expensive",
i.e. not just a simple load.
The user of the CS phase has to supply
a set of such operators.
.PP
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
is only beneficial when the number of lexical levels
we have to go back exceeds a certain threshold.
This threshold will be different when registers
are saved by the back end.
The user must supply this threshold.
.PP
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
We assume that this is only possible when the
size of the array element is greater than some
(user-supplied) limit.
.PP
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
If this is the case,
we do not eliminate the SLI instruction between a LOC
and an ADS.
.PP
To handle unforeseen cases, the user may also supply
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
.NH 3
The algorithm
.PP
After these preparatory explanations,
we can be short about the algorithm itself.
For each instruction within our window,
the following steps are performed in the order given:
.IP 1.
We check if this instructin defines an entity.
If this is the case the set of entities is updated accordingly.
.IP 2.
We kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
.IP 3.
The instruction is simulated on the fake-stack.
Copy propagation is done.
If this instruction is an operator,
we update the list of available expressions accordingly.
.PP
When we have processed all instructions this way,
we have built a list of available expressions plus the information we
need to eliminate them.
Those expressions of which desirability analysis tells us so,
we eliminate.
The we shift our window and continue.

46
doc/ego/cs/cs5 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
.NH 2
Source files of CS
.PP
The sources of CS are in the following files and packages:
.IP cs.h 14
declarations of global variables and data structures
.IP cs.c
the routine main;
a driving routine to process
the basic blocks in the right order
.IP vnm
implements a procedure that performs
the value numbering on one basic block
.IP eliminate
implements a procedure that does the
transformations, if desirable
.IP avail
implements a procedure that manipulates the list of available expressions
.IP entity
implements a procedure that manipulates the set of entities
.IP getentity
implements a procedure that extracts the
pseudo symboltable information from EM-instructions;
uses a small table
.IP kill
implements several routines that find the entities
that might be changed by EM-instructions
and kill them
.IP partition
implements several routines that partition the huge set
of EM-instructions into more or less manageable,
more or less logical chunks
.IP profit
implements a procedure that decides whether it
is advantageous to eliminate an expression;
also removes expressions with side-effects
.IP stack
implements the fake-stack and operations on it
.IP alloc
implements several allocation routines
.IP aux
implements several auxiliary routines
.IP debug
implements several routines to provide debugging
and verbose output
.LP

5
doc/ego/ic/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
ic1
ic2
ic3
ic4
ic5

57
doc/ego/ic/ic1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
.bp
.NH
The Intermediate Code and the IC phase
.PP
In this chapter the intermediate code of the EM global optimizer
will be defined.
The 'Intermediate Code construction' phase (IC),
which builds the initial intermediate code from
EM Compact Assembly Language,
will be described.
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The EM global optimizer is a multi pass program,
hence there is a need for an intermediate code.
Usually, programs in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit use the
Compact Assembly Language format
.[~[
keizer architecture
.], section 11.2]
for this purpose.
Although this code has some convenient features,
such as being compact,
it is quite unsuitable in our case,
because of a number of reasons.
At first, the code lacks global information
about whole procedures or whole basic blocks.
Second, it uses identifiers ('names') to bind
defining and applied occurrences of
procedures, data labels and instruction labels.
Although this is usual in high level programming
languages, it is awkward in an intermediate code
that must be read many times.
Each pass of the optimizer would have
to incorporate an identifier look-up mechanism
to associate a defining occurrence with each
applied occurrence of an identifier.
Finally, EM programs are used to declare blocks of bytes,
rather than variables. A 'hol 6' instruction may be used to
declare three 2-byte variables.
Clearly, the optimizer wants to deal with variables, and
not with rows of bytes.
.PP
To overcome these problems, we have developed a new
intermediate code.
This code does not merely consist of the EM instructions,
but also contains global information in the
form of tables and graphs.
Before describing the intermediate code we will
first leap aside to outline
the problems one generally encounters
when trying to store complex data structures such as
graphs outside the program, i.e. in a file.
We trust this will enhance the
comprehensibility of the
intermediate code definition and the design and implementation
of the IC phase.

146
doc/ego/ic/ic2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
.NH 2
Representation of complex data structures in a sequential file
.PP
Most programmers are quite used to deal with
complex data structures, such as
arrays, graphs and trees.
There are some particular problems that occur
when storing such a data structure
in a sequential file.
We call data that is kept in
main memory
.UL internal
,as opposed to
.UL external
data
that is kept in a file outside the program.
.sp
We assume a simple data structure of a
scalar type (integer, floating point number)
has some known external representation.
An
.UL array
having elements of a scalar type can be represented
externally easily, by successively
representing its elements.
The external representation may be preceded by a
number, giving the length of the array.
Now, consider a linear, singly linked list,
the elements of which look like:
.DS
record
data: scalar_type;
next: pointer_type;
end;
.DE
It is significant to note that the "next"
fields of the elements only have a meaning within
main memory.
The field contains the address of some location in
main memory.
If a list element is written to a file in
some program,
and read by another program,
the element will be allocated at a different
address in main memory.
Hence this address value is completely
useless outside the program.
.sp
One may represent the list by ignoring these "next" fields
and storing the data items in the order they are linked.
The "next" fields are represented \fIimplicitly\fR.
When the file is read again,
the same list can be reconstructed.
In order to know where the external representation of the
list ends,
it may be useful to put the length of
the list in front of it.
.sp
Note that arrays and linear lists have the
same external representation.
.PP
A doubly linked, linear list,
with elements of the type:
.DS
record
data: scalar_type;
next,
previous: pointer_type;
end
.DE
can be represented in precisely the same way.
Both the "next" and the "previous" fields are represented
implicitly.
.PP
Next, consider a binary tree,
the nodes of which have type:
.DS
record
data: scalar_type;
left,
right: pointer_type;
end
.DE
Such a tree can be represented sequentially,
by storing its nodes in some fixed order, e.g. prefix order.
A special null data item may be used to
denote a missing left or right son.
For example, let the scalar type be integer,
and let the null item be 0.
Then the tree of fig. 3.1(a)
can be represented as in fig. 3.1(b).
.DS
4
9 12
12 3 4 6
8 1 5 1
Fig. 3.1(a) A binary tree
4 9 12 0 0 3 8 0 0 1 0 0 12 4 0 5 0 0 6 1 0 0 0
Fig. 3.1(b) Its sequential representation
.DE
We are still able to represent the pointer fields ("left"
and "right") implicitly.
.PP
Finally, consider a general
.UL graph
, where each node has a "data" field and
pointer fields,
with no restriction on where they may point to.
Now we're at the end of our tale.
There is no way to represent the pointers implicitly,
like we did with lists and trees.
In order to represent them explicitly,
we use the following scheme.
Every node gets an extra field,
containing some unique number that identifies the node.
We call this number its
.UL id.
A pointer is represented externally as the id of the node
it points to.
When reading the file we use a table that maps
an id to the address of its node.
In general this table will not be completely filled in
until we have read the entire external representation of
the graph and allocated internal memory locations for
every node.
Hence we cannot reconstruct the graph in one scan.
That is, there may be some pointers from node A to B,
where B is placed after A in the sequential file than A.
When we read the node of A we cannot map the id of B
to the address of node B,
as we have not yet allocated node B.
We can overcome this problem if the size
of every node is known in advance.
In this case we can allocate memory for a node
on first reference.
Else, the mapping from id to pointer
cannot be done while reading nodes.
The mapping can be done either in an extra scan
or at every reference to the node.

414
doc/ego/ic/ic3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,414 @@
.NH 2
Definition of the intermediate code
.PP
The intermediate code of the optimizer consists
of several components:
.IP -
the object table
.IP -
the procedure table
.IP -
the em code
.IP -
the control flow graphs
.IP -
the loop table
.LP -
.PP
These components are described in
the next sections.
The syntactic structure of every component
is described by a set of context free syntax rules,
with the following conventions:
.DS
x a non-terminal symbol
A a terminal symbol (in capitals)
x: a b c; a grammar rule
a | b a or b
(a)+ 1 or more occurrences of a
{a} 0 or more occurrences of a
.DE
.NH 3
The object table
.PP
EM programs declare blocks of bytes rather than (global) variables.
A typical program may declare 'HOL 7780'
to allocate space for 8 I/O buffers,
2 large arrays and 10 scalar variables.
The optimizer wants to deal with
.UL objects
like variables, buffers and arrays
and certainly not with huge numbers of bytes.
Therefore the intermediate code contains information
about which global objects are used.
This information can be obtained from an EM program
by just looking at the operands of instruction
such as LOE, LAE, LDE, STE, SDE, INE, DEE and ZRE.
.PP
The object table consists of a list of
.UL datablock
entries.
Each such entry represents a declaration like HOL, BSS,
CON or ROM.
There are five kinds of datablock entries.
The fifth kind,
UNKNOWN, denotes a declaration in a
separately compiled file that is not made
available to the optimizer.
Each datablock entry contains the type of the block,
its size, and a description of the objects that
belong to it.
If it is a rom,
it also contains a list of values given
as arguments to the rom instruction,
provided that this list contains only integer numbers.
An object has an offset (within its datablock)
and a size.
The size need not always be determinable.
Both datablock and object contain a unique
identifying number
(see previous section for their use).
.DS
.UL syntax
object_table:
{datablock} ;
datablock:
D_ID -- unique identifying number
PSEUDO -- one of ROM,CON,BSS,HOL,UNKNOWN
SIZE -- # bytes declared
FLAGS
{value} -- contents of rom
{object} ; -- objects of the datablock
object:
O_ID -- unique identifying number
OFFSET -- offset within the datablock
SIZE ; -- size of the object in bytes
value:
argument ;
.DE
A data block has only one flag: "external", indicating
whether the data label is externally visible.
The syntax for "argument" will be given later on
(see em_text).
.NH 3
The procedure table
.PP
The procedure table contains global information
about all procedures that are made available
to the optimizer
and that are needed by the EM program.
(Library units may not be needed, see section 3.5).
The table has one entry for
every procedure.
.DS
.UL syntax
procedure_table:
{procedure}
procedure:
P_ID -- unique identifying number
#LABELS -- number of instruction labels
#LOCALS -- number of bytes for locals
#FORMALS -- number of bytes for formals
FLAGS -- flag bits
calling -- procedures called by this one
change -- info about global variables changed
use ; -- info about global variables used
calling:
{P_ID} ; -- procedures called
change:
ext -- external variables changed
FLAGS ;
use:
FLAGS ;
ext:
{O_ID} ; -- a set of objects
.DE
.PP
The number of bytes of formal parameters accessed by
a procedure is determined by the front ends and
passed via a message (parameter message) to the optimizer.
If the front end is not able to determine this number
(e.g. the parameter may be an array of dynamic size or
the procedure may have a variable number of arguments) the attribute
contains the value 'UNKNOWN_SIZE'.
.sp 0
A procedure has the following flags:
.IP -
external: true if the proc. is externally visible
.IP -
bodyseen: true if its code is available as EM text
.IP -
calunknown: true if it calls a procedure that has its bodyseen
flag not set
.IP -
environ: true if it uses or changes a (non-global) variable in
a lexically enclosing procedure
.IP -
lpi: true if is used as operand of an lpi instruction, so
it may be called indirect
.LP
The change and use attributes both have one flag: "indirect",
indicating whether the procedure does a 'use indirect'
or a 'store indirect' (indirect means through a pointer).
.NH 3
The EM text
.PP
The EM text contains the EM instructions.
Every EM instruction has an operation code (opcode)
and 0 or 1 operands.
EM pseudo instructions can have more than
1 operand.
The opcode is just a small (8 bit) integer.
.sp
There are several kinds of operands, which we will
refer to as
.UL types.
Many EM instructions can have more than one type of operand.
The types and their encodings in Compact Assembly Language
are discussed extensively in.
.[~[
keizer architecture
.], section 11.2]
Of special interest is the way numeric values
are represented.
Of prime importance is the machine independency of
the representation.
Ultimately, one could store every integer
just as a string of the characters '0' to '9'.
As doing arithmetic on strings is awkward,
Compact Assembly Language allows several alternatives.
The main idea is to look at the value of the integer.
Integers that fit in 16, 32 or 64 bits are
represented as a row of resp. 2, 4 and 8 bytes,
preceded by an indication of how many bytes are used.
Longer integers are represented as strings;
this is only allowed within pseudo instructions, however.
This concept works very well for target machines
with reasonable word sizes.
At present, most ACK software cannot be used for word sizes
higher than 32 bits,
although the handles for using larger word sizes are
present in the design of the EM code.
In the intermediate code we essentially use the
same ideas.
We allow three representations of integers.
.IP -
integers that fit in a short are represented as a short
.IP -
integers that fit in a long but not in a short are represented
as longs
.IP -
all remaining integers are represented as strings
(only allowed in pseudos).
.LP
The terms short and long are defined in
.[~[
ritchie reference manual programming language
.], section 4]
and depend only on the source machine
(i.e. the machine on which ACK runs),
not on the target machines.
For historical reasons a long will often be called an
.UL offset.
.PP
Operands can also be instruction labels,
objects or procedures.
Instruction labels are denoted by a
.UL label
.UL identifier,
which can be distinguished from a normal identifier.
.sp
The operand of a pseudo instruction can be a list of
.UL arguments.
Arguments can have the same type as operands, except
for the type short, which is not used for arguments.
Furthermore, an argument can be a string or
a string representation of a signed integer, unsigned integer
or floating point number.
If the number of arguments is not fully determined by
the pseudo instruction (e.g. a ROM pseudo can have any number
of arguments), then the list is terminated by a special
argument of type CEND.
.DS
.UL syntax
em_text:
{line} ;
line:
INSTR -- opcode
OPTYPE -- operand type
operand ;
operand:
empty | -- OPTYPE = NO
SHORT | -- OPTYPE = SHORT
OFFSET | -- OPTYPE = OFFSET
LAB_ID | -- OPTYPE = INSTRLAB
O_ID | -- OPTYPE = OBJECT
P_ID | -- OPTYPE = PROCEDURE
{argument} ; -- OPTYPE = LIST
argument:
ARGTYPE
arg ;
arg:
empty | -- ARGTYPE = CEND
OFFSET |
LAB_ID |
O_ID |
P_ID |
string | -- ARGTYPE = STRING
const ; -- ARGTYPE = ICON,UCON or FCON
string:
LENGTH -- number of characters
{CHARACTER} ;
const:
SIZE -- number of bytes
string ; -- string representation of (un)signed
-- or floating point constant
.DE
.NH 3
The control flow graphs
.PP
Each procedure can be divided
into a number of basic blocks.
A basic block is a piece of code with
no jumps in, except at the beginning,
and no jumps out, except at the end.
.PP
Every basic block has a set of
.UL successors,
which are basic blocks that can follow it immediately in
the dynamic execution sequence.
The
.UL predecessors
are the basic blocks of which this one
is a successor.
The successor and predecessor attributes
of all basic blocks of a single procedure
are said to form the
.UL control
.UL flow
.UL graph
of that procedure.
.PP
Another important attribute is the
.UL immediate
.UL dominator.
A basic block B dominates a block C if
every path in the graph from the procedure entry block
to C goes through B.
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
of C on any path from the entry block.
(Note that the dominator relation is transitive,
so the immediate dominator is well defined.)
.PP
A basic block also has an attribute containing
the identifiers of every
.UL loop
that the block belongs to (see next section for loops).
.DS
.UL syntax
control_flow_graph:
{basic_block} ;
basic_block:
B_ID -- unique identifying number
#INSTR -- number of EM instructions
succ
pred
idom -- immediate dominator
loops -- set of loops
FLAGS ; -- flag bits
succ:
{B_ID} ;
pred:
{B_ID} ;
idom:
B_ID ;
loops:
{LP_ID} ;
.DE
The flag bits can have the values 'firm' and 'strong',
which are explained below.
.NH 3
The loop tables
.PP
Every procedure has an associated
.UL loop
.UL table
containing information about all the loops
in the procedure.
Loops can be detected by a close inspection of
the control flow graph.
The main idea is to look for two basic blocks,
B and C, for which the following holds:
.IP -
B is a successor of C
.IP -
B is a dominator of C
.LP
B is called the loop
.UL entry
and C is called the loop
.UL end.
Intuitively, C contains a jump backwards to
the beginning of the loop (B).
.PP
A loop L1 is said to be
.UL nested
within loop L2 if all basic blocks of L1
are also part of L2.
It is important to note that loops could
originally be written as a well structured for -or
while loop or as a messy goto loop.
Hence loops may partly overlap without one
being nested inside the other.
The
.UL nesting
.UL level
of a loop is the number of loops in
which it is nested (so it is 0 for
an outermost loop).
The details of loop detection will be discussed later.
.PP
It is often desirable to know whether a
basic block gets executed during every iteration
of a loop.
This leads to the following definitions:
.IP -
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIfirm\fR block
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L,
with the only possible exception of the last iteration.
.IP -
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIstrong\fR block
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L.
.LP
Note that a strong block is also a firm block.
If a block is part of a conditional statement, it is neither
strong nor firm, as it may be skipped during some iterations
(see Fig. 3.2).
.DS
loop
if cond1 then
... -- this code will not
-- result in a firm or strong block
end if;
... -- strong (always executed)
exit when cond2;
... -- firm (not executed on
-- last iteration).
end loop;
Fig. 3.2 Example of firm and strong block
.DE
.DS
.UL syntax
looptable:
{loop} ;
loop:
LP_ID -- unique identifying number
LEVEL -- loop nesting level
entry -- loop entry block
end ;
entry:
B_ID ;
end:
B_ID ;
.DE

80
doc/ego/ic/ic4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
.NH 2
External representation of the intermediate code
.PP
The syntax of the intermediate code was given
in the previous section.
In this section we will make some remarks about
the representation of the code in sequential files.
.sp
We use sequential files in order to avoid
the bookkeeping of complex file indices.
As a consequence of this decision
we can't store all components
of the intermediate code
in one file.
If a phase wishes to change some attribute
of a procedure,
or wants to add or delete entire procedures
(inline substitution may do the latter),
the procedure table will only be fully updated
after the entire EM text has been scanned.
Yet, the next phase undoubtedly wants
to read the procedure table before it
starts working on the EM text.
Hence there is an ordering problem, which
can be solved easily by putting the
procedure table in a separate file.
Similarly, the data block table is kept
in a file of its own.
.PP
The control flow graphs (CFGs) could be mixed
with the EM text.
Rather, we have chosen to put them
in a separate file too.
The control flow graph file should be regarded as a
file that imposes some structure on the EM-text file,
just as an overhead sheet containing a picture
of a Flow Chart may be put on an overhead sheet
containing statements.
The loop tables are also put in the CFG file.
A loop imposes an extra structure on the
CFGs and hence on the EM text.
So there are four files:
.IP -
the EM-text file
.IP -
the procedure table file
.IP -
the object table file
.IP -
the CFG and loop tables file
.LP
Every table is preceded by its length, in order to
tell where it ends.
The CFG file also contains the number of instructions of
every basic block,
indicating which part of the EM text belongs
to that block.
.DS
.UL syntax
intermediate_code:
object_table_file
proctable_file
em_text_file
cfg_file ;
object_table_file:
LENGTH -- number of objects
object_table ;
proctable_file:
LENGTH -- number of procedures
procedure_table ;
em_text_file:
em_text ;
cfg_file:
{per_proc} ; -- one for every procedure
per_proc:
BLENGTH -- number of basic blocks
LLENGTH -- number of loops
control_flow_graph
looptable ;
.DE

163
doc/ego/ic/ic5 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
.NH 2
The Intermediate Code construction phase
.PP
The first phase of the global optimizer,
called
.UL IC,
constructs a major part of the intermediate code.
To be specific, it produces:
.IP -
the EM text
.IP -
the object table
.IP -
part of the procedure table
.LP
The calling, change and use attributes of a procedure
and all its flags except the external and bodyseen flags
are computed by the next phase (Control Flow phase).
.PP
As explained before,
the intermediate code does not contain
any names of variables or procedures.
The normal identifiers are replaced by identifying
numbers.
Yet, the output of the global optimizer must
contain normal identifiers, as this
output is in Compact Assembly Language format.
We certainly want all externally visible names
to be the same in the input as in the output,
because the optimized EM module may be a library unit,
used by other modules.
IC dumps the names of all procedures and data labels
on two files:
.IP -
the procedure dump file, containing tuples (P_ID, procedure name)
.IP -
the data dump file, containing tuples (D_ID, data label name)
.LP
The names of instruction labels are not dumped,
as they are not visible outside the procedure
in which they are defined.
.PP
The input to IC consists of one or more files.
Each file is either an EM module in Compact Assembly Language
format, or a Unix archive file (library) containing such modules.
IC only extracts those modules from a library that are
needed somehow, just as a linker does.
It is advisable to present as much code
of the EM program as possible to the optimizer,
although it is not required to present the whole program.
If a procedure is called somewhere in the EM text,
but its body (text) is not included in the input,
its bodyseen flag in the procedure table will still
be off.
Whenever such a procedure is called,
we assume the worst case for everything;
it will change and use all variables it has access to,
it will call every procedure etc.
.sp
Similarly, if a data label is used
but not defined, the PSEUDO attribute in its data block
will be set to UNKNOWN.
.NH 3
Implementation
.PP
Part of the code for the EM Peephole Optimizer
.[
staveren peephole toplass
.]
has been used for IC.
Especially the routines that read and unravel
Compact Assembly Language and the identifier
lookup mechanism have been used.
New code was added to recognize objects,
build the object and procedure tables and to
output the intermediate code.
.PP
IC uses singly linked linear lists for both the
procedure and object table.
Hence there are no limits on the size of such
a table (except for the trivial fact that it must fit
in main memory).
Both tables are outputted after all EM code has
been processed.
IC reads the EM text of one entire procedure
at a time,
processes it and appends the modified code to
the EM text file.
EM code is represented internally as a doubly linked linear
list of EM instructions.
.PP
Objects are recognized by looking at the operands
of instructions that reference global data.
If we come across the instructions:
.DS
LDE X+6 -- Load Double External
LAE X+20 -- Load Address External
.DE
we conclude that the data block
preceded by the data label X contains an object
at offset 6 of size twice the word size,
and an object at offset 20 of unknown size.
.sp
A data block entry of the object table is allocated
at the first reference to a data label.
If this reference is a defining occurrence
or a INA pseudo instruction,
the label is not externally visible
.[~[
keizer architecture
.], section 11.1.4.3]
In this case, the external flag of the data block
is turned off.
If the first reference is an applied occurrence
or a EXA pseudo instruction, the flag is set.
We record this information, because the
optimizer may change the order of defining and
applied occurrences.
The INA and EXA pseudos are removed from the EM text.
They may be regenerated by the last phase
of the optimizer.
.sp
Similar rules hold for the procedure table
and the INP and EXP pseudos.
.NH 3
Source files of IC
.PP
The source files of IC consist
of the files ic.c, ic.h and several packages.
.UL ic.h
contains type definitions, macros and
variable declarations that may be used by
ic.c and by every package.
.UL ic.c
contains the definitions of these variables,
the procedure
.UL main
and some high level I/O routines used by main.
.sp
Every package xxx consists of two files.
ic_xxx.h contains type definitions,
macros, variable declarations and
procedure declarations that may be used by
every .c file that includes this .h file.
The file ic_xxx.c provides the
definitions of these variables and
the implementation of the declared procedures.
IC uses the following packages:
.IP lookup: 18
procedures that loop up procedure, data label
and instruction label names; procedures to dump
the procedure and data label names.
.IP lib:
one procedure that gets the next useful input module;
while scanning archives, it skips unnecessary modules.
.IP aux:
several auxiliary routines.
.IP io:
low-level I/O routines that unravel the Compact
Assembly Language.
.IP put:
routines that output the intermediate code
.LP

6
doc/ego/il/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
il1
il2
il3
il4
il5
il6

112
doc/ego/il/il1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Inline substitution
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The Inline Substitution technique (IL)
tries to decrease the overhead associated
with procedure calls (invocations).
During a procedure call, several actions
must be undertaken to set up the right
environment for the called procedure.
.[
johnson calling sequence
.]
On return from the procedure, most of these
effects must be undone.
This entire process introduces significant
costs in execution time as well as
in object code size.
.PP
The inline substitution technique replaces
some of the calls by the modified body of
the called procedure, hence eliminating
the overhead.
Furthermore, as the calling and called procedure
are now integrated, they can be optimized
together, using other techniques of the optimizer.
This often leads to extra opportunities for
optimization
.[
ball predicting effects
.]
.[
carter code generation cacm
.]
.[
scheifler inline cacm
.]
.PP
An inline substitution of a call to a procedure P increases
the size of the program, unless P is very small or P is
called only once.
In the latter case, P can be eliminated.
In practice, procedures that are called only once occur
quite frequently, due to the
introduction of structured programming.
(Carter
.[
carter umi ann arbor
.]
states that almost 50% of the Pascal procedures
he analyzed were called just once).
.PP
Scheifler
.[
scheifler inline cacm
.]
has a more general view of inline substitution.
In his model, the program under consideration is
allowed to grow by a certain amount,
i.e. code size is sacrificed to speed up the program.
The above two cases are just special cases of
his model, obtained by setting the size-change to
(approximately) zero.
He formulates the substitution problem as follows:
.IP
"Given a program, a subset of all invocations,
a maximum program size, and a maximum procedure size,
find a sequence of substitutions that minimizes
the expected execution time."
.LP
Scheifler shows that this problem is NP-complete
.[~[
aho hopcroft ullman analysis algorithms
.], chapter 10]
by reduction to the Knapsack Problem.
Heuristics will have to be used to find a near-optimal
solution.
.PP
In the following chapters we will extend
Scheifler's view and adapt it to the EM Global Optimizer.
We will first describe the transformations that have
to be applied to the EM text when a call is substituted
in line.
Next we will examine in which cases inline substitution
is not possible or desirable.
Heuristics will be developed for
chosing a good sequence of substitutions.
These heuristics make no demand on the user
(such as making profiles
.[
scheifler inline cacm
.]
or giving pragmats
.[~[
ichbiah ada military standard
.], section 6.3.2]),
although the model could easily be extended
to use such information.
Finally, we will discuss the implementation
of the IL phase of the optimizer.
.PP
We will often use the term inline expansion
as a synonym of inline substitution.
.sp 0
The inverse technique of procedure abstraction
(automatic subroutine generation)
.[
shaffer subroutine generation
.]
will not be discussed in this report.

93
doc/ego/il/il2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
.NH 2
Parameters and local variables.
.PP
In the EM calling sequence, the calling procedure
pushes its parameters on the stack
before doing the CAL.
The called routine first saves some
status information on the stack and then
allocates space for its own locals
(also on the stack).
Usually, one special purpose register,
the Local Base (LB) register,
is used to access both the locals and the
parameters.
If memory is highly segmented,
the stack frames of the caller and the callee
may be allocated in different fragments;
an extra Argument Base (AB) register is used
in this case to access the actual parameters.
See 4.2 of
.[
keizer architecture
.]
for further details.
.PP
If a procedure call is expanded in line,
there are two problems:
.IP 1. 3
No stack frame will be allocated for the called procedure;
we must find another place to put its locals.
.IP 2.
The LB register cannot be used to access the actual
parameters;
as the CAL instruction is deleted, the LB will
still point to the local base of the \fIcalling\fR procedure.
.LP
The local variables of the called procedure will
be put in the stack frame of the calling procedure,
just after its own locals.
The size of the stack frame of the
calling procedure will be increased
during its entire lifetime.
Therefore our model will allow a
limit to be set on the number of bytes
for locals that the called procedure may have
(see next section).
.PP
There are several alternatives to access the parameters.
An actual parameter may be any auxiliary expression,
which we will refer to as
the \fIactual parameter expression\fR.
The value of this expression is stored
in a location on the stack (see above),
the \fIparameter location\fR.
.sp 0
The alternatives for accessing parameters are:
.IP -
save the value of the stackpointer at the point of the CAL
in a temporary variable X;
this variable can be used to simulate the AB register, i.e.
parameter locations are accessed via an offset to
the value of X.
.IP -
create a new temporary local variable T for
the parameter (in the stack frame of the caller);
every access to the parameter location must be changed
into an access to T.
.IP -
do not evaluate the actual parameter expression before the call;
instead, substitute this expression for every use of the
parameter location.
.LP
The first method may be expensive if X is not
put in a register.
We will not use this method.
The time required to evaluate and access the
parameters when the second method is used
will not differ much from the normal
calling sequence (i.e. not in line call).
It is not expensive, but there are no
extra savings either.
The third method is essentially the 'by name'
parameter mechanism of Algol60.
If the actual parameter is just a numeric constant,
it is advantageous to use it.
Yet, there are several circumstances
under which it cannot or should not be used.
We will deal with this in the next section.
.sp 0
In general we will use the third method,
if it is possible and desirable.
Such parameters will be called \fIin line parameters\fR.
In all other cases we will use the second method.

164
doc/ego/il/il3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
.NH 2
Feasibility and desirability analysis
.PP
Feasibility and desirability analysis
of in line substitution differ
somewhat from most other techniques.
Usually, much effort is needed to find
a feasible opportunity for optimization
(e.g. a redundant subexpression).
Desirability analysis then checks
if it is really advantageous to do
the optimization.
For IL, opportunities are easy to find.
To see if an in line expansion is
desirable will not be hard either.
Yet, the main problem is to find the most
desirable ones.
We will deal with this problem later and
we will first attend feasibility and
desirability analysis.
.PP
There are several reasons why a procedure invocation
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
.sp
A call to a procedure P cannot be expanded in line
in any of the following cases:
.IP 1. 3
The body of P is not available as EM text.
Clearly, there is no way to do the substitution.
.IP 2.
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
follows the chain of statically enclosing
procedures (via a LXL or LXA instruction)
or follows the chain of dynamically enclosing
procedures (via a DCH).
If the call were expanded in line,
one level would be removed from the chains,
leading to total chaos.
This chaos could be solved by patching up
every LXL, LXA or DCH in all procedures
that could be part of the chains,
but this is hard to implement.
.IP 3.
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
calls a procedure whose body is not
available as EM text.
The unknown procedure may use an LXL, LXA or DCH.
However, in several languages a separately
compiled procedure has no access to the
static or dynamic chain.
In this case
this point does not apply.
.IP 4.
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
uses the LPB instruction, which converts a
local base to an argument base;
as the locals and parameters are stored
in a non-standard way (differing from the
normal EM calling sequence) this instruction
would yield incorrect results.
.IP 5.
The total number of bytes of the parameters
of P is not known.
P may be a procedure with a variable number
of parameters or may have an array of dynamic size
as value parameter.
.LP
It is undesirable to expand a call to a procedure P in line
in any of the following cases:
.IP 1. 3
P is large, i.e. the number of EM instructions
of P exceeds some threshold.
The expanded code would be large too.
Furthermore, several programs in ACK,
including the global optimizer itself,
may run out of memory if they they have to run
in a small address space and are provided
very large procedures.
The threshold may be set to infinite,
in which case this point does not apply.
.IP 2.
P has many local variables.
All these variables would have to be allocated
in the stack frame of the calling procedure.
.PP
If a call may be expanded in line, we have to
decide how to access its parameters.
In the previous section we stated that we would
use in line parameters whenever possible and desirable.
There are several reasons why a parameter
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
.sp
No parameter of a procedure P can be expanded in line,
in any of the following cases:
.IP 1. 3
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
does a store-indirect or a use-indirect (i.e. through
a pointer).
However, if the front-end has generated messages
telling that certain parameters can not be accessed
indirectly, those parameters may be expanded in line.
.IP 2.
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
calls a procedure whose body is not available as EM text.
The unknown procedure may do a store-indirect
or a use-indirect.
However, the same remark about front-end messages
as for 1. holds here.
.IP 3.
The address of a parameter location is taken (via a LAL).
In the normal calling sequence, all parameters
are stored sequentially. If the address of one
parameter location is taken, the address of any
other parameter location can be computed from it.
Hence we must put every parameter in a temporary location;
furthermore, all these locations must be in
the same order as for the normal calling sequence.
.IP 4.
P has overlapping parameters; for example, it uses
the parameter at offset 10 both as a 2 byte and as a 4 byte
parameter.
Such code may be produced by the front ends if
the formal parameter is of some record type
with variants.
.PP
Sometimes a specific parameter must not be expanded in line.
.sp 0
An actual parameter expression cannot be expanded in line
in any of the following cases:
.IP 1. 3
P stores into the parameter location.
Even if the actual parameter expression is a simple
variable, it is incorrect to change the 'store into
formal' into a 'store into actual', because of
the parameter mechanism used.
In Pascal, the following expansion is incorrect:
.DS
procedure p (x:integer);
begin
x := 20;
end;
...
a := 10; a := 10;
p(a); ---> a := 20;
write(a); write(a);
.DE
.IP 2.
P changes any of the operands of the
actual parameter expression.
If the expression is expanded and evaluated
after the operand has been changed,
the wrong value will be used.
.IP 3.
The actual parameter expression has side effects.
It must be evaluated only once,
at the place of the call.
.LP
It is undesirable to expand an actual parameter in line
in the following case:
.IP 1. 3
The parameter is used more than once
(dynamically) and the actual parameter expression
is not just a simple variable or constant.
.LP

132
doc/ego/il/il4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
.NH 2
Heuristic rules
.PP
Using the information described
in the previous section,
we can find all calls that can
be expanded in line, and for which
this expansion is desirable.
In general, we cannot expand all these calls,
so we have to choose the 'best' ones.
With every CAL instruction
that may be expanded, we associate
a \fIpay off\fR,
which expresses how desirable it is
to expand this specific CAL.
.sp
Let Tc denote the portion of EM text involved
in a specific call, i.e. the pushing of the actual
parameter expressions, the CAL itself,
the popping of the parameters and the
pushing of the result (if any, via an LFR).
Let Te denote the EM text that would be obtained
by expanding the call in line.
Let Pc be the original program and Pe the program
with Te substituted for Tc.
The pay off of the CAL depends on two factors:
.IP -
T = execution_time(Pe) - execution_time(Pc)
.IP -
S = code_size(Pe) - code_size(Pc)
.LP
The change in execution time (T) depends on:
.IP -
T1 = execution_time(Te) - execution_time(Tc)
.IP -
N = number of times Te or Tc get executed.
.LP
We assume that T1 will be the same every
time the code gets executed.
This is a reasonable assumption.
(Note that we are talking about one CAL,
not about different calls to the same procedure).
Hence
.DS
T = N * T1
.DE
T1 can be estimated by a careful analysis
of the transformations that are performed.
Below, we list everything that will be
different when a call is expanded in line:
.IP -
The CAL instruction is not executed.
This saves a subroutine jump.
.IP -
The instructions in the procedure prolog
are not executed.
These instructions, generated from the PRO pseudo,
save some machine registers
(including the old LB), set the new LB and allocate space
for the locals of the called routine.
The savings may be less if there are no
locals to allocate.
.IP -
In line parameters are not evaluated before the call
and are not pushed on the stack.
.IP -
All remaining parameters are stored in local variables,
instead of being pushed on the stack.
.IP -
If the number of parameters is nonzero,
the ASP instruction after the CAL is not executed.
.IP -
Every reference to an in line parameter is
substituted by the parameter expression.
.IP -
RET (return) instructions are replaced by
BRA (branch) instructions.
If the called procedure 'falls through'
(i.e. it has only one RET, at the end of its code),
even the BRA is not needed.
.IP -
The LFR (fetch function result) is not executed
.PP
Besides these changes, which are caused directly by IL,
other changes may occur as IL influences other optimization
techniques, such as Register Allocation and Constant Propagation.
Our heuristic rules do not take into account the quite
inpredictable effects on Register Allocation.
It does, however, favour calls that have numeric \fIconstants\fR
as parameter; especially the constant "0" as an inline
parameter gets high scores,
as further optimizations may often be possible.
.PP
It cannot be determined statically how often a CAL instruction gets
executed.
We will use \fIloop nesting\fR information here.
The nesting level of the loop in which
the CAL appears (if any) will be used as an
indication for the number of times it gets executed.
.PP
Based on all these facts,
the pay off of a call will be computed.
The following model was developed empirically.
Assume procedure P calls procedure Q.
The call takes place in basic block B.
.DS
ZP = # zero parameters
CP = # constant parameters - ZP
LN = Loop Nesting level (0 if outside any loop)
F = \fIif\fR # formal parameters of Q > 0 \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
FT = \fIif\fR Q falls through \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
S = size(Q) - 1 - # inline_parameters - F
L = \fIif\fR # local variables of P > 0 \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR -1
A = CP + 2 * ZP
N = \fIif\fR LN=0 and P is never called from a loop \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR (LN+1)**2
FM = \fIif\fR B is a firm block \fIthen\fR 2 \fIelse\fR 1
pay_off = (100/S + FT + F + L + A) * N * FM
.DE
S stands for the size increase of the program,
which is slightly less than the size of Q.
The size of a procedure is taken to be its number
of (non-pseudo) EM instructions.
The terms "loop nesting level" and "firm" were defined
in the chapter on the Intermediate Code (section "loop tables").
If a call is not inside a loop and the calling procedure
is itself never called from a loop (transitively),
then the call will probably be executed at most once.
Such a call is never expanded in line (its pay off is zero).
If the calling procedure doesn't have local variables, a penalty (L)
is introduced, as it will most likely get local variables if the
call gets expanded.

440
doc/ego/il/il5 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,440 @@
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
A major factor in the implementation
of Inline Substitution is the requirement
not to use an excessive amount of memory.
IL essentially analyzes the entire program;
it makes decisions based on which procedure calls
appear in the whole program.
Yet, because of the memory restriction, it is
not feasible to read the entire program
in main memory.
To solve this problem, the IL phase has been
split up into three subphases that are executed sequentially:
.IP 1.
analyze every procedure; see how it accesses its parameters;
simultaneously collect all calls
appearing in the whole program an put them
in a \fIcall-list\fR.
.IP 2.
use the call-list and decide which calls will be substituted
in line.
.IP 3.
take the decisions of subphase 2 and modify the
program accordingly.
.LP
Subphases 1 and 3 scan the input program; only
subphase 3 modifies it.
It is essential that the decisions can be made
in subphase 2
without using the input program,
provided that subphase 1 puts enough information
in the call-list.
Subphase 2 keeps the entire call-list in main memory
and repeatedly scans it, to
find the next best candidate for expansion.
.PP
We will specify the
data structures used by IL before
describing the subphases.
.NH 3
Data structures
.NH 4
The procedure table
.PP
In subphase 1 information is gathered about every procedure
and added to the procedure table.
This information is used by the heuristic rules.
A proctable entry for procedure p has
the following extra information:
.IP -
is it allowed to substitute an invocation of p in line?
.IP -
is it allowed to put any parameter of such a call in line?
.IP -
the size of p (number of EM instructions)
.IP -
does p 'fall through'?
.IP -
a description of the formal parameters that p accesses; this information
is obtained by looking at the code of p. For every parameter f,
we record:
.RS
.IP -
the offset of f
.IP -
the type of f (word, double word, pointer)
.IP -
may the corresponding actual parameter be put in line?
.IP -
is f ever accessed indirectly?
.IP -
if f used: never, once or more than once?
.RE
.IP -
the number of times p is called (see below)
.IP -
the file address of its call-count information (see below).
.LP
.NH 4
Call-count information
.PP
As a result of Inline Substitution, some procedures may
become useless, because all their invocations have been
substituted in line.
One of the tasks of IL is to keep track which
procedures are no longer called.
Note that IL is especially keen on procedures that are
called only once
(possibly as a result of expanding all other calls to it).
So we want to know how many times a procedure
is called \fIduring\fR Inline Substitution.
It is not good enough to compute this
information afterwards.
The task is rather complex, because
the number of times a procedure is called
varies during the entire process:
.IP 1.
If a call to p is substituted in line,
the number of calls to p gets decremented by 1.
.IP 2.
If a call to p is substituted in line,
and p contains n calls to q, then the number of calls to q
gets incremented by n.
.IP 3.
If a procedure p is removed (because it is no
longer called) and p contains n calls to q,
then the number of calls to q gets decremented by n.
.LP
(Note that p may be the same as q, if p is recursive).
.sp 0
So we actually want to have the following information:
.DS
NRCALL(p,q) = number of call to q appearing in p,
for all procedures p and q that may be put in line.
.DE
This information, called \fIcall-count information\fR is
computed by the first subphase.
It is stored in a file.
It is represented as a number of lists, rather than as
a (very sparse) matrix.
Every procedure has a list of (proc,count) pairs,
telling which procedures it calls, and how many times.
The file address of its call-count list is stored
in its proctable entry.
Whenever this information is needed, it is fetched from
the file, using direct access.
The proctable entry also contains the number of times
a procedure is called, at any moment.
.NH 4
The call-list
.PP
The call-list is the major data structure use by IL.
Every item of the list describes one procedure call.
It contains the following attributes:
.IP -
the calling procedure (caller)
.IP -
the called procedure (callee)
.IP -
identification of the CAL instruction (sequence number)
.IP -
the loop nesting level; our heuristic rules appreciate
calls inside a loop (or even inside a loop nested inside
another loop, etc.) more than other calls
.IP -
the actual parameter expressions involved in the call;
for every actual, we record:
.RS
.IP -
the EM code of the expression
.IP -
the number of bytes of its result (size)
.IP -
an indication if the actual may be put in line
.RE
.LP
The structure of the call-list is rather complex.
Whenever a call is expanded in line, new calls
will suddenly appear in the program,
that were not contained in the original body
of the calling subroutine.
These calls are inherited from the called procedure.
We will refer to these invocations as \fInested calls\fR
(see Fig. 5.1).
.DS
procedure p is
begin .
a(); .
b(); .
end;
procedure r is procedure r is
begin begin
x(); x();
p(); -- in line a(); -- nested call
y(); b(); -- nested call
end; y();
end;
Fig. 5.1 Example of nested procedure calls
.DE
Nested calls may subsequently be put in line too
(probably resulting in a yet deeper nesting level, etc.).
So the call-list does not always reflect the source program,
but changes dynamically, as decisions are made.
If a call to p is expanded, all calls appearing in p
will be added to the call-list.
.sp 0
A convenient and elegant way to represent
the call-list is to use a LISP-like list.
.[
poel lisp trac
.]
Calls that appear at the same level
are linked in the CDR direction. If a call C
to a procedure p is expanded,
all calls appearing in p are put in a sub-list
of C, i.e. in its CAR.
In the example above, before the decision
to expand the call to p is made, the
call-list of procedure r looks like:
.DS
(call-to-x, call-to-p, call-to-y)
.DE
After the decision, it looks like:
.DS
(call-to-x, (call-to-p*, call-to-a, call-to-b), call-to-y)
.DE
The call to p is marked, because it has been
substituted.
Whenever IL wants to traverse the call-list of some procedure,
it uses the well-known LISP technique of
recursion in the CAR direction and
iteration in the CDR direction
(see page 1.19-2 of
.[
poel lisp trac
.]
).
All list traversals look like:
.DS
traverse(list)
{
for (c = first(list); c != 0; c = CDR(c)) {
if (c is marked) {
traverse(CAR(c));
} else {
do something with c
}
}
}
.DE
The entire call-list consists of a number of LISP-like lists,
one for every procedure.
The proctable entry of a procedure contains a pointer
to the beginning of the list.
.NH 3
The first subphase: procedure analysis
.PP
The tasks of the first subphase are to determine
several attributes of every procedure
and to construct the basic call-list,
i.e. without nested calls.
The size of a procedure is determined
by simply counting its EM instructions.
Pseudo instructions are skipped.
A procedure does not 'fall through' if its CFG
contains a basic block
that is not the last block of the CFG and
that ends on a RET instruction.
The formal parameters of a procedure are determined
by inspection of
its code.
.PP
The call-list in constructed by looking at all CAL instructions
appearing in the program.
The call-list should only contain calls to procedures
that may be put in line.
This fact is only known if the procedure was
analyzed earlier.
If a call to a procedure p appears in the program
before the body of p,
the call will always be put in the call-list.
If p is later found to be unsuitable,
the call will be removed from the list by the
second subphase.
.PP
An important issue is the recognition
of the actual parameter expressions of the call.
The front ends produces messages telling how many
bytes of formal parameters every procedure accesses.
(If there is no such message for a procedure, it
cannot be put in line).
The actual parameters together must account for
the same number of bytes.A recursive descent parser is used
to parse side-effect free EM expressions.
It uses a table and some
auxiliary routines to determine
how many bytes every EM instruction pops from the stack
and how many bytes it pushes onto the stack.
These numbers depend on the EM instruction, its argument,
and the wordsize and pointersize of the target machine.
Initially, the parser has to recognize the
number of bytes specified in the formals-message,
say N.
Assume the first instruction before the CAL pops S bytes
and pushes R bytes.
If R > N, too many bytes are recognized
and the parser fails.
Else, it calls itself recursively to recognize the
S bytes used as operand of the instruction.
If it succeeds in doing so, it continues with the next instruction,
i.e. the first instruction before the code recognized by
the recursive call, to recognize N-R more bytes.
The result is a number of EM instructions that collectively push N bytes.
If an instruction is come across that has side-effects
(e.g. a store or a procedure call) or of which R and S cannot
be computed statically (e.g. a LOS), it fails.
.sp 0
Note that the parser traverses the code backwards.
As EM code is essentially postfix code, the parser works top down.
.PP
If the parser fails to recognize the parameters, the call will not
be substituted in line.
If the parameters can be determined, they still have to
match the formal parameters of the called procedure.
This check is performed by the second subphase; it cannot be
done here, because it is possible that the called
procedure has not been analyzed yet.
.PP
The entire call-list is written to a file,
to be processed by the second subphase.
.NH 3
The second subphase: making decisions
.PP
The task of the second subphase is quite easy
to understand.
It reads the call-list file,
builds an incore call-list and deletes every
call that may not be expanded in line (either because the called
procedure may not be put in line, or because the actual parameters
of the call do not match the formal parameters of the called procedure).
It assigns a \fIpay-off\fR to every call,
indicating how desirable it is to expand it.
.PP
The subphase repeatedly scans the call-list and takes
the call with the highest ratio.
The chosen one gets marked,
and the call-list is extended with the nested calls,
as described above.
These nested calls are also assigned a ratio,
and will be considered too during the next scans.
.sp 0
After every decision the number of times
every procedure is called is updated, using
the call-count information.
Meanwhile, the subphase keeps track of the amount of space left
available.
If all space is used, or if there are no more calls left to
be expanded, it exits this loop.
Finally, calls to procedures that are called only
once are also chosen.
.PP
The actual parameters of a call are only needed by
this subphase to assign a ratio to a call.
To save some space, these actuals are not kept in main memory.
They are removed after the call has been read and a ratio
has been assigned to it.
So this subphase works with \fIabstracts\fR of calls.
After all work has been done,
the actual parameters of the chosen calls are retrieved
from a file,
as they are needed by the transformation subphase.
.NH 3
The third subphase: doing transformations
.PP
The third subphase makes the actual modifications to
the EM text.
It is directed by the decisions made in the previous subphase,
as expressed via the call-list.
The call-list read by this subphase contains
only calls that were selected for expansion.
The list is ordered in the same way as the EM text,
i.e. if a call C1 appears before a call C2 in the call-list,
C1 also appears before C2 in the EM text.
So the EM text is traversed linearly,
the calls that have to be substituted are determined
and the modifications are made.
If a procedure is come across that is no longer needed,
it is simply not written to the output EM file.
The substitution of a call takes place in distinct steps:
.IP "change the calling sequence" 7
.sp 0
The actual parameter expressions are changed.
Parameters that are put in line are removed.
All remaining ones must store their result in a
temporary local variable, rather than
push it on the stack.
The CAL instruction and any ASP (to pop actual parameters)
or LFR (to fetch the result of a function)
are deleted.
.IP "fetch the text of the called procedure"
.sp 0
Direct disk access is used to to read the text of the
called procedure.
The file offset is obtained from the proctable entry.
.IP "allocate bytes for locals and temporaries"
.sp 0
The local variables of the called procedure will be put in the
stack frame of the calling procedure.
The same applies to any temporary variables
that hold the result of parameters
that were not put in line.
The proctable entry of the caller is updated.
.IP "put a label after the CAL"
.sp 0
If the called procedure contains a RET (return) instruction
somewhere in the middle of its text (i.e. it does
not fall through), the RET must be changed into
a BRA (branch), to jump over the
remainder of the text.
This label is not needed if the called
procedure falls through.
.IP "copy the text of the called procedure and modify it"
.sp 0
References to local variables of the called routine
and to parameters that are not put in line
are changed to refer to the
new local of the caller.
References to in line parameters are replaced
by the actual parameter expression.
Returns (RETs) are either deleted or
replaced by a BRA.
Messages containing information about local
variables or parameters are changed.
Global data declarations and the PRO and END pseudos
are removed.
Instruction labels and references to them are
changed to make sure they do not have the
same identifying number as
labels in the calling procedure.
.IP "insert the modified text"
.sp 0
The pseudos of the called procedure are put after the pseudos
of the calling procedure.
The real text of the callee is put at
the place where the CAL was.
.IP "take care of nested substitutions"
.sp 0
The expanded procedure may contain calls that
have to be expanded too (nested calls).
If the descriptor of this call contains actual
parameter expressions,
the code of the expressions has to be changed
the same way as the code of the callee was changed.
Next, the entire process of finding CALs and doing
the substitutions is repeated recursively.
.LP

27
doc/ego/il/il6 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
.NH 2
Source files of IL
.PP
The sources of IL are in the following files
and packages (the prefixes 1_, 2_ and 3_ refer to the three subphases):
.IP il.h: 14
declarations of global variables and
data structures
.IP il.c:
the routine main; the driving routines of the three subphases
.IP 1_anal:
contains a subroutine that analyzes a procedure
.IP 1_cal:
contains a subroutine that analyzes a call
.IP 1_aux:
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 1
.IP 2_aux:
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 2
.IP 3_subst:
the driving routine for doing the substitution
.IP 3_change:
lower level routines that do certain modifications
.IP 3_aux:
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 3
.IP aux
implements auxiliary procedures used by several subphases.
.LP

3
doc/ego/intro/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
head
intro1
tail

7
doc/ego/intro/head Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
.ND
.ll 80m
.nr LL 80m
.nr tl 78m
.tr ~
.ds >. .
.ds [. " \[

79
doc/ego/intro/intro1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
.TL
The design and implementation of
the EM Global Optimizer
.AU
H.E. Bal
.AI
Vrije Universiteit
Wiskundig Seminarium, Amsterdam
.AB
The EM Global Optimizer is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
a toolkit for making retargetable compilers.
It optimizes the intermediate code common to all compilers of
the toolkit (EM),
so it can be used for all programming languages and
all processors supported by the kit.
.PP
The optimizer is based on well-understood concepts like
control flow analysis and data flow analysis.
It performs the following optimizations:
Inline Substitution, Strength Reduction, Common Subexpression Elimination,
Stack Pollution, Cross Jumping, Branch Optimization, Copy Propagation,
Constant Propagation, Dead Code Elimination and Register Allocation.
.PP
This report describes the design of the optimizer and several
of its implementation issues.
.AE
.bp
.NH 1
Introduction
.PP
.FS
This work was supported by the
Stichting Technische Wetenschappen (STW)
under grant VWI00.0001.
.FE
The EM Global Optimizer is part of a software toolkit
for making production-quality retargetable compilers.
This toolkit,
called the Amsterdam Compiler Kit
.[
tanenbaum toolkit rapport
.]
.[
tanenbaum toolkit cacm
.]
runs under the Unix*
.FS
*Unix is a Trademark of Bell Laboratories
.FE
operating system.
.sp 0
The main design philosophy of the toolkit is to use
a language- and machine-independent
intermediate code, called EM.
.[
keizer architecture
.]
The basic compilation process can be split up into
two parts.
A language-specific front end translates the source program into EM.
A machine-specific back end transforms EM to assembly code
of the target machine.
.PP
The global optimizer is an optional phase of the
compilation process, and can be used to obtain
machine code of a higher quality.
The optimizer transforms EM-code to better EM-code,
so it comes between the front end and the back end.
It can be used with any combination of languages
and machines, as far as they are supported by
the compiler kit.
.PP
This report describes the design of the
global optimizer and several of its
implementation issues.
Measurements can be found in.
.[
bal tanenbaum global
.]

3
doc/ego/intro/tail Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
.[
$LIST$
.]

1
doc/ego/lv/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
lv1

95
doc/ego/lv/lv1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Live-Variable analysis
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The "Live-Variable analysis" optimization technique (LV)
performs some code improvements and computes information that may be
used by subsequent optimizations.
The main task of this phase is the
computation of \fIlive-variable information\fR.
.[~[
aho compiler design
.] section 14.4]
A variable A is said to be \fIdead\fR at some point p of the
program text, if on no path in the control flow graph
from p to a RET (return), A can be used before being changed;
else A is said to be \fIlive\fR.
.PP
A statement of the form
.DS
VARIABLE := EXPRESSION
.DE
is said to be dead if the left hand side variable is dead just after
the statement and the right hand side expression has no
side effects (i.e. it doesn't change any variable).
Such a statement can be eliminated entirely.
Dead code will seldom be present in the original program,
but it may be the result of earlier optimizations,
such as copy propagation.
.PP
Live-variable information is passed to other phases via
messages in the EM code.
Live/dead messages are generated at points in the EM text where
variables become dead or live.
This information is especially useful for the Register
Allocation phase.
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
The implementation uses algorithm 14.6 of.
.[
aho compiler design
.]
First two sets DEF and USE are computed for every basic block b:
.IP DEF(b) 9
the set of all variables that are assigned a value in b before
being used
.IP USE(b) 9
the set of all variables that may be used in b before being changed.
.LP
(So variables that may, but need not, be used resp. changed via a procedure
call or through a pointer are included in USE but not in DEF).
The next step is to compute the sets IN and OUT :
.IP IN[b] 9
the set of all variables that are live at the beginning of b
.IP OUT[b] 9
the set of all variables that are live at the end of b
.LP
IN and OUT can be computed for all blocks simultaneously by solving the
data flow equations:
.DS
(1) IN[b] = OUT[b] - DEF[b] + USE[b]
[2] OUT[b] = IN[s1] + ... + IN[sn] ;
where SUCC[b] = {s1, ... , sn}
.DE
The equations are solved by a similar algorithm as for
the Use Definition equations (see previous chapter).
.PP
Finally, each basic block is visited in turn to remove its dead code
and to emit the live/dead messages.
Every basic block b is traversed from its last
instruction backwards to the beginning of b.
Initially, all variables that are dead at the end
of b are marked dead. All others are marked live.
If we come across an assignment to a variable X that
was marked live, a live-message is put after the
assignment and X is marked dead;
if X was marked dead, the assignment may be removed, provided that
the right hand side expression contains no side effects.
If we come across a use of a variable X that
was marked dead, a dead-message is put after the
use and X is marked live.
So at any point, the mark of X tells whether X is
live or dead immediately before that point.
A message is also generated at the start of a basic block
for every variable that was live at the end of the (textually)
previous block, but dead at the entry of this block, or v.v.
.PP
Only local variables are considered.
This significantly reduces the memory needed by this phase,
eases the implementation and is hardly less efficient than
considering all variables.
(Note that it is very hard to prove that an assignment to
a global variable is dead).

1
doc/ego/ov/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
ov1

371
doc/ego/ov/ov1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Overview of the global optimizer
.NH 2
The ACK compilation process
.PP
The EM Global Optimizer is one of three optimizers that are
part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit (ACK).
The phases of ACK are:
.IP 1.
A Front End translates a source program to EM
.IP 2.
The Peephole Optimizer
.[
tanenbaum staveren peephole toplass
.]
reads EM code and produces 'better' EM code.
It performs a number of optimizations (mostly peephole
optimizations)
such as constant folding, strength reduction and unreachable code
elimination.
.IP 3.
The Global Optimizer further improves the EM code.
.IP 4.
The Code Generator transforms EM to assembly code
of the target computer.
.IP 5.
The Target Optimizer improves the assembly code.
.IP 6.
An Assembler/Loader generates an executable file.
.LP
For a more extensive overview of the ACK compilation process,
we refer to.
.[
tanenbaum toolkit rapport
.]
.[
tanenbaum toolkit cacm
.]
.PP
The input of the Global Optimizer may consist of files and
libraries.
Every file or module in the library must contain EM code in
Compact Assembly Language format.
.[~[
tanenbaum machine architecture
.], section 11.2]
The output consists of one such EM file.
The input files and libraries together need not
constitute an entire program,
although as much of the program as possible should be supplied.
The more information about the program the optimizer
gets, the better its output code will be.
.PP
The Global Optimizer is language- and machine-independent,
i.e. it can be used for all languages and machines supported by ACK.
Yet, it puts some unavoidable restrictions on the EM code
produced by the Front End (see below).
It must have some knowledge of the target machine.
This knowledge is expressed in a machine description table
which is passed as argument to the optimizer.
This table does not contain very detailed information about the
target (such as its instruction set and addressing modes).
.NH 2
The EM code
.PP
The definition of EM, the intermediate code of all ACK compilers,
is given in a separate document.
.[
tanenbaum machine architecture
.]
We will only discuss some features of EM that are most relevant
to the Global Optimizer.
.PP
EM is the assembly code of a virtual \fIstack machine\fR.
All operations are performed on the top of the stack.
For example, the statement "A := B + 3" may be expressed in EM as:
.DS
LOL -4 -- push local variable B
LOC 3 -- push constant 3
ADI 2 -- add two 2-byte items on top of
-- the stack and push the result
STL -2 -- pop A
.DE
So EM is essentially a \fIpostfix\fR code.
.PP
EM has a rich instruction set, containing several arithmetic
and logical operators.
It also contains special-case instructions (such as INCrement).
.PP
EM has \fIglobal\fR (\fIexternal\fR) variables, accessible
by all procedures and \fIlocal\fR variables, accessible by a few
(nested) procedures.
The local variables of a lexically enclosing procedure may
be accessed via a \fIstatic link\fR.
EM has instructions to follow the static chain.
There are EM instruction to allow a procedure
to access its local variables directly (such as LOL and STL above).
Local variables are referenced via an offset in the stack frame
of the procedure, rather than by their names (e.g. -2 and -4 above).
The EM code does not contain the (source language) type
of the variables.
.PP
All structured statements in the source program are expressed in
low level jump instructions.
Besides conditional and unconditional branch instructions, there are
two case instructions (CSA and CSB),
to allow efficient translation of case statements.
.NH 2
Requirements on the EM input
.PP
As the optimizer should be useful for all languages,
it clearly should not put severe restrictions on the EM code
of the input.
There is, however, one immovable requirement:
it must be possible to determine the \fIflow of control\fR of the
input program.
As virtually all global optimizations are based on control flow information,
the optimizer would be totally powerless without it.
For this reason we restrict the usage of the case jump instructions (CSA/CSB)
of EM.
Such an instruction is always called with the address of a case descriptor
on top the the stack.
.[~[
tanenbaum machine architecture
.] section 7.4]
This descriptor contains the labels of all possible
destinations of the jump.
We demand that all case descriptors are allocated in a global
data fragment of type ROM, i.e. the case descriptors
may not be modifyable.
Furthermore, any case instruction should be immediately preceded by
a LAE (Load Address External) instruction, that loads the
address of the descriptor,
so the descriptor can be uniquely identified.
.PP
The optimizer will work improperly if the user deceives the control flow.
We will give two methods to do this.
.PP
In "C" the notorious library routines "setjmp" and "longjmp"
.[
unix programmer's manual
.]
may be used to jump out of a procedure,
but can also be used for a number of other stuffy purposes,
for example, to create an extra entry point in a loop.
.DS
while (condition) {
....
setjmp(buf);
...
}
...
longjmp(buf);
.DE
The invocation to longjmp actually is a jump to the place of
the last call to setjmp with the same argument (buf).
As the calls to setjmp and longjmp are indistinguishable from
normal procedure calls, the optimizer will not see the danger.
No need to say that several loop optimizations will behave
unexpectedly when presented with such pathological input.
.PP
Another way to deceive the flow of control is
by using exception handling routines.
Ada*
.FS
* Ada is a registered trademark of the U.S. Government
(Ada Joint Program Office).
.FE
has clearly recognized the dangers of exception handling,
but other languages (such as PL/I) have not.
.[
ada rationale
.]
.PP
The optimizer will be more effective if the EM input contains
some extra information about the source program.
Especially the \fIregister message\fR is very important.
These messages indicate which local variables may never be
accessed indirectly.
Most optimizations benefit significantly by this information.
.PP
The Inline Substitution technique needs to know how many bytes
of formal parameters every procedure accesses.
Only calls to procedures for which the EM code contains this information
will be substituted in line.
.NH 2
Structure of the optimizer
.PP
The Global Optimizer is organized as a number of \fIphases\fR,
each one performing some task.
The main structure is as follows:
.IP IC 6
the Intermediate Code construction phase transforms EM into the
intermediate code (ic) of the optimizer
.IP CF
the Control Flow phase extends the ic with control flow
information and interprocedural information
.IP OPTs
zero or more optimization phases, each one performing one or
more related optimizations
.IP CA
the Compact Assembly phase generates Compact Assembly Language EM code
out of ic.
.LP
.PP
An important issue in the design of a global optimizer is the
interaction between optimization techniques.
It is often advantageous to combine several techniques in
one algorithm that takes into account all interactions between them.
Ideally, one single algorithm should be developed that does
all optimizations simultaneously and deals with all possible interactions.
In practice, such an algorithm is still far out of reach.
Instead some rather ad hoc (albeit important) combinations are chosen,
such as Common Subexpression Elimination and Register Allocation.
.[
prabhala sethi common subexpressions
.]
.[
sethi ullman optimal code
.]
.PP
In the Em Global Optimizer there is one separate algorithm for
every technique.
Note that this does not mean that all techniques are independent
of each other.
.PP
In principle, the optimization phases can be run in any order;
a phase may even be run more than once.
However, the following rules should be obeyed:
.IP -
the Live Variable analysis phase (LV) must be run prior to
Register Allocation (RA), as RA uses information outputted by LV.
.IP -
RA should be the last phase; this is a consequence of the way
the interface between RA and the Code Generator is defined.
.LP
The ordering of the phases has significant impact on
the quality of the produced code.
In
.[
wulf overview production quality carnegie-mellon
.]
two kinds of phase ordering problems are distinguished.
If two techniques A and B both take away opportunities of each other,
there is a "negative" ordering problem.
If, on the other hand, both A and B introduce new optimization
opportunities for each other, the problem is called "positive".
In the Global Optimizer the following interactions must be
taken into account:
.IP -
Inline Substitution (IL) may create new opportunities for most
other techniques, so it should be run as early as possible
.IP -
Use Definition analysis (UD) may introduce opportunities for LV.
.IP -
Strength Reduction may create opportunities for UD
.LP
The optimizer has a default phase ordering, which can
be changed by the user.
.NH 2
Structure of this document
.PP
The remaining chapters of this document each describe one
phase of the optimizer.
For every phase, we describe its task, its design,
its implementation, and its source files.
The latter two sections are intended to aid the
maintenance of the optimizer and
can be skipped by the initial reader.
.NH 2
References
.PP
There are very
few modern textbooks on optimization.
Chapters 12, 13, and 14 of
.[
aho compiler design
.]
are a good introduction to the subject.
Wulf et. al.
.[
wulf optimizing compiler
.]
describe one specific optimizing (Bliss) compiler.
Anklam et. al.
.[
anklam vax-11
.]
discuss code generation and optimization in
compilers for one specific machine (a Vax-11).
Kirchgaesner et. al.
.[
optimizing ada compiler
.]
present a brief description of many
optimizations; the report also contains a lengthy (over 60 pages)
bibliography.
.PP
The number of articles on optimization is quite impressive.
The Lowrey and Medlock paper on the Fortran H compiler
.[
object code optimization
.]
is a classical one.
Other papers on global optimization are.
.[
faiman optimizing pascal
.]
.[
perkins sites
.]
.[
harrison general purpose optimizing
.]
.[
morel partial redundancies
.]
.[
Mintz global optimizer
.]
Freudenberger
.[
freudenberger setl optimizer
.]
describes an optimizer for a Very High Level Language (SETL).
The Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler (PQCC) project uses
very sophisticated compiler techniques, as described in.
.[
wulf overview ieee
.]
.[
wulf overview carnegie-mellon
.]
.[
wulf machine-relative
.]
.PP
Several Ph.D. theses are dedicated to optimization.
Davidson
.[
davidson simplifying
.]
outlines a machine-independent peephole optimizer that
improves assembly code.
Katkus
.[
katkus
.]
describes how efficient programs can be obtained at little cost by
optimizing only a small part of a program.
Photopoulos
.[
photopoulos mixed code
.]
discusses the idea of generating interpreted intermediate code as well
as assembly code, to obtain programs that are both small and fast.
Shaffer
.[
shaffer automatic
.]
describes the theory of automatic subroutine generation.
.]
Leverett
.[
leverett register allocation compilers
.]
deals with register allocation in the PQCC compilers.
.PP
References to articles about specific optimization techniques
will be given in later chapters.

4
doc/ego/ra/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
ra1
ra2
ra3
ra4

33
doc/ego/ra/ra1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Register Allocation
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The efficient usage of the general purpose registers
of the target machine plays a key role in any optimizing compiler.
This subject, often referred to as \fIRegister Allocation\fR,
has great impact on both the code generator and the
optimizing part of such a compiler.
The code generator needs registers for at least the evaluation of
arithmetic expressions;
the optimizer uses the registers to decrease the access costs
of frequently used entities (such as variables).
The design of an optimizing compiler must pay great
attention to the cooperation of optimization, register allocation
and code generation.
.PP
Register allocation has received much attention in literature (see
.[
leverett register allocation compilers
.]
.[
chaitin register coloring
.]
.[
freiburghouse usage counts
.]
and
.[~[
sites register
.]]).

139
doc/ego/ra/ra2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
.NH 2
Usage of registers in ACK compilers
.PP
We will first describe the major design decisions
of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
as far as they concern register allocation.
Subsequently we will outline
the role of the Global Optimizer in the register
allocation process and the interface
between the code generator and the optimizer.
.NH 3
Usage of registers without the intervention of the Global Optimizer
.PP
Registers are used for two purposes:
.IP 1.
for the evaluation of arithmetic expressions
.IP 2.
to hold local variables, for the duration of the procedure they
are local to.
.LP
It is essential to note that no translation part of the compilers,
except for the code generator, knows anything at all
about the register set of the target computer.
Hence all decisions about registers are ultimately made by
the code generator.
Earlier phases of a compiler can only \fIadvise\fR the code generator.
.PP
The code generator splits the register set into two:
a fixed part for the evaluation of expressions (called \fIscratch\fR
registers) and a fixed part to store local variables.
This partitioning, which depends only on the target computer, significantly
reduces the complexity of register allocation, at the penalty
of some loss of code quality.
.PP
The code generator has some (machine-dependent) knowledge of the access costs
of memory locations and registers and of the costs of saving and
restoring registers. (Registers are always saved by the \fIcalled\fR
procedure).
This knowledge is expressed in a set of procedures for each target machine.
The code generator also knows how many registers there are and of
which type they are.
A register can be of type \fIpointer\fR, \fIfloating point\fR
or \fIgeneral\fR.
.PP
The front ends of the compilers determine which local variables may
be put in a register;
such a variable may never be accessed indirectly (i.e. through a pointer).
The front end also determines the types and sizes of these variables.
The type can be any of the register types or the type \fIloop variable\fR,
which denotes a general-typed variable that is used as loop variable
in a for-statement.
All this information is collected in a \fIregister message\fR in
the EM code.
Such a message is a pseudo EM instruction.
This message also contains a \fIscore\fR field,
indicating how desirable it is to put this variable in a register.
A front end may assign a high score to a variable if it
was declared as a register variable (which is only possible in
some languages, such as "C").
Any compiler phase before the code generator may change this score field,
if it has reason to do so.
The code generator bases its decisions on the information contained
in the register message, most notably on the score.
.PP
If the global optimizer is not used,
the score fields are set by the Peephole Optimizer.
This optimizer simply counts the number of occurrences
of every local (register) variable and adds this count
to the score provided by the front end.
In this way a simple, yet quite effective
register allocation scheme is achieved.
.NH 3
The role of the Global Optimizer
.PP
The Global Optimizer essentially tries to improve the scheme
outlined above.
It uses the following principles for this purpose:
.IP -
Entities are not always assigned a register for the duration
of an entire procedure; smaller regions of the program text
may be considered too.
.IP -
several variables may be put in the same register simultaneously,
provided at most one of them is live at any point.
.IP -
besides local variables, other entities (such as constants and addresses of
variables and procedures) may be put in a register.
.IP -
more accurate cost estimates are used.
.LP
To perform its task, the optimizer must have some
knowledge of the target machine.
.NH 3
The interface between the register allocator and the code generator
.PP
The RA phase of the optimizer must somehow be able to express its
decisions.
Such decisions may look like: 'put constant 1283 in a register from
line 12 to line 40'.
To be precise, RA must be able to tell the code generator to:
.IP -
initialize a register with some value
.IP -
update an entity from a register
.IP -
replace all occurrences of an entity in a certain region
of text by a reference to the register.
.LP
At least three problems occur here: the code generator is only used to
put local variables in registers,
it only assigns a register to a variable for the duration of an entire
procedure and it is not used to have some earlier compiler phase
make all the decisions.
.PP
All problems are solved by one mechanism, that involves no changes
to the code generator.
With every (non-scratch) register R that will be used in
a procedure P, we associate a new variable T, local to P.
The size of T is the same as the size of R.
A register message is generated for T with an exceptionally high score.
The scores of all original register messages are set to zero.
Consequently, the code generator will always assign precisely those new
variables to a register.
If the optimizer wants to put some entity, say the constant 1283, in
a register, it emits the code "T := 1283" and replaces all occurrences
of '1283' by T.
Similarly, it can put the address of a procedure in T and replace all
calls to that procedure by indirect calls.
Furthermore, it can put several different entities in T (and thus in R)
during the lifetime of P.
.PP
In principle, the code generated by the optimizer in this way would
always be valid EM code, even if the optimizer would be presented
a totally wrong description of the target computer register set.
In practice, it would be a waste of data as well as text space to
allocate memory for these new variables, as they will always be assigned
a register (in the correct order of events).
Hence, no memory locations are allocated for them.
For this reason they are called pseudo local variables.

383
doc/ego/ra/ra3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
.NH 2
The register allocation phase
.PP
.NH 3
Overview
.PP
The RA phase deals with one procedure at a time.
For every procedure, it first determines which entities
may be put in a register. Such an entity
is called an \fIitem\fR.
For every item it decides during which parts of the procedure it
might be assigned a register.
Such a region is called a \fItimespan\fR.
For any item, several (possibly overlapping) timespans may
be considered.
A pair (item,timespan) is called an \fIallocation\fR.
If the items of two allocations are both live at some
point of time in the intersections of their timespans,
these allocations are said to be \fIrivals\fR of each other,
as they cannot be assigned the same register.
The rivals-set of every allocation is computed.
Next, the gains of assigning a register to an allocation are estimated,
for every allocation.
With all this information, decisions are made which allocations
to store in which registers (\fIpacking\fR).
Finally, the EM text is transformed to reflect these decisions.
.NH 3
The item recognition subphase
.PP
RA tries to put the following entities in a register:
.IP -
a local variable for which a register message was found
.IP -
the address of a local variable for which no
register message was found
.IP -
the address of a global variable
.IP -
the address of a procedure
.IP -
a numeric constant.
.LP
Only the \fIaddress\fR of a global variable
may be put in a register, not the variable itself.
This approach avoids the very complex problems that would be
caused by procedure calls and indirect pointer references (see
.[~[
aho design compiler
.] sections 14.7 and 14.8]
and
.[~[
spillman side-effects
.]]).
Still, on most machines accessing a global variable using indirect
addressing through a register is much cheaper than
accessing it via its address.
Similarly, if the address of a procedure is put in a register, the
procedure can be called via an indirect call.
.PP
With every item we associate a register type.
This type is
.DS
for local variables: the type contained in the register message
for addresses of variables and procedures: the pointer type
for constants: the general type
.DE
An entity other than a local variable is not taken to be an item
if it is used only once within the current procedure.
.PP
An item is said to be \fIlive\fR at some point of the program text
if its value may be used before it is changed.
As addresses and constants are never changed, all items but local
variables are always live.
The region of text during which a local variable is live is
determined via the live/dead messages generated by the
Live Variable analysis phase of the Global Optimizer.
.NH 3
The allocation determination subphase
.PP
If a procedure has more items than registers,
it may be advantageous to put an item in a register
only during those parts of the procedure where it is most
heavily used.
Such a part will be called a timespan.
With every item we may associate a set of timespans.
If two timespans of an item overlap,
at most one of them may be granted a register,
as there is no use in putting the same item in two
registers simultaneously.
If two timespans of an item are distinct,
both may be chosen;
the item will possibly be put in two
different registers during different parts of the procedure.
The timespan may also consist
of the whole procedure.
.PP
A list of (item,timespan) pairs (allocations)
is build, which will be the input to the decision making
subphase of RA (packing subphase).
This allocation list is the main data structure of RA.
The description of the remainder of RA will be in terms
of allocations rather than items.
The phrase "to assign a register to an allocation" means "to assign
a register to the item of the allocation for the duration of
the timespan of the allocation".
Subsequent subphases will add more information
to this list.
.PP
Several factors must be taken into account when a
timespan for an item is constructed:
.IP 1.
At any \fIentry point\fR of the timespan where the
item is live,
the register must be initialized with the item
.IP 2.
At any exit point of the timespan where the item is live,
the item must be updated.
.LP
In order to decrease these costs, we will only consider timespans with
one entry point
and no live exit points.
.NH 3
The rivals computation subphase
.PP
As stated before, several different items may be put in the
same register, provided they are not live simultaneously.
For every allocation we determine the intersection
of its timespan and the lifetime of its item (i.e. the part of the
procedure during which the item is live).
The allocation is said to be busy during this intersection.
If two allocations are ever busy simultaneously they are
said to be rivals of each other.
The rivals information is added to the allocation list.
.NH 3
The profits computation subphase
.PP
To make good decisions, the packing subphase needs to
know which allocations can be assigned the same register
(rivals information) and how much is gained by
granting an allocation a register.
.PP
Besides the gains of using a register instead of an
item,
two kinds of overhead costs must be
taken into account:
.IP -
the register must be initialized with the item
.IP -
the register must be saved at procedure entry
and restored at procedure exit.
.LP
The latter costs should not be due to a single
allocation, as several allocations can be assigned the same register.
These costs are dealt with after packing has been done.
They do not influence the decisions of the packing algorithm,
they may only undo them.
.PP
The actual profits consist of improvements
of execution time and code size.
As the former is far more difficult to estimate , we will
discuss code size improvements first.
.PP
The gains of putting a certain item in a register
depends on how the item is used.
Suppose the item is
a pointer variable.
On machines that do not have a
double-indirect addressing mode,
two instructions are needed to dereference the variable
if it is not in a register, but only one if it is put in a register.
If the variable is not dereferenced, but simply copied, one instruction
may be sufficient in both cases.
So the gains of putting a pointer variable in a register are higher
if the variable is dereferenced often.
.PP
To make accurate estimates, detailed knowledge of
the target machine and of the code generator
would be needed.
Therefore, a simplification has been made that substantially limits
the amount of target machine information that is needed.
The estimation of the number of bytes saved does
not take into account how an item is used.
Rather, an average number is used.
So these gains are computed as follows:
.DS
#bytes_saved = #occurrences * gains_per_occurrence
.DE
The number of occurrences is derived from
the EM code.
Note that this is not exact either,
as there is no one-to-one correspondence between occurrences in
the EM code and in the assembler code.
.PP
The gains of one occurrence depend on:
.IP 1.
the type of the item
.IP 2.
the size of the item
.IP 3.
the type of the register
.LP
and for local variables and addresses of local variables:
.IP 4.
the type of the local variable
.IP 5.
the offset of the variable in the stackframe
.LP
For every allocation we try two types of registers: the register type
of the item and the general register type.
Only the type with the highest profits will subsequently be used.
This type is added to the allocation information.
.PP
To compute the gains, RA uses a machine-dependent table
that is read from a machine descriptor file.
By means of this table the number of bytes saved can be computed
as a function of the five properties.
.PP
The costs of initializing a register with an item
is determined in a similar way.
The cost of one initialization is also
obtained from the descriptor file.
Note that there can be at most one initialization for any
allocation.
.PP
To summarize, the number of bytes a certain allocation would
save is computed as follows:
.DS
net_bytes_saved = bytes_saved - init_cost
bytes_saved = #occurrences * gains_per_occ
init_cost = #initializations * costs_per_init
.DE
.PP
It is inherently more difficult to estimate the execution
time saved by putting an item in a register,
because it is impossible to predict how
many times an item will be used dynamically.
If an occurrence is part of a loop,
it may be executed many times.
If it is part of a conditional statement,
it may never be executed at all.
In the latter case, the speed of the program may even get
worse if an initialization is needed.
As a clear example, consider the piece of "C" code in Fig. 13.1.
.DS
switch(expr) {
case 1: p(); break;
case 2: p(); p(); break;
case 3: p(); break;
default: break;
}
Fig. 13.1 A "C" switch statement
.DE
Lots of bytes may be saved by putting the address of procedure p
in a register, as p is called four times (statically).
Dynamically, p will be called zero, one or two times,
depending on the value of the expression.
.PP
The optimizer uses the following strategy for optimizing
execution time:
.IP 1.
try to put items in registers during \fIloops\fR first
.IP 2.
always keep the initializing code outside the loop
.IP 3.
if an item is not used in a loop, do not put it in a register if
the initialization costs may be higher than the gains
.LP
The latter condition can be checked by determining the
minimal number of usages (dynamically) of the item during the procedure,
via a shortest path algorithm.
In the example above, this minimal number is zero, so the address of
p is not put in a register.
.PP
The costs of one occurrence is estimated as described above for the
code size.
The number of dynamic occurrences is guessed by looking at the
loop nesting level of every occurrence.
If the item is never used in a loop,
the minimal number of occurrences is used.
From these facts, the execution time improvement is assessed
for every allocation.
.NH 3
The packing subphase
.PP
The packing subphase takes as input the allocation
list and outputs a
description of which allocations should be put
in which registers.
So it is essentially the decision making part of RA.
.PP
The packing system tries to assign a register to allocations one
at a time, in some yet to be defined order.
For every allocation A, it first checks if there is a register
(of the right type)
that is already assigned to one or more allocations,
none of which are rivals of A.
In this case A is assigned the same register.
Else, A is assigned a new register, if one exists.
A table containing the number of free registers for every type
is maintained.
It is initialized with the number of non-scratch registers of
the target computer and updated whenever a
new register is handed out.
The packing algorithm stops when no more allocations can
or need be assigned a register.
.PP
After an allocation A has been packed,
all allocations with non-disjunct timespans (including
A itself) are removed from the allocation list.
.PP
In case the number of items exceeds the number of registers, it
is important to choose the most profitable allocations.
Due to the possibility of having several allocations
occupying the same register,
this problem is quite complex.
Our packing algorithm uses simple heuristic rules
and avoids any combinatorial search.
It has distinct rules for different costs measures.
.PP
If object code size is the most important factor,
the algorithm is greedy and chooses allocations in
decreasing order of their profits attribute.
It does not take into account the fact that
other allocations may be passed over because of
this decision.
.PP
If execution time is at prime stake, the algorithm
first considers allocations whose timespans consist of loops.
After all these have been packed, it considers the remaining
allocations.
Within the two subclasses, it considers allocations
with the highest profits first.
When assigning a register to an allocation with a loop
as timespan, the algorithm checks if the item has
already been put in a register during another loop.
If so, it tries to use the same register for the
new allocation.
After all packing has been done,
it checks if the item has always been assigned the same
register (although not necessarily during all loops).
If so, it tries to put the item in that register during
the entire procedure. This is possible
if the allocation (item,whole_procedure) is not a rival
of any allocation with a different item that has been
assigned to the same register.
Note that this approach is essentially 'bottom up',
as registers are first assigned over small regions
of text which are later collapsed into larger regions.
The advantage of this approach is the fact that
the decisions for one loop can be made independently
of all other loops.
.PP
After the entire packing process has been completed,
we compute for each register how much is gained in using
this register, by simply adding the net profits
of all allocations assigned to it.
This total yield should outweigh the costs of
saving/restoring the register at procedure entry/exit.
As most modern processors (e.g. 68000, Vax) have special
instructions to save/restore several registers,
the differential costs of saving one extra register are by
no means constant.
The costs are read from the machine descriptor file and
compared to the total yields of the registers.
As a consequence of this analysis, some allocations
may have their registers taken away.
.NH 3
The transformation subphase
.PP
The final subphase of RA transforms the EM text according to the
decisions made by the packing system.
It traverses the text of the currently optimized procedure and
changes all occurrences of items at points where
they are assigned a register.
It also clears the score field of the register messages for
normal local variables and emits register messages with a very
high score for the pseudo locals.
At points where registers have to be initialized with items,
it generates EM code to do so.
Finally it tries to decrease the size of the stackframe
of the procedure by looking at which local variables need not
be given memory locations.

28
doc/ego/ra/ra4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
.NH 2
Source files of RA
.PP
The sources of RA are in the following files and packages:
.IP ra.h: 14
declarations of global variables and data structures
.IP ra.c:
the routine main; initialization of target machine-dependent tables
.IP items:
a routine to build the list of items of one procedure;
routines to manipulate items
.IP lifetime:
contains a subroutine that determines when items are live/dead
.IP alloclist:
contains subroutines that build the initial allocations list
and that compute the rivals sets.
.IP profits:
contains a subroutine that computes the profits of the allocations
and a routine that determines the costs of saving/restoring registers
.IP pack:
contains the packing subphase
.IP xform:
contains the transformation subphase
.IP interval:
contains routines to manipulate intervals of time
.IP aux:
contains auxiliary routines
.LP

120
doc/ego/refs.gen Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
%T A Practical Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%A H. van Staveren
%A E.G. Keizer
%A J.W. Stevenson
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
%R Rapport nr IR-74
%D October 1981
%T A Practical Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%A H. van Staveren
%A E.G. Keizer
%A J.W. Stevenson
%J CACM
%V 26
%N 9
%P 654-660
%D September 1983
%T A Unix Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%A H. van Staveren
%A E.G. Keizer
%A J.W. Stevenson
%J Proceedings USENIX conf.
%C Toronto, Canada
%V 26
%D July 1983
%P 255-261
%T Using Peephole Optimization on Intermediate Code
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%A H. van Staveren
%A J.W. Stevenson
%J TOPLAS
%V 4
%N 1
%P 21-36
%D January 1982
%T Language- and Machine-independent Global Optimization on Intermediate Code
%A H.E. Bal
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%J Computer Languages
%V 11
%N 2
%P 105-121
%D April 1986
%T Description of a machine architecture for use with
block structured languages
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
%A H. van Staveren
%A E.G. Keizer
%A J.W. Stevenson
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
%R Rapport nr IR-81
%D August 1983
%T Amsterdam Compiler Kit documentation
%A A.S. Tanenbaum et. al.
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
%R Rapport nr IR-90
%D June 1984
%T The C Programming Language - Reference Manual
%A D.M. Ritchie
%I Bell Laboratories
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
%D 1978
%T Unix programmer's manual, Seventh Edition
%A B.W. Kernighan
%A M.D. McIlroy
%I Bell Laboratories
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
%V 1
%D January 1979
%T A Tour Through the Portable C Compiler
%A S.C. Johnson
%I Bell Laboratories
%B Unix programmer's manual, Seventh Edition
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
%D January 1979
%T Ada Programming Language - MILITARY STANDARD
%A J.D. Ichbiah
%I U.S. Department of Defense
%R ANSI/MIL-STD-1815A
%D 22 January 1983
%T Rationale for the Design of the Ada Programming Language
%A J.D. Ichbiah
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 6
%D June 1979
%T The Programming Languages LISP and TRAC
%A W.L. van der Poel
%I Technische Hogeschool Delft
%C Delft
%D 1972
%T Compiler construction
%A W.M. Waite
%A G. Goos
%I Springer-Verlag
%C New York
%D 1984
%T The C Programming Language
%A B.W. Kernighan
%A D.M. Ritchie
%I Prentice-Hall, Inc
%C Englewood Cliffs,NJ
%D 1978

546
doc/ego/refs.opt Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,546 @@
%T Principles of compiler design
%A A.V. Aho
%A J.D. Ullman
%I Addison-Wesley
%C Reading, Massachusetts
%D 1978
%T The Design and Analysis of Computer Algorithms
%A A.V. Aho
%A J.E. Hopcroft
%A J.D. Ullman
%I Addison-Wesley
%C Reading, Massachusetts
%D 1974
%T Code generation in a machine-independent compiler
%A R.G.G. Cattell
%A J.M. Newcomer
%A B.W. Leverett
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 8
%P 65-75
%D August 1979
%T An algorithm for Reduction of Operator Strength
%A J. Cocke
%A K. Kennedy
%J CACM
%V 20
%N 11
%P 850-856
%D November 1977
%T Reduction of Operator Strength
%A F.E. Allen
%A J. Cocke
%A K. Kennedy
%B Program Flow Analysis
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
%I Prentice-Hall
%C Englewood Cliffs, N.J.
%D 1981
%T Simplifying Code Generation Through Peephole Optimization
%A J.W. Davidson
%R Ph.D. thesis
%I Dept. of Computer Science
%C Univ. of Arizona
%D December 1981
%T A study of selective optimization techniques
%A G.R. Katkus
%R Ph.D. Thesis
%C University of Southern California
%D 1973
%T Automatic subroutine generation in an optimizing compiler
%A J.B. Shaffer
%R Ph.D. Thesis
%C University of Maryland
%D 1978
%T Optimal mixed code generation for microcomputers
%A D.S. Photopoulos
%R Ph.D. Thesis
%C Northeastern University
%D 1981
%T The Design of an Optimizing Compiler
%A W.A. Wulf
%A R.K. Johnsson
%A C.B. Weinstock
%A S.O. Hobbs
%A C.M. Geschke
%I American Elsevier Publishing Company
%C New York
%D 1975
%T Retargetable Compiler Code Generation
%A M. Ganapathi
%A C.N. Fischer
%A J.L. Hennessy
%J ACM Computing Surveys
%V 14
%N 4
%P 573-592
%D December 1982
%T An Optimizing Pascal Compiler
%A R.N. Faiman
%A A.A. Kortesoja
%J IEEE Trans. on Softw. Eng.
%V 6
%N 6
%P 512-518
%D November 1980
%T Experience with the SETL Optimizer
%A S.M. Freudenberger
%A J.T. Schwartz
%J TOPLAS
%V 5
%N 1
%P 26-45
%D Januari 1983
%T An Optimizing Ada Compiler
%A W. Kirchgaesner
%A J. Uhl
%A G. Winterstein
%A G. Goos
%A M. Dausmann
%A S. Drossopoulou
%I Institut fur Informatik II, Universitat Karlsruhe
%D February 1983
%T A Fast Algorithm for Finding Dominators
in a Flowgraph
%A T. Lengauer
%A R.E. Tarjan
%J TOPLAS
%V 1
%N 1
%P 121-141
%D July 1979
%T Optimization of hierarchical directed graphs
%A M.T. Lepage
%A D.T. Barnard
%A A. Rudmik
%J Computer Languages
%V 6
%N 1
%P 19-34
%D Januari 1981
%T Object Code Optimization
%A E.S. Lowry
%A C.W. Medlock
%J CACM
%V 12
%N 1
%P 13-22
%D Januari 1969
%T Automatic Program Improvement:
Variable Usage Transformations
%A B. Maher
%A D.H. Sleeman
%J TOPLAS
%V 5
%N 2
%P 236-264
%D April 1983
%T The design of a global optimizer
%A R.J. Mintz
%A G.A. Fisher
%A M. Sharir
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 9
%P 226-234
%D September 1979
%T Global Optimization by Suppression of Partial Redundancies
%A E. Morel
%A C. Renvoise
%J CACM
%V 22
%N 2
%P 96-103
%D February 1979
%T Efficient Computation of Expressions with Common Subexpressions
%A B. Prabhala
%A R. Sethi
%J JACM
%V 27
%N 1
%P 146-163
%D Januari 1980
%T An Analysis of Inline Substitution for a Structured
Programming Language
%A R.W. Scheifler
%J CACM
%V 20
%N 9
%P 647-654
%D September 1977
%T Immediate Predominators in a Directed Graph
%A P.W. Purdom
%A E.F. Moore
%J CACM
%V 15
%N 8
%P 777-778
%D August 1972
%T The Generation of Optimal Code for Arithmetic Expressions
%A R. Sethi
%A J.D. Ullman
%J JACM
%V 17
%N 4
%P 715-728
%D October 1970
%T Exposing side-effects in a PL/I optimizing compiler
%A T.C. Spillman
%B Information Processing 1971
%I North-Holland Publishing Company
%C Amsterdam
%P 376-381
%D 1971
%T Inner Loops in Flowgraphs and Code Optimization
%A S. Vasudevan
%J Acta Informatica
%N 17
%P 143-155
%D 1982
%T A New Strategy for Code Generation - the General-Purpose
Optimizing Compiler
%A W.H. Harrison
%J IEEE Trans. on Softw. Eng.
%V 5
%N 4
%P 367-373
%D July 1979
%T PQCC: A Machine-Relative Compiler Technology
%A W.M. Wulf
%R CMU-CS-80-144
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
%C Pittsburgh
%D 25 september 1980
%T Machine-independent Pascal code optimization
%A D.R. Perkins
%A R.L. Sites
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 8
%P 201-207
%D August 1979
%T A Case Study of a New Code Generation Technique for Compilers
%A J.L. Carter
%J CACM
%V 20
%N 12
%P 914-920
%D December 1977
%T Table-driven Code Generation
%A S.L. Graham
%J IEEE Computer
%V 13
%N 8
%P 25-33
%D August 1980
%T Register Allocation in Optimizing Compilers
%A B.W. Leverett
%R Ph.D. Thesis, CMU-CS-81-103
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
%C Pittsburgh
%D February 1981
%T Register Allocation via Coloring
%A G.J. Chaitin
%A M.A. Auslander
%A A.K. Chandra
%A J. Cocke
%A M.E. Hopkins
%A P.W. Markstein
%J Computer Languages
%V 6
%N 1
%P 47-57
%D January 1981
%T How to Call Procedures, or Second Thoughts on
Ackermann's Function
%A B.A. Wichmann
%J Software - Practice and Experience
%V 7
%P 317-329
%D 1977
%T Register Allocation Via Usage Counts
%A R.A. Freiburghouse
%J CACM
%V 17
%N 11
%P 638-642
%D November 1974
%T Machine-independent register allocation
%A R.L. Sites
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 8
%P 221-225
%D August 1979
%T An Overview of the Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler Project
%A B.W. Leverett
%A R.G.G Cattell
%A S.O. Hobbs
%A J.M. Newcomer
%A A.H. Reiner
%A B.R. Schatz
%A W.A. Wulf
%J IEEE Computer
%V 13
%N 8
%P 38-49
%D August 1980
%T An Overview of the Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler Project
%A B.W. Leverett
%A R.G.G Cattell
%A S.O. Hobbs
%A J.M. Newcomer
%A A.H. Reiner
%A B.R. Schatz
%A W.A. Wulf
%R CMU-CS-79-105
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
%C Pittsburgh
%D 1979
%T Topics in Code Generation and Register Allocation
%A B.W. Leverett
%R CMU-CS-82-130
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
%C Pittsburgh
%D 28 July 1982
%T Predicting the Effects of Optimization on a Procedure Body
%A J.E. Ball
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 14
%N 8
%P 214-220
%D August 1979
%T The C Language Calling Sequence
%A S.C. Johnson
%A D.M. Ritchie
%I Bell Laboratories
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
%D September 1981
%T A Generalization of Two Code Ordering Optimizations
%A C.W. Fraser
%R TR 82-11
%I Department of Computer Science
%C The University of Arizona, Tucson
%D October 1982
%T A Survey of Data Flow Analysis Techniques
%A K. Kennedy
%B Program Flow Analysis
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
%I Prentice-Hall
%C Englewood Cliffs
%D 1981
%T Delayed Binding in PQCC Generated Compilers
%A W.A. Wulf
%A K.V. Nori
%R CMU-CS-82-138
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
%C Pittsburgh
%D 1982
%T Interprocedural Data Flow Analysis in the presence
of Pointers, Procedure Variables, and Label Variables
%A W.E. Weihl
%J Conf. Rec. of the 7th ACM Symp. on Principles of
Programming Languages
%C Las Vegas, Nevada
%P 83-94
%D 1980
%T Low-Cost, High-Yield Code Optimization
%A D.R. Hanson
%R TR 82-17
%I Department of Computer Science
%C The University of Arizona, Tucson
%D November 1982
%T Program Flow Analysis
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
%I Prentice-Hall
%C Englewood Cliffs
%D 1981
%T A machine independent algorithm for code generation and its
use in retargetable compilers
%A R. Glanville
%R Ph.D. thesis
%C University of California, Berkeley
%D December 1977
%T A formal framework for the derivation of machine-specific optimizers
%A R. Giegerich
%J TOPLAS
%V 5
%N 3
%P 478-498
%D July 1983
%T Engineering a compiler: Vax-11 code generation and optimization
%A P. Anklam
%A D. Cutler
%A R. Heinen
%A M. MacLaren
%I Digital Equipment Corporation
%D 1982
%T Analyzing exotic instructions for a retargetable code generator
%A T.M. Morgan
%A L.A. Rowe
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 17
%N 6
%P 197-204
%D June 1982
%T TCOLAda and the Middle End of the PQCC Ada Compiler
%A B.M. Brosgol
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 15
%N 11
%P 101-112
%D November 1980
%T Implementation Implications of Ada Generics
%A G. Bray
%J Ada Letters
%V III
%N 2
%P 62-71
%D September 1983
%T Attributed Linear Intermediate Representations for Retargetable
Code Generators
%A M. Ganapathi
%A C.N. Fischer
%J Software-Practice and Experience
%V 14
%N 4
%P 347-364
%D April 1984
%T UNCOL: The myth and the fact
%A T.B. Steel
%J Annu. Rev. Autom. Program.
%V 2
%D 1960
%P 325-344
%T Experience with a Graham-Glanville Style Code Generator
%A P. Aigrain
%A S.L. Graham
%A R.R. Henry
%A M.K. McKusick
%A E.P. Llopart
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 13-24
%T Using Dynamic Programming to generate Optimized Code in a
Graham-Glanville Style Code Generator
%A T.W. Christopher
%A P.J. Hatcher
%A R.C. Kukuk
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 25-36
%T Peep - An Architectural Description Driven Peephole Optimizer
%A R.R. Kessler
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 106-110
%T Automatic Generation of Peephole Optimizations
%A J.W. Davidson
%A C.W. Fraser
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 111-116
%T Analysing and Compressing Assembly Code
%A C.W. Fraser
%A E.W. Myers
%A A.L. Wendt
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 117-121
%T Register Allocation by Priority-based Coloring
%A F. Chow
%A J. Hennessy
%J SIGPLAN Notices
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 222-232
%V 19
%N 6
%D June 1984
%P 117-121
%T Code Selection through Object Code Optimization
%A J.W. Davidson
%A C.W. Fraser
%I Dept. of Computer Science
%C Univ. of Arizona
%D November 1981
%T A Portable Machine-Independent Global Optimizer - Design
and Measurements
%A F.C. Chow
%I Computer Systems Laboratory
%C Stanford University
%D December 1983

29
doc/ego/refs.stat Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
%T An analysis of Pascal Programs
%A L.R. Carter
%I UMI Research Press
%C Ann Arbor, Michigan
%D 1982
%T An Emperical Study of FORTRAN Programs
%A D.E. Knuth
%J Software - Practice and Experience
%V 1
%P 105-133
%D 1971
%T F77 Performance
%A D.A. Mosher
%A R.P. Corbett
%J ;login:
%V 7
%N 3
%D June 1982
%T Ada Language Statistics for the iMAX 432 Operating System
%A S.F. Zeigler
%A R.P. Weicker
%J Ada LETTERS
%V 2
%N 6
%P 63-67
%D May 1983

1
doc/ego/sp/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
sp1

171
doc/ego/sp/sp1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Stack pollution
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The "Stack Pollution" optimization technique (SP) decreases the costs
(time as well as space) of procedure calls.
In the EM calling sequence, the actual parameters are popped from
the stack by the \fIcalling\fR procedure.
The ASP (Adjust Stack Pointer) instruction is used for this purpose.
A call in EM is shown in Fig. 8.1
.DS
Pascal: EM:
f(a,2) LOC 2
LOE A
CAL F
ASP 4 -- pop 4 bytes
Fig. 8.1 An example procedure call in Pascal and EM
.DE
As procedure calls occur often in most programs,
the ASP is one of the most frequently used EM instructions.
.PP
The main intention of removing the actual parameters after a procedure call
is to avoid the stack size to increase rapidly.
Yet, in some cases, it is possible to \fIdelay\fR or even \fIavoid\fR the
removal of the parameters without letting the stack grow
significantly.
In this way, considerable savings in code size and execution time may
be achieved, at the cost of a slightly increased stack size.
.PP
A stack adjustment may be delayed if there is some other stack adjustment
later on in the same basic block.
The two ASPs can be combined into one.
.DS
Pascal: EM: optimized EM:
f(a,2) LOC 2 LOC 2
g(3,b,c) LOE A LOE A
CAL F CAL F
ASP 4 LOE C
LOE C LOE B
LOE B LOC 3
LOC 3 CAL G
CAL G ASP 10
ASP 6
Fig. 8.2 An example of local Stack Pollution
.DE
The stacksize will be increased only temporarily.
If the basic block contains another ASP, the ASP 10 may subsequently be
combined with that next ASP, and so on.
.PP
For some back ends, a stack adjustment also takes place
at the point of a procedure return.
There is no need to specify the number of bytes to be popped at a
return.
This provides an opportunity to remove ASPs more globally.
If all ASPs outside any loop are removed, the increase of the
stack size will still only be small, as no such ASP is executed more
than once without an intervening return from the procedure it is part of.
.PP
This second approach is not generally applicable to all target machines,
as some back ends require the stack to be cleaned up at the point of
a procedure return.
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
There is one main problem the implementation has to solve.
In EM, the stack is not only used for passing parameters,
but also for evaluating expressions.
Hence, ASP instructions can only be combined or removed
if certain conditions are satisfied.
.PP
Two consecutive ASPs of one basic block can only be combined
(as described above) if:
.IP 1.
On no point of text in between the two ASPs, any item is popped from
the stack that was pushed onto it before the first ASP.
.IP 2.
The number of bytes popped from the stack by the second ASP must equal
the number of bytes pushed since the first ASP.
.LP
Condition 1. is not satisfied in Fig. 8.3.
.DS
Pascal: EM:
5 + f(10) + g(30) LOC 5
LOC 10
CAL F
ASP 2 -- cannot be removed
LFR 2 -- push function result
ADI 2
LOC 30
CAL G
ASP 2
LFR 2
ADI 2
Fig. 8.3 An illegal transformation
.DE
If the first ASP were removed (delayed), the first ADI would add
10 and f(10), instead of 5 and f(10).
.sp
Condition 2. is not satisfied in Fig. 8.4.
.DS
Pascal: EM:
f(10) + 5 * g(30) LOC 10
CAL F
ASP 2
LFR 2
LOC 5
LOC 30
CAL G
ASP 2
LFR 2
MLI 2 -- 5 * g(30)
ADI 2
Fig. 8.4 A second illegal transformation
.DE
If the two ASPs were combined into one 'ASP 4', the constant 5 would
have been popped, rather than the parameter 10 (so '10 + f(10)*g(30)'
would have been computed).
.PP
The second approach to deleting ASPs (i.e. let the procedure return
do the stack clean-up)
is only applied to the last ASP of every basic block.
Any preceding ASPs are dealt with by the first approach.
The last ASP of a basic block B will only be removed if:
.IP -
on no path in the control flow graph from B to any block containing a
RET (return) there is a basic block that, at some point of its text, pops
items from the stack that it has not itself pushed earlier.
.LP
Clearly, if this condition is satisfied, no harm can be done; no
other basic block will ever access items that were pushed
on the stack before the ASP.
.PP
The number of bytes pushed onto or popped from the stack can be
easily encoded in a so called "pop-push table".
The numbers in general depend on the target machine word- and pointer
size and on the argument given to the instruction.
For example, an ADS instruction is described by:
.DS
-a-p+p
.DE
which means: an 'ADS n' first pops an n-byte value (n being the argument),
next pops a pointer-size value and finally pushes a pointer-size value.
For some infrequently used EM instructions the pop-push numbers
cannot be computed statically.
.PP
The stack pollution algorithm first performs a depth first search over
the control flow graph and marks all blocks that do not satisfy
the global condition.
Next it visits all basic blocks in turn.
For every pair of adjacent ASPs, it checks conditions 1. and 2. and
combines the ASPs if they are satisfied.
The new ASP may be used as first ASP in the next pair.
If a condition fails, it simply continues with the next ASP.
Finally, the last ASP is removed if:
.IP -
nothing has been popped from the stack after the last ASP that was
pushed before it
.IP -
the block was not marked by the depth first search
.IP -
the block is not in a loop
.LP

4
doc/ego/sr/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
sr1
sr2
sr3
sr4

44
doc/ego/sr/sr1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Strength reduction
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The Strength Reduction optimization technique (SR)
tries to replace expensive operators
by cheaper ones,
in order to decrease the execution time
of the program.
A classical example is replacing a 'multiplication by 2'
by an addition or a shift instruction.
These kinds of local transformations are already
done by the EM Peephole Optimizer.
Strength reduction can also be applied
more generally to operators used in a loop.
.DS
i := 1; i := 1;
while i < 100 loop --> TMP := i * 118;
put(i * 118); while i < 100 loop
i := i + 1; put(TMP);
end loop; i := i + 1;
TMP := TMP + 118;
end loop;
Fig. 6.1 An example of Strenght Reduction
.DE
In Fig. 6.1, a multiplication inside a loop is
replaced by an addition inside the loop and a multiplication
outside the loop.
Clearly, this is a global optimization; it cannot
be done by a peephole optimizer.
.PP
In some cases a related technique, \fItest replacement\fR,
can be used to eliminate the
loop variable i.
This technique will not be discussed in this report.
.sp 0
In the example above, the resulting code
can be further optimized by using
constant propagation.
Obviously, this is not the task of the
Strength Reduction phase.

217
doc/ego/sr/sr2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
.NH 2
The model of strength reduction
.PP
In this section we will describe
the transformations performed by
Strength Reduction (SR).
Before doing so, we will introduce the
central notion of an induction variable.
.NH 3
Induction variables
.PP
SR looks for variables whose
values form an arithmetic progression
at the beginning of a loop.
These variables are called induction variables.
The most frequently occurring example of such
a variable is a loop-variable in a high-order
programming language.
Several quite sophisticated models of strength
reduction can be found in the literature.
.[
cocke reduction strength cacm
.]
.[
allen cocke kennedy reduction strength
.]
.[
lowry medlock cacm
.]
.[
aho compiler design
.]
In these models the notion of an induction variable
is far more general than the intuitive notion
of a loop-variable.
The definition of an induction variable we present here
is more restricted,
yielding a simpler model and simpler transformations.
We think the principle source for strength reduction lies in
expressions using a loop-variable,
i.e. a variable that is incremented or decremented
by the same amount after every loop iteration,
and that cannot be changed in any other way.
.PP
Of course, the EM code does not contain high level constructs
such as for-statements.
We will define an induction variable in terms
of the Intermediate Code of the optimizer.
Note that the notions of a loop in the
EM text and of a firm basic block
were defined in section 3.3.5.
.sp
.UL definition
.sp 0
An induction variable i of a loop L is a local variable
that is never accessed indirectly,
whose size is the word size of the target machine, and
that is assigned exactly once within L,
the assignment:
.IP -
being of the form i := i + c or i := c +i,
c is a constant
called the \fIstep value\fR of i.
.IP -
occurring in a firm block of L.
.LP
(Note that the first restriction on the assignment
is not described in terms of the Intermediate Code;
we will give such a description later; the current
definition is easier to understand however).
.NH 3
Recognized expressions
.PP
SR recognizes certain expressions using
an induction variable and replaces
them by cheaper ones.
Two kinds of expensive operations are recognized:
multiplication and array address computations.
The expressions that are simplified must
use an induction variable
as an operand of
a multiplication or as index in an array expression.
.PP
Often a linear function of an induction variable is used,
rather than the variable itself.
In these cases optimization is still possible.
We call such expressions \fIiv-expressions\fR.
.sp
.UL definition:
.sp 0
An iv-expression of an induction variable i of a loop L is
an expression that:
.IP -
uses only the operators + and - (unary as well as binary)
.IP -
uses i as operand exactly once
.IP -
uses (besides i) only constants or variables that are
never changed in L as operands.
.LP
.PP
The expressions recognized by SR are of the following forms:
.IP (1)
iv_expression * constant
.IP (2)
constant * iv_expression
.IP (3)
A[iv-expression] := (assign to array element)
.IP (4)
A[iv-expression] (use array element)
.IP (5)
& A[iv-expression] (take address of array element)
.LP
(Note that EM has different instructions to use an array element,
store into one, or take the address of one, resp. LAR, SAR, and AAR).
.sp 0
The size of the elements of A must
be known statically.
In cases (3) and (4) this size
must equal the word size of the
target machine.
.NH 3
Transformations
.PP
With every recognized expression we associate
a new temporary local variable TMP,
allocated in the stack frame of the
procedure containing the expression.
At any program point within the loop, TMP will
contain the following value:
.IP multiplication: 18
the current value of iv-expression * constant
.IP arrays:
the current value of &A[iv-expression].
.LP
In the second case, TMP essentially is a pointer variable,
pointing to the element of A that is currently in use.
.sp 0
If the same expression occurs several times in the loop,
the same temporary local is used each time.
.PP
Three transformations are applied to the EM text:
.IP (1)
TMP is initialized with the right value.
This initialization takes place just
before the loop.
.IP (2)
The recognized expression is simplified.
.IP (3)
TMP is incremented; this takes place just
after the induction variable is incremented.
.LP
For multiplication, the initial value of TMP
is the value of the recognized expression at
the program point immediately before the loop.
For arrays, TMP is initialized with the address
of the first array element that is accessed.
So the initialization code is:
.DS
TMP := iv-expression * constant; or
TMP := &A[iv-expression]
.DE
At the point immediately before the loop,
the induction variable will already have been
initialized,
so the value used in the code above will be the
value it has during the first iteration.
.PP
For multiplication, the recognized expression can simply be
replaced by TMP.
For array optimizations, the replacement
depends on the form:
.DS
\fIform\fR \fIreplacement\fR
(3) A[iv-expr] := *TMP := (assign indirect)
(4) A[iv-expr] *TMP (use indirect)
(5) &A[iv-expr] TMP
.DE
The '*' denotes the indirect operator. (Note that
EM has different instructions to do
an assign-indirect and a use-indirect).
As the size of the array elements is restricted
to be the word size in case (3) and (4),
only one EM instruction needs to
be generated in all cases.
.PP
The amount by which TMP is incremented is:
.IP multiplication: 18
step value * constant
.IP arrays:
step value * element size
.LP
Note that the step value (see definition of induction variable above),
the constant, and the element size (see previous section) can all
be determined statically.
If the sign of the induction variable in the
iv-expression is negative, the amount
must be negated.
.PP
The transformations are demonstrated by an example.
.DS
i := 100; i := 100;
while i > 1 loop TMP := (6-i) * 5;
X := (6-i) * 5 + 2; while i > 1 loop
Y := (6-i) * 5 - 8; --> X := TMP + 2;
i := i - 3; Y := TMP - 8;
end loop; i := i - 3;
TMP := TMP + 15;
end loop;
Fig. 6.2 Example of complex Strength Reduction transformations
.DE
The expression '(6-i)*5' is recognized twice. The constant
is 5.
The step value is -3.
The sign of i in the recognized expression is '-'.
So the increment value of TMP is -(-3*5) = +15.

232
doc/ego/sr/sr3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
Like most phases, SR deals with one procedure
at a time.
Within a procedure, SR works on one loop at a time.
Loops are processed in textual order.
If loops are nested inside each other,
SR starts with the outermost loop and proceeds in the
inwards direction.
This order is chosen,
because it enables the optimization
of multi-dimensional array address computations,
if the elements are accessed in the usual way
(i.e. row after row, rather than column after column).
For every loop, SR first detects all induction variables
and then tries to recognize
expressions that can be optimized.
.NH 3
Finding induction variables
.PP
The process of finding induction variables
can conveniently be split up
into two parts.
First, the EM text of the loop is scanned to find
all \fIcandidate\fR induction variables,
which are word-sized local variables
that are assigned precisely once
in the loop, within a firm block.
Second, for every candidate, the single assignment
is inspected, to see if it has the form
required by the definition of an induction variable.
.PP
Candidates are found by scanning the EM code of the loop.
During this scan, two sets are maintained.
The set "cand" contains all variables that were
assigned exactly once so far, within a firm block.
The set "dismiss" contains all variables that
should not be made a candidate.
Initially, both sets are empty.
If a variable is assigned to, it is put
in the cand set, if three conditions are met:
.IP 1.
the variable was not in cand or dismiss already
.IP 2.
the assignment takes place in a firm block
.IP 3.
the assignment is not a ZRL instruction (assignment by zero)
or a SDL instruction (store double local).
.LP
If any condition fails, the variable is dismissed from cand
(if it was there already) and put in dismiss
(if it was not there already).
.sp 0
All variables for which no register message was generated (i.e. those
variables that may be accessed indirectly) are assumed
to be changed in the loop.
.sp 0
All variables that remain in cand are candidate induction variables.
.PP
From the set of candidates, the induction variables can
be determined, by inspecting the single assignment.
The assignment must match one of the EM patterns below.
('x' is the candidate. 'ws' is the word size of the target machine.
'n' is any number.)
.DS
\fIpattern\fR \fIstep size\fR
INL x | +1
DEL x | -1
LOL x ; (INC | DEC) ; STL x | +1 | -1
LOL x ; LOC n ; (ADI ws | SBI ws) ; STL x | +n | -n
LOC n ; LOL x ; ADI ws ; STL x. +n
.DE
From the patterns the step size of the induction variable
can also be determined.
These step sizes are displayed on the right hand side.
.sp
For every induction variable we maintain the following information:
.IP -
the offset of the variable in the stackframe of its procedure
.IP -
a pointer to the EM text of the assignment statement
.IP -
the step value
.LP
.NH 3
Optimizing expressions
.PP
If any induction variables of the loop were found,
the EM text of the loop is scanned again,
to detect expressions that can be optimized.
SR scans for multiplication and array instructions.
Whenever it finds such an instruction, it analyses the
code in front of it.
If an expression is to be optimized, it must
be generated by the following syntax rules.
.DS
optimizable_expr:
iv_expr const mult |
const iv_expr mult |
address iv_expr address array_instr;
mult:
MLI ws |
MLU ws ;
array_instr:
LAR ws |
SAR ws |
AAR ws ;
const:
LOC n ;
.DE
An 'address' is an EM instruction that loads an
address on the stack.
An instruction like LOL may be an 'address', if
the size of an address (pointer size, =ps) is
the same as the word size.
If the pointer size is twice the word size,
instructions like LDL are an 'address'.
(The addresses in the third grammar rule
denote resp. the array address and the
array descriptor address).
.DS
address:
LAE |
LAL |
LOL if ps=ws |
LOE ,, |
LIL ,, |
LDL if ps=2*ws |
LDE ,, ;
.DE
The notion of an iv-expression was introduced earlier.
.DS
iv_expr:
iv_expr unair_op |
iv_expr iv_expr binary_op |
loopconst |
iv ;
unair_op:
NGI ws |
INC |
DEC ;
binary_op:
ADI ws |
ADU ws |
SBI ws |
SBU ws ;
loopconst:
const |
LOL x if x is not changed in loop ;
iv:
LOL x if x is an induction variable ;
.DE
An iv_expression must satisfy one additional constraint:
it must use exactly one operand that is an induction
variable.
A simple, hand written, top-down parser is used
to recognize an iv-expression.
It scans the EM code from right to left
(recall that EM is essentially postfix).
It uses semantic attributes (inherited as well as
derived) to check the additional constraint.
.PP
All information assembled during the recognition
process is put in a 'code_info' structure.
This structure contains the following information:
.IP -
the optimizable code itself
.IP -
the loop and basic block the code is part of
.IP -
the induction variable
.IP -
the iv-expression
.IP -
the sign of the induction variable in the
iv-expression
.IP -
the offset and size of the temporary local variable
.IP -
the expensive operator (MLI, LAR etc.)
.IP -
the instruction that loads the constant
(for multiplication) or the array descriptor
(for arrays).
.LP
The entire transformation process is driven
by this information.
As the EM text is represented internally
as a list, this process consists
mainly of straightforward list manipulations.
.sp 0
The initialization code must be put
immediately before the loop entry.
For this purpose a \fIheader block\fR is
created that has the loop entry block as
its only successor and that dominates the
entry block.
The CFG and all relations (SUCC,PRED, IDOM, LOOPS etc.)
are updated.
.sp 0
An EM instruction that will
replace the optimizable code
is created and put at the place of the old code.
The list representing the old optimizable code
is used to create a list for the initializing code,
as they are similar.
Only two modifications are required:
.IP -
if the expensive operator is a LAR or SAR,
it must be replaced by an AAR, as the initial value
of TMP is the \fIaddress\fR of the first
array element that is accessed.
.IP -
code must be appended to store the result of the
expression in TMP.
.LP
Finally, code to increment TMP is created and put after
the code of the single assignment to the
induction variable.
The generated code uses either an integer addition
(ADI) or an integer-to-pointer addition (ADS)
to do the increment.
.PP
SR maintains a set of all expressions that have already
been recognized in the present loop.
Such expressions are said to be \fIavailable\fR.
If an expression is recognized that is
already available,
no new temporary local variable is allocated for it,
and the code to initialize and increment the local
is not generated.

28
doc/ego/sr/sr4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
.NH 2
Source files of SR
.PP
The sources of SR are in the following files
and packages:
.IP sr.h: 14
declarations of global variables and
data structures
.IP sr.c:
the routine main; a driving routine to process
(possibly nested) loops in the right order
.IP iv
implements a procedure that finds the induction variables
of a loop
.IP reduce
implements a procedure that finds optimizable expressions
and that does the transformations
.IP cand
implements a procedure that finds the candidate induction
variables; used to implement iv
.IP xform
implements several useful routines that transform
lists of EM text or a CFG; used to implement reduce
.IP expr
implements a procedure that parses iv-expressions
.IP aux
implements several auxiliary procedures.
.LP

5
doc/ego/ud/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
ud1
ud2
ud3
ud4
ud5

58
doc/ego/ud/ud1 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
.bp
.NH 1
Use-Definition analysis
.NH 2
Introduction
.PP
The "Use-Definition analysis" phase (UD) consists of two related optimization
techniques that both depend on "Use-Definition" information.
The techniques are Copy Propagation and Constant Propagation.
They are best explained via an example (see Figs. 11.1 and 11.2).
.DS
(1) A := B A := B
... --> ...
(2) use(A) use(B)
Fig. 11.1 An example of Copy Propagation
.DE
.DS
(1) A := 12 A := 12
... --> ...
(2) use(A) use(12)
Fig. 11.2 An example of Constant Propagation
.DE
Both optimizations have to check that the value of A at line (2)
can only be obtained at line (1).
Copy Propagation also has to assure that the value of B is
the same at line (1) as at line (2).
.PP
One purpose of both transformations is to introduce
opportunities for the Dead Code Elimination optimization.
If the variable A is used nowhere else, the assignment A := B
becomes useless and can be eliminated.
.sp 0
If B is less expensive to access than A (e.g. this is sometimes the case
if A is a local variable and B is a global variable),
Copy Propagation directly improves the code itself.
If A is cheaper to access the transformation will not be performed.
Likewise, a constant as operand may be cheeper than a variable.
Having a constant as operand may also facilitate other optimizations.
.PP
The design of UD is based on the theory described in section
14.1 and 14.3 of.
.[
aho compiler design
.]
As a main departure from that theory,
we do not demand the statement A := B to become redundant after
Copy Propagation.
If B is cheaper to access than A, the optimization is always performed;
if B is more expensive than A, we never do the transformation.
If A and B are equally expensive UD uses the heuristic rule to
replace infrequently used variables by frequently used ones.
This rule increases the chances of the assignment to become useless.
.PP
In the next section we will give a brief outline of the data
flow theory used
for the implementation of UD.

64
doc/ego/ud/ud2 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
.NH 2
Data flow information
.PP
.NH 3
Use-Definition information
.PP
A \fIdefinition\fR of a variable A is an assignment to A.
A definition is said to \fIreach\fR a point p if there is a
path in the control flow graph from the definition to p, such that
A is not redefined on that path.
.PP
For every basic block B, we define the following sets:
.IP GEN[b] 9
the set of definitions in b that reach the end of b.
.IP KILL[b]
the set of definitions outside b that define a variable that
is changed in b.
.IP IN[b]
the set of all definitions reaching the beginning of b.
.IP OUT[b]
the set of all definitions reaching the end of b.
.LP
GEN and KILL can be determined by inspecting the code of the procedure.
IN and OUT are computed by solving the following data flow equations:
.DS
(1) OUT[b] = IN[b] - KILL[b] + GEN[b]
(2) IN[b] = OUT[p1] + ... + OUT[pn],
where PRED(b) = {p1, ... , pn}
.DE
.NH 3
Copy information
.PP
A \fIcopy\fR is a definition of the form "A := B".
A copy is said to be \fIgenerated\fR in a basic block n if
it occurs in n and there is no subsequent assignment to B in n.
A copy is said to be \fIkilled\fR in n if:
.IP (i)
it occurs in n and there is a subsequent assignment to B within n, or
.IP (ii)
it occurs outside n, the definition A := B reaches the beginning of n
and B is changed in n (note that a copy also is a definition).
.LP
A copy \fIreaches\fR a point p, if there are no assignments to B
on any path in the control flow graph from the copy to p.
.PP
We define the following sets:
.IP C_GEN[b] 11
the set of all copies in b generated in b.
.IP C_KILL[b]
the set of all copies killed in b.
.IP C_IN[b]
the set of all copies reaching the beginning of b.
.IP C_OUT[b]
the set of all copies reaching the end of b.
.LP
C_IN and C_OUT are computed by solving the following equations:
(root is the entry node of the current procedure; '*' denotes
set intersection)
.DS
(1) C_OUT[b] = C_IN[b] - C_KILL[b] + C_GEN[b]
(2) C_IN[b] = C_OUT[p1] * ... * C_OUT[pn],
where PRED(b) = {p1, ... , pn} and b /= root
C_IN[root] = {all copies}
.DE

26
doc/ego/ud/ud3 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
.NH 2
Pointers and subroutine calls
.PP
The theory outlined above assumes that variables can
only be changed by a direct assignment.
This condition does not hold for EM.
In case of an assignment through a pointer variable,
it is in general impossible to see which variable is affected
by the assignment.
Similar problems occur in the presence of procedure calls.
Therefore we distinguish two kinds of definitions:
.IP -
an \fIexplicit\fR definition is a direct assignment to one
specific variable
.IP -
an \fIimplicit\fR definition is the potential alteration of
a variable as a result of a procedure call or an indirect assignment.
.LP
An indirect assignment causes implicit definitions to
all variables that may be accessed indirectly, i.e.
all local variables for which no register message was generated
and all global variables.
If a procedure contains an indirect assignment it may change the
same set of variables, else it may change some global variables directly.
The KILL, GEN, IN and OUT sets contain explicit as well
as implicit definitions.

78
doc/ego/ud/ud4 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
.NH 2
Implementation
.PP
UD first builds a number of tables:
.IP locals: 9
contains information about the local variables of the
current procedure (offset,size,whether a register message was found
for it and, if so, the score field of that message)
.IP defs:
a table of all explicit definitions appearing in the
current procedure.
.IP copies:
a table of all copies appearing in the
current procedure.
.LP
Every variable (local as well as global), definition and copy
is identified by a unique number, which is the index
in the table.
All tables are constructed by traversing the EM code.
A fourth table, "vardefs" is used, indexed by a 'variable number',
which contains for every variable the set of explicit definitions of it.
Also, for each basic block b, the set CHGVARS containing all variables
changed by it is computed.
.PP
The GEN sets are obtained in one scan over the EM text,
by analyzing every EM instruction.
The KILL set of a basic block b is computed by looking at the
set of variables
changed by b (i.e. CHGVARS[b]).
For every such variable v, all explicit definitions to v
(i.e. vardefs[v]) that are not in GEN[b] are added to KILL[b].
Also, the implicit defininition of v is added to KILL[b].
Next, the data flow equations for use-definition information
are solved,
using a straight forward, iterative algorithm.
All sets are represented as bitvectors, so the operations
on sets (union, difference) can be implemented efficiently.
.PP
The C_GEN and C_KILL sets are computed simultaneously in one scan
over the EM text.
For every copy A := B appearing in basic block b we do
the following:
.IP 1.
for every basic block n /= b that changes B, see if the definition A := B
reaches the beginning of n (i.e. check if the index number of A := B in
the "defs" table is an element of IN[n]);
if so, add the copy to C_KILL[n]
.IP 2.
if B is redefined later on in b, add the copy to C_KILL[b], else
add it to C_GEN[b]
.LP
C_IN and C_OUT are computed from C_GEN and C_KILL via the second set of
data flow equations.
.PP
Finally, in one last scan all opportunities for optimization are
detected.
For every use u of a variable A, we check if
there is a unique explicit definition d reaching u.
.sp
If the definition is a copy A := B and B has the same value at d as
at u, then the use of A at u may be changed into B.
The latter condition can be verified as follows:
.IP -
if u and d are in the same basic block, see if there is
any assignment to B in between d and u
.IP -
if u and d are in different basic blocks, the condition is
satisfied if there is no assignment to B in the block of u prior to u
and d is in C_IN[b].
.LP
Before the transformation is actually done, UD first makes sure the
alteration is really desirable, as described before.
The information needed for this purpose (access costs of local and
global variables) is read from a machine descriptor file.
.sp
If the only definition reaching u has the form "A := constant", the use
of A at u is replaced by the constant.

19
doc/ego/ud/ud5 Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
.NH 2
Source files of UD
.PP
The sources of UD are in the following files and packages:
.IP ud.h: 14
declarations of global variables and data structures
.IP ud.c:
the routine main; initialization of target machine dependent tables
.IP defs:
routines to compute the GEN and KILL sets and routines to analyse
EM instructions
.IP const:
routines involved in constant propagation
.IP copy:
routines involved in copy propagation
.IP aux:
contains auxiliary routines
.LP

32
doc/em/.distr Normal file
View File

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
Makefile
READ_ME
addend.n
app.codes.nr
app.exam.nr
app.int.nr
assem.nr
cont.nr
descr.nr
dspace.nr
em.i
env.nr
even.c
exam.e
exam.p
int
intro.nr
ip.awk
ispace.nr
mach.nr
macr.nr
mapping.nr
mem.nr
print
show
title.nr
traps.nr
types.nr
mkdispatch.c
dispat1.sed
dispat2.sed
dispat3.sed

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More